JP6744692B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention is applicable to so-called bullet-type gaming machines (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko gaming machines” or “pachinko machines”), spinning drum type gaming machines (generally referred to as “pachi-slot machines”, “slot machines”), and the like. It relates to a gaming machine.

In a general pachinko game machine, whether or not to generate a jackpot advantageous to the player by shooting a game ball (game medium) to the game area and entering the starting opening provided in the game area Draw lots. Then, the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the lottery result regarding the big hit.

In addition, in such a gaming machine, a variable display using a decorative design is performed on a liquid crystal display device, and a stop mode of the decorative design indicates to a player whether or not a big hit is won. Further, in a liquid crystal display device, an effect is often displayed in combination with a variable display of a decorative pattern, and the effect is selected from a plurality of kinds of effects having different expectations for a big hit (for example, Patent Document 1). 1).

JP, 2010-088524, A

However, in such a gaming machine, the interest from Yu technique's there is a problem that is difficult to obtain.

Therefore, in view of the above problems, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can make a player expect a big hit.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of the present invention, in claim 1, obtains start information by a game ball passing through a predetermined area provided in the game area, and the start condition of the obtained start information is satisfied. Sometimes a lottery means for performing a lottery on a big hit, a special figure effecting means for performing a change effect on a display device in accordance with a change display of a special symbol showing the winning of the big hit based on the lottery result by the lottery means, and the predetermined area Pending storage means for holding the starting information acquired in response to passing, and starting memory display means capable of displaying the starting information held in the pending storage means on a display device as a starting memory display, Pre-judgment means for making pre-judgment of the start information before the start condition is satisfied, and a variation effect in which the start condition of the acquired start information is satisfied and executed. Specific effect means for executing the effect, and the variable effect performed based on the start information acquired before the start information that causes the specific effect to be performed in the variable effect performed by the satisfaction of the start condition. In the aforesaid, the specific effect, which is performed in the variation effect that is performed later, is provided with a precursor effect means for performing a predictive effect, and the predictive effect executed by the predictive effect means is performed later. It is an effect that suggests that the specific effect is executed in the fluctuating effect, and when the mode of the aforesaid effect that suggests that the specific effect is executed becomes a specific mode, in the fluctuating effect that is performed later, It is configured to notify that the specific effect is to be executed, and which of the start information that may cause the specific effect to be executed is included in the start information that is held in the hold storage unit. By displaying the display mode of the start memory display by the start memory display means in a change mode different from the normal display mode so as to be recognizable by the player, the start information displayed in the change mode is acquired. In the case where a plurality of the starting information acquired before is stored in the holding storage means, a plurality of the starting information acquired before the starting information displayed in the change mode is acquired. When the precursor effect is executable in each variation effect, when the advance determination made by the advance determination means before the start condition is satisfied and the start condition of the start information by the lottery means is satisfied. By making the process common to the performed lottery, the specific effect is the start information. It is possible to determine that the advance condition of the start information is satisfied by the advance determination by the advance determination means.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to inspire a sense of expectation to a large per.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make a player expect a big hit.

It is a perspective view showing a state where the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. FIG. 6 is a perspective view for explaining a structure for attaching and detaching the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) seen from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for explaining the relation between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining an operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right back of a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the site|part of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state where the press operation part in the operation unit was pressed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as disassembled and seen from the rear. (A) It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and which was seen from the front, and (B) is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where the front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the tamperproof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamperproof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamperproof member as seen from the front, and (D). FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing the action of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnects and shows a door frame in the up-down direction substantially center. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening and closing unit in the body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit and was seen after. It is a perspective view explaining an operation of a standing wall part of a power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, which is disassembled and seen from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as seen from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a door frame and a sliding rod for a main body frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was seen after. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the sliding rod for door frames and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on a game board attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like as seen from the front. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 103. FIG. 104 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 taken in the vertical direction. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front component member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like as seen from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board seen from behind in FIG. 106. It is a partial sectional view showing a crime prevention structure on the pivotal support side of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the rear in the state where the game board was stored in the body frame. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from the back diagonally. It is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board taken along the vertical center and viewed from above. It is the sectional view which saw the game board at the center of the left-right direction and was seen from the right side. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the table unit in the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the attacker unit and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit of the front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit of the front unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the starting opening unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the starting opening unit and was seen after. (A) is a perspective view of the front side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit of the front unit as seen from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the front side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the front side unit and was seen after. It is a front view of the center accessory of a front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the distribution member of a center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the distribution member of a center accessory from the back. It is a front sectional view showing a left route in a center accessory along with a part of a warp passage. It is a perspective view showing a lower warp passage member and a stage member in a center accessory. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit of a center character from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the second attacker unit of the center accessory and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 2nd attacker unit of a center character and was seen from back. (A) It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd starting opening unit of a center character, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd starting opening unit of the center character from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd starting opening unit of a center accessory, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and disassembled the 2nd starting opening unit of a center accessory. (A) is front sectional drawing which shows the right route in a center accessory, (b) is BB sectional drawing in (a). (A) is an enlarged front sectional view showing an essential part of the right route when the second starting opening of the center accessory is in an open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the second starting opening in (a). FIG. It is a front sectional view which expands and shows the principal part of the right route when the second special winning opening in a center accessory is in an open state. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main component and saw it from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main component and it looked at after. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (B) shows an interrupt process periodically executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the special design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 1st special design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first big hit game start processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the first big hit game processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special design process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 2nd special design big hit decision processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 2nd special design stop design setting processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 2nd special design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the second special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the second big hit game start processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the second big hit game processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. (A) is an example of a big hit determination table used in the lottery process for the big hit, (B) is an example of a symbol determination table used in the lottery process for the type of big hit. (A) is an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of a big hit, and (B) is an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of reach loss. It is an example of a lottery effect distribution table for allocating a reach effect (lottery effect) based on a variation pattern. It is a figure for explaining the degree of expectation for each lottery effect. It is a figure for explaining an example of control which can adjust the propriety of V winning. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design normal processing which is executed by the main control MPU of the same execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about sub main processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16ms steady-state processing performed by peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about payment appearance processing which is performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about prize ball processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the movement of the game ball in the vicinity of the first start opening and the first big winning opening. It is a figure explaining display of a pattern etc. in a main liquid crystal display. It is a figure explaining the example of a display of a reservation display. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the variable display example of a decorative pattern in a main liquid crystal display device. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the variable display example of a decorative design in a main liquid crystal display. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the example of an effect display concerning continuous hit effect. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the example of an effect display concerning continuous hit consecutive effects. It is a figure (the 3) explaining the example of an effect display concerning continuous hit consecutive effects. It is a figure (the 4) explaining the example of an effect display concerning continuous hit consecutive effects. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the example of an effect display concerning the decisive battle continuation effect of the 1st example. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the example of an effect display concerning the decisive battle continuation effect of the 1st example. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the example of an effect display concerning the decisive battle continuation effect of the 2nd example. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the example of an effect display concerning the decisive battle continuation effect of the 2nd example. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the example of an effect display concerning a hold promotion effect. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the example of an effect display concerning a hold promotion effect. It is a figure which illustrates the relationship between a hold display color and an expectation. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect display concerning period freezing effect.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame forming the pachinko machine as seen from the rear, and FIG. 7 is the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board forming the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front.

1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, and an outer frame 2 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable and the front side is opened. A box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, into which a game ball as a game medium is hit, a main body frame 3 and a front surface of the game board 4 are played. It is provided with a door frame 5 which is pivotably supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the person side. On the door frame 5 of this pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 is visible from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. It is provided with a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the pachinko machine 1 has a horizontal direction. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2 and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

In the pachinko machine 1, in a front view, a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven is exposed through a substantially circular game window 101, and the game area 1100 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and two lower plates 302 are arranged on the upper and lower sides. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player can operate the handle device 500 while the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotary operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting ball strength according to the rotation angle, and the player can play the game.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is impossible to insert a hand or the like into a game ball, an obstacle nail (not shown), various winning holes, a prize or the like in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a back cover 900 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment/detachment structure of the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. .. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 are provided, and the connecting members 14 form the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of this example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and are substantially vertically centered at the left and right ends. An engaging cutout portion 15 is provided that penetrates through and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In addition, a mounting step portion 10a that is recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It is like this.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material having a constant cross-sectional shape (for example, an aluminum alloy), the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward at the rear end portion. The protrusion 16 having a cavity that penetrates in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided to enhance the strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall, a worker's The pachinko machine 1 can be easily hooked with a finger so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held, and the external appearance can be improved. Note that, for convenience, in some drawings, a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted and engaged in the engaging cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are left-right asymmetrical, respectively. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been done.

In this connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw is passed through the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13. By screwing into the vertical piece 18, the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protrusion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like this. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates through the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surfaces of the lower ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to an upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame board 10 and a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame board 12 so as to face the upper support fitting 20. And a reinforcing metal member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower metal supporting member 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal member 22. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in an openable and closable manner.

First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front side of the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projecting piece. A support hook hole 20c formed by cutting out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20a and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b (FIG. 14), and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. A shaft hook pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support member 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support member 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the supporting projection piece 20b is enhanced by the hanging wall 20e that hangs from the outer edge of the supporting projection piece 20b, and the details of the supporting projection piece 20b will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protruding piece 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side (the right side) on the opposite side where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted and fixed on the reinforcing fitting 22 and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-like support protrusion 21c protruding from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the front side of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support protrusion piece 21c. And a support protrusion 21d. A main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 66, etc.) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 into the main body frame support hole of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is formed. The main frame 3 can be easily supported by the support hook hole 20c so that the main body frame 3 can be freely opened and closed.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-back direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are used as hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, the hook portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are engaged with each other by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating the lock lock 1010 in one direction. The main frame 3 can be detached and opened to the outer frame 2.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal member 22. This guide plate 26 is for guiding the main body frame 3 smoothly when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by the rivet 28. It is rotatably supported by the shaft. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operating portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the drawing, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it moves away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

As shown in FIG. 14(B) and FIG. 15, in this lock member 27, in the state of being supported by the supporting projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the stopper member 20e so as to close a part of the support hook hole 20c bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is deepest in the support hook hole 20c. The part is not closed, and a space into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the deepest part of the support hook hole 20c.

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted in the deepest part of the support hook hole 20c, and the side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a is the inlet end. In the normal state in which it faces the stop hanging portion 20f (in this state, there is a slight gap between the side of the distal end of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and it is not in contact). In the axial support state, the centers of the axial support pin 633 located at the deepest portion of the bent support hook hole 20c and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are diagonally displaced and face each other. ing. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is provided. Since almost no load is applied to the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a from the above, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. Since the stopper 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, the lock member 27 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. Has become. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the axial support pin 633 is acted on by the acting force F in the direction of exiting along the inclination of the support hook hole 20c formed in the V shape and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 27d, the acting force F is The component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the support pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) is brought into contact with the shaft support pin 633 and the inner surface on one side of the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27), so that the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is supported. A moment for rotating in a direction (clockwise direction shown in the drawing) that separates from the protruding piece 20b does not act, and the shaft support pin 633 is sandwiched between the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inner surface of the support hook hole 20c on one side. Hold the state. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded, even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and the elastic piece integrally formed of synthetic resin is used. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the tip end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 in a direction (clockwise in the drawing) away from the support protrusion piece 20b, one side of the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is rotated. Is abutted against the stop hanging portion 20f and does not rotate in the direction of further disengagement, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b.

Even if the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate in shape, the tip end portion of the lock member 27 does not face a rotational moment due to the action of the component force F1 described above, or the tip end portion of the lock member 27 is directed toward the outside of the support protrusion 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded, and The present applicant has pointed out that even if the member 27 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting protrusion 20b. I have confirmed.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame pivot support fitting 644 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16(A), the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed in, thereby As shown in FIG. 16(B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. When the shaft support pin 633 reaches the deepest part of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other, so that the lock member 27 is elastic. The stopper 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again by being urged by the elastic force of the piece 27c to rotate in the clockwise direction and closes the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c, and at the same time, the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a. Faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out from the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during a normal opening/closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16(E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b and the operating portion 27b of the lock member 27 is rotated counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Then, the main body frame 3 is lifted to release the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of aluminum alloy), when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily nail the nails, and the present pachinko machine 1 can be easily applied to existing island equipment. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light-weight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, the wall thickness can be reduced while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The lateral width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension. The game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed at the same time as the main body frame 3 can be mounted.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the inner frame is fixedly attached to the outer surface and the connecting member 14 is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in an engaged state, the outer frame 2 can be assembled with high strength and is sturdy. It is designed so that it can have a rectangular frame shape. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14 and then the upper support fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, Adjacent ball lending machine) can be attached closely.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right side. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the left front side, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the right rear side. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the back.

The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has, as shown in the figure, a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It is provided with a left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 is a plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. Attached to the foul cover unit 540, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. And a glass unit 590 that is operated.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 28 is an enlarged view of the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. FIG.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a game window 101 formed in a vertically long rectangular outer shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically elongated substantially elliptical inner periphery. The frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the lower end of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in a front view.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can also hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or detached. It has become.

In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower part of the game window 101 with the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side from the center in the left-right direction in rear view (open side) ) Disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. The handle device relay substrate 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192, and the firing cover 191 sandwiching the center in the left-right direction. And a door frame base substrate 194 that is arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay substrate 192 and the like (on the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear (on the side of the pivotal support)), and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base. A door frame base substrate cover 195 that covers the rear side of the substrate 194, and a wiring cord 196 that is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 and connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side (Fig. Wiring holding member 197 for holding a part of the wiring holding member 197).

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the whole is improved by fixing the reinforcing unit 150, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets, to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it is strong enough to support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like.

The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral controller provided in the game board 4 described later. 4140 is connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified acoustic signal to the speakers 130, 222, and 262 is provided. In the present example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative units 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring cord 196 connecting the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the like with the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control section 4140, and the like is the right side (the axis) of the door frame base board 194 in a rear view. After being bundled together in the position of the (support side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

The door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, and penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the inner shape is vertically long. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, in the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a rectangular cutout 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Are formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and the widths of the left and right side sides are such that an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is approximately the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider area of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 can be easily formed as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is like this.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, and the ball feeding unit 580 are mounted and fixed. To the ball feeding unit 580, the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) for the game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300. A ball mounting opening 113 for supplying and a handle mounting for mounting the handle bracket 140 which is obliquely inclined so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion in a front view and bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, a wire passage opening 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and has a tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. A lock hole 116 that is formed and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described below can be inserted is provided.

As shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 in a rear view. And a board mounting portion 118 arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side) for mounting the door frame base board 194, and a rear end left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111. And a security cover mounting portion 119 for projecting rearward from the security cover 180 and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has a glass unit supporting step portion 110a, which is recessed to the front side along the inner periphery of the game window 101, and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 590 can come into contact with the rear side thereof, and the game window 101. It further includes two locking member attachment portions 110b that project rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery and rotatably support the glass unit locking member 190.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame projecting piece 110c which projects rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is an engaging groove 603 of the body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire will be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even in this case, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 has a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, many mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has mounting portions 110g for mounting the speaker brackets 132 for mounting the side speakers 130, and mounting holes 110h (see FIG. 18 and the like) for mounting the side speaker covers 338 at appropriate positions, respectively. Has been formed.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting portion 118, the lower dish ball supply port 310g and the foul cover unit 540 of the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base body 110 has a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 that is formed on the front side of the door frame base body 110 above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and is recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape with a front side open by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to perform a fraudulent act against the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to prevent a hole from being made from a joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 with a thin drill or the like. The crime prevention member 121 can prevent the crime and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 has a center axis intersecting at a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). It is fixed diagonally so as to be at a position of 0.5 m) so that the sound can be delivered to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and is arranged in a position separated from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible, and the left and right sides are arranged. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output sounds with a high sense of stereo.

The outer periphery of each of the side speakers 130 is sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 arranged on the rear side, whereby a door frame is formed. It is adapted to be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side opened, as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly lower than the center of the. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 and has an I-shaped cross section. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the present example, three in the vertical direction) at predetermined intervals at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 is vertically aligned with the step 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. Although not shown in detail, the wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported about the extended axis, and the wiring holding member 197 is rotated by the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

The wiring holding member 197 has a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface thereof, and the wiring holding member 197 is bundled in predetermined holding holes 197a in a pair. By inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198, the wiring cord 196 can be held (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It is pushed forward by the portion and rotated in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side becomes free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is in a state of being folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other. Therefore, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 smoothly rotates so that the free end side moves in the direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

As described above, according to this example, the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported moves the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since the rear surface is pivotally supported, and a part of the wiring cord 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, and the like due to being pinched or pinched.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is made of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when force is applied via the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, The wiring cord 196 can be securely folded in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a problem, because the vertical movement can be made less likely to occur.

Furthermore, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 creates a bridge between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring cord 196. Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent a problem such as being caught and breaking the wire or being unable to close the door frame 5, and the main control board 4100 as the main body side electric device, the peripheral control section 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like, And wiring for connecting the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, the speakers 130, 222, 262, the ball rental unit 360, the handle device 500, etc. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of defects in the code 196 as much as possible.

In addition, a part of the wiring cord 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and when the wiring cord 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Since the force can be released by doing so, it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from being pulled and broken, or the connection connector being disconnected. Can be prevented. Further, a part of the wiring cord 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates. The wiring cord 196 does not slide as in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 213675), and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197a penetrating through the wiring holding member 197 arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring cord 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the binding band 198 holding 196 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and to prevent the wiring cord 196 from dropping from the wiring holding member 197 together with the binding band 198. It can be surely prevented.

Further, even if the position where the wiring cord 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position apart from the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring cord 197 is used. Since it is possible to favorably prevent the wiring cord 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding the 196, the strength and rigidity of the side side of the door frame 5 which is pivotally supported is increased. The body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the projecting ridges projecting at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring cord 196 is provided, the wiring holding member 197 depends on the pair of the ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. The wiring cord 196 can be surrounded on three sides, and the wiring cord 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 can be prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the extension of the main body frame 3 in the wiring cord 196 is performed. The predetermined position is a position closer to the shaft center of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wire holding member 197 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, a pantograph-shaped link is formed by the axial center of the member 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring cord 196 extends in the main body frame 3. The wiring holding member 197, the wiring cord 196, and the like can be smoothly moved to facilitate the opening and closing work, and the wiring cord 196 and the like can be prevented from being subjected to an excessive force to prevent disconnection. It is possible to prevent a defect from occurring. In addition, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring cord 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back along the wiring holding member 197 at the tip side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded to be compact, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3, A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since the wiring holding member 197 is housed in the portion 195a, the wiring holding member 197 can be almost prevented from protruding from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring cord 196 can be compactly assembled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 196 from being caught by another member and prevent a defect from occurring.

Further, the wiring cord 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side) when the door frame 5 is closed by this, the wiring frame holding member 197 can also be removed from the door frame 5 by this. The protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring cord 196 can be made as small as possible.

In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to surely achieve the effect described above. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. Can be held to hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100, and the pachinko machine 1 having the large game board 4 which can attract the player's attention strongly can be provided. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 that extends outward in the right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges that project into the tubular portion 141 and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although illustration is omitted, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wiring passage port 115 when mounted on the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match each other. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted into and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attaching portion 114 that is inclined, so that the axis of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward when viewed from the front. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also tilted in the same manner.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes, as mainly shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body. The shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 attached along the rear surface of the shaft supporting side of 110, the open side reinforcing metal plate 153 mounted along the rear surface of the opening side peripheral part of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110 It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 that is attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws or rivets to form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 slidably provided on the upper surface in the upper and lower end portions of the shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper and lower shaft support fittings 630 and 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent protrusion 159 that is bent forward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion 160 that is bent forward toward the right side (open side) in front view of the upper long side edge. , A vertical bending protrusion 161 which is bent rearward and is vertically extended at the center of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bent protrusion 159, the upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bending projection piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the rear surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is provided with a cutout 162 that substantially corresponds to the cutout 101a of the door frame base body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open side outward bending protrusions 163 that are bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154. The opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 is formed so that the opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 extends rearward longer than the opening-side outer bending protrusion 163 as shown in the figure. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 described later is provided at the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft-supporting-side protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of its long side and is open to the outside on the shaft-supporting side (FIG. 108). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending protrusions 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the long side thereof.

Since the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only to the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, which is illegal. Although it may be easier to perform the action, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example is provided with the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that the front end piece 952b of the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U-shape (FIG. (See 108), it is possible to prevent the insertion of a tool, and it is possible to prevent only the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function of covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4. As shown in the drawing, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and is arcuately formed along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 on the upper side thereof. The contact recess 181 is formed, and the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, at the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting rearward along the end shape thereof are respectively provided. Note that the rear-end crime prevention rear end projection 183 on the right side (the pivot side) in the rear view is extended rearward longer than the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front projection 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and the left and right outside the crime prevention front projection 184 are provided. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted. By mounting it on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. Although the detailed illustration is omitted in the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, the crime prevention front projection 184 is adapted to fit with the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 contacts the vertical bending protrusion 161. When the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4, and the half open side thereof is forward. The component member 1110 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. ..

Note that the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the guide passage for the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the back surface thereof closed with the door frame 5 closed. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the ball hitting the glass plate 594 that flies or reverses through the guide passage portion.

Thus, in this example, the security cover 180 covers the lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are connected from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to carry out a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the invasion of the tool, and thus fraudulent acts. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more safe against such problems.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 of the door frame base unit 100 are provided with a fitting portion 190a that is rotatably fitted to a locking member attachment portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the stopper piece 592a of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a retaining screw to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side, and this ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a fingerhold when operating.

The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110. When the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit after disassembling it.

As shown, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. Along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, the outer side is linearly formed while being formed in an arc shape. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 forming an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and having a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210. A right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and on which a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted, and a side inner on the lower side Rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and lower right side decorative substrate 216 which are arranged below the substantially center of the lens 212 in the vertical direction and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted. The right side upper decoration substrate cover 218 that is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decoration substrate 214, and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decoration substrate 216. And a right side lower decorative substrate cover 220 attached to the lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202.

In addition, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged at a front side of the side lens 210 and a side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 and at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is omitted. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between an upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 are the side inner lenses. An inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to the 212 and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

In this right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b and the like cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right-side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right-side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. The decoration boards 214, 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b are made to emit light as appropriate, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and the left end thereof is the game window 101. Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side of. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens section 210b having a prism surface. As shown in the drawing, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centering on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

The side lens 210 also includes a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusing lens portion 210c can diffuse light from the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 to the right and up and down of the pachinko machine 1 widely. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker 222, and the sound from the upper right speaker 222 is transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted well.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses in a mountain portion projecting forward in a wrinkle-shaped portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. This side inner lens 212 can irregularly refract and diffusely reflect light by a wrinkle-shaped portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses, and in cooperation with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side, the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 is glitter. At the same time, the perspective can be made to look strange and mysterious.

The right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on their surfaces, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°) are used, and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A narrow angle (for example, 15° to 60°) is used. The LEDs 214c on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red and green LEDs in this example.

Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 supporting the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front, and on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of the present example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, which is a noise for other pachinko machines. It's hard to come by. As with the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-shaped front surface, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in the ridges protruding forward in the wrinkle-shaped portion. Therefore, the light can be irregularly refracted and irregularly reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses.

The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is adapted to be inserted and arranged in front of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. In addition, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit after disassembling it. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a photograph of a light emitting mode of the left side decoration unit.

As illustrated, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the right side is the game window 101. The left side and the upper side are linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetrical to the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has an elliptical shape arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, and between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a continuous to the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and arranged in a row, and a large And a frame-shaped upper side decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes the side flash lens 246, which is fitted from the rear side into the small window frames 242b, 244b of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. In the side lens 250, a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a that are supported from the rear side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 and are fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a from the rear side. A rear side of the inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens section 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the inner decoration member 251. And a side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by a plurality of belt-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower left and right center of the game window 101.

The left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the left side upper decoration. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed on the lower side from substantially the vertical center of the side inner lens 252 and on which a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) are mounted. A left side upper decoration board cover 258 which covers the rear side of the left side upper decoration board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decoration board 254, and a left side which covers the rear side of the left side lower decoration board 256. And a left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 arranged in front of the side inner lens 252 and in an upper right portion in front view, and a transparent member attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the side inner lens 252 for supporting the upper left speaker 262. A diffusion portion formed by the upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of belt-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially around the lower left and right center. And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

In this left side decoration unit 240, the side lower decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration board cover 258, and the left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a non-translucent member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). In addition, the side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 (small windows in the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) are used. Opening frames 242c, 244c are formed on both sides of the frames 242b, 244b with the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 penetrating in a notched state, and the small window frames 242b, 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. ..

On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a, 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. The diffusing portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusing portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and to the rear of the side inner lens 252. The side is not clearly visible. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left-side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left-side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

The front surfaces of the left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left-side decorative unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b and the like. In addition, the decoration boards 254, 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are respectively connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Is appropriately emitted to allow the left side decoration unit 240 to emit light.

The side lower decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is configured to extend in the up-down direction along the left outer periphery of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose rear side is open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a small elliptical shape arranged between the large window frames 242a penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c which is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Has been formed.

The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246 which correspond to each other.

Further, the upper side decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extends from the upper left side outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101, and has a substantially triangular shape in a front view. It is formed in a U-shaped cross-section with an open side. The side decoration frame 244 is arranged between the large window frames 244a and two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a small elliptical window frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b and an opening frame 244c which is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface, and is formed of a synthetic resin. ing.

The side decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246 corresponding to each other. The upper side decoration frame 244 forms a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

In addition, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size in which the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are combined, and has a size extending from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a, 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and a concave shape rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens section 250b on which the side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the emission lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decoration member 251 of the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, and has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decoration member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and also in the width direction thereof so as to be concentric with the center of the game window 101 as the center. There are multiple. Further, the inner decorative member 251 has a front surface formed with a plurality of slits 251a formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. ..

The side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 has a diffusing portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decoration member 251 is inserted into each inner decoration member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of belt-shaped lenses radially extending around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the inner direction in which the belt-shaped lenses extend in the front side. The slits 251a of the decorative member 251 intersect (substantially orthogonal) with the extending direction of the slits 251a.

The side inner lens 252 is configured such that the diffusing portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but light is diffused and refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffusing portion 252a. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion parts 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without diffusing or refracting.

The left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left-side decorative unit 240 are provided with a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof. LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°) and are used. LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 (the emission lens section 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246), 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15° to 60°).

Like the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. Then, the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper rear side of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not visible from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the upper left speaker 262 from being mischievous and the cone of the upper left speaker 262 from being broken and an illegal tool being inserted into the pachinko machine 1. Has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is adapted to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, so that it is less likely to make noise to other pachinko machines.

Next, a characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes the side lens 250 including the curved transparent peripheral lens portion 250a forming the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and the surface disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a plated layer of metallic luster, and arranged in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slits 251a. A left inner decoration substrate 254 and a left lower decoration substrate 256 on which a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of belt-shaped lenses and a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a arranged behind the side inner lens 252 are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). As a result, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated to the player side so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

By the way, the light emitted forward (on the side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is emitted to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a and illuminates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decoration member 251 side on the inner surface of the peripheral lens part 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected to the peripheral lens part 250a side (on the front side), and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decoration member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens part 250a and is emitted to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, since the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decoration member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side is converged and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a has direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and the peripheral light. The indirect light reflected on the front surfaces of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the respective shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape in the extending direction of the slit 251a and intersects by the diffusing portion 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades, extending in a direction longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting with the extending direction of the slit 251a. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and is located between the upper end edges of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 on the center side. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has an annular center frame 281a that penetrates in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends from the upper portion of the center frame 281a in a slender shape to the left and right, and tapers toward the tip. A front decoration member 281 provided with a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c that extends from the lower portion of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes narrower toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower portion that are arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281. A transparent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a tubular shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 that is inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulges forward, and a plate-shaped diffusing lens 285 that is disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 and has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface. An annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and a tube disposed on the rear side of the lens support member 286 and having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged on the rear side of the light shielding member 287 at a position corresponding to the inner side of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287, and a position corresponding to the outer side of the cylindrical portion 287a. A plurality of LEDs 288b arranged on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288.

In addition, the upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light blocking member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units that are arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289. Of the upper side decorative substrate 290, a substrate cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower rear portion of the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward. The mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 that is attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extends rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and covers the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 and has a light-transmitting property. And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped in a shape.

Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends backward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch portion 295a having an open rear end side at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the cutout portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decoration member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape are provided. ..

In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, so that the front decoration member 281 is shimmered by light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing the inside of the central frame 281a of the front decoration member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decoration member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the lower extension frame 281c. The upper lens 282 has a plurality of radially extending belt-shaped lenses arranged in a row in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the center of the axial center of the through hole 282a on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, light can be diffused and refracted by the plurality of prisms and the band-shaped lens of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

The upper center lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed in a spindle shape with a smooth front surface, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses is formed on the rear surface, and light can be irregularly refracted. Is not visible to.

Further, the upper central decoration substrate 288 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, respectively. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, the upper side decoration board 290 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 is adapted to allow the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281 to emit light by appropriately causing the LEDs 290a to emit light.

[1-2E. Plate unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view cut at a portion of the bowl unit of the dish unit in the door frame.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls dispensed from a prize ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a plate unit base 310, which is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction, and a plate unit base 310. A plate-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed to approximately the center of the front face and is open on the upper and rear sides and bulges to the front on the left side (shaft support side) greatly. When viewed, the upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion. An upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and a right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 are continuous with and cover the upper right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is provided.

Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to the lower side of the plate attachment base 320, which is a plate-like substrate attachment base 320 having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 from the center in the left-right direction to the right side. And a top plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on its upper surface. By appropriately causing the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 to emit light, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, the dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper dish body 312, and the upper and rear sides are opened. A dish-shaped lower tray main body 324 formed so as to become lower as it goes, and a center in the left-right direction fixed to an upper portion of the lower tray main body 324 bulges forward in the same manner as the lower tray main body 324, and a front end thereof extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 described later at a portion that covers the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right when viewed from the front. A lower dish cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and an upper opening 330a formed coaxially with the lock hole 328a of the lower dish cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position of the lower end of the lower dish cover 328 to the left, right, center, and left. The lower plate right side cover 330 is provided with a lower opening 330b that is opened below the upper opening 330a and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

Further, in the plate unit 300, an obliquely extending lower plate upper left side cover 332 that covers a left side front end of the lower plate main body 324 and a left side front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and a lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332 are disposed at the front and rear. A lower plate left lower side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate which is configured to close the opening 334a of the lower plate left lower side cover 334 from the rear side, and which is made of a sound permeable material. A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered by the upper plate front decorative member 316.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a formed in a continuous shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. And a cover body 339 having a disk-like shape that is gently curved so as to close the 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 339 is not easily deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 for pulling the game balls stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 and attached to the lower surface, and the plate unit base 310, which is attached to the upper left side in a front view, is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also called a CR unit, not shown).

The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 of this dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper edge extending in the left-right direction. It is equipped. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b (near the upper left corner in a front view) and has an oblong rectangular shape which penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d which extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction below the mouth 310c (generally in the height direction of the plate unit base 310) below the vicinity of the right end of the decorative portion 310a, and an upper plate. A pair of lower tray support portions 310e are provided immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, project forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged immediately below.

Further, the dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326 to form a horizontally elongated rectangular ring in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower tray ball supply port 310g which is arranged in a lower portion on the right side of the center of a portion surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It has a notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball can pass.

The upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the cutouts 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is adapted to communicate with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends to the right in front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined lower in the front end direction in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish body 312 is increased. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to linearly exit from the upper plate ball supply port 310c into the upper plate 301 in the front, the paid out game ball comes into contact with the game ball that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and rolls there. The direction is changed, and it is guided so as to roll to the right in the front view in the guide recess 310j, and is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, since the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even if it is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid game balls into the upper plate 301, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed when the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself/herself to the operation of driving the game ball and the game using the game ball that has been driven, and to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. You can do it.

The upper bowl discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper bowl removal base 344 of the upper bowl removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the intermediary. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side thereof penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344.

In addition, in this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with a widened portion 310k which is widened to the left in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by the widened portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is widened in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging from occurring in the lower plate ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games can be played. The balls can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in the front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. As for the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312, the rear end of the shaft support side is near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310, and the rear end of the open side is the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed near the intermediate position in the up-down direction, respectively, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can contact the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that the static electricity charged in the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later, is installed and through which the upper plate ball removing button 341 is installed. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end, which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c for attaching an operation unit 400 described later, which is formed in a step shape further lower than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction. There is.

The upper plate front portion decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless transparent synthetic resin in a shape that extends in the left-right direction in a curved shape along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. This upper plate front part decoration member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position to the right of the center in the left-right direction, whereas the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved like a spindle and It is formed in a rugged shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate front decorative member 316 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and is capable of irregularly refracting light. The rear side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is arranged on the rear side of the left side smoothly formed part of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, while the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the feeling of distance is not fixed.

The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved like a spindle like the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The upper right end side is formed so as to be integrated with the right side portion, and is formed so as to decorate the outer circumference of an upper plate ball removing button 341, which will be described later. Further, the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface) thereof, which allows light to be irregularly refracted and prevents the player from clearly seeing the lower side. There is. In addition, the upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

The bottom plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed in a fan shape that extends forward in a plan view, has a rear end formed in a straight line in the left-right direction, and has a lower surface with a substantially central portion of the upper surface, and a central portion of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from a front end and a side end of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plates 324c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed in the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by the opening/closing shutter 352 of the lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower dish cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a silver-colored plating layer on the surface thereof, which has a metallic feeling (a matte state such as sandblasted rather than a mirror surface). The lower plate side cover 330 has a plate-shaped portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed through the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

Further, the lower plate upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. Further, the lower plate left lower cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends rearward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. Is provided with a plate-shaped portion. The opening 334a of the lower left bottom cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 described later, and allows the sound from the speaker 821 to be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower plate left lower cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted inside.

In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower cover 334 close the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction, and the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate left lower cover 334 The bottom surface between them is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

The upper bowl ball removal mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper tray upper panel 314 so as to be able to move forward and backward, and an operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341. Of the upper dish ball removal button 341 is moved up and down by a greater amount than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front surface side of the dish unit base 310. Of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 that slides in the vertical direction and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 described later. An upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 and an upper plate ball attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310 that slidably supports the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the vertical direction. And a removal base 344.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 includes an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the upper bowl ball removing base 344.

The upper plate ball removing base 344 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharging port 310d of the plate unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper plate ball discharging port 310d and opens toward the front 344a (Fig. 43), and the ball guiding flow path 344b that guides the game sphere that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344 and has passed through the opening 344a, and then guides it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 42). 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, and then extends toward the right side (shaft support side) end in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344. It is provided with a ball removing channel 344c through which a game ball can be distributed.

In the upper dish ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the sphere guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a has a sphere of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is designed to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. Can be supplied to.

In addition, the ball removal channel 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 communicates with the ball removal port 581b of the ball delivery unit 580 through the ball delivery opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the cutout portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply trough 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 is loaded. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removing channel cover 345.

In this upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball removing button 341 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also formed. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. By moving, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding flow path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball removal port 581b to the ball removal channel 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

Note that the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feed unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the abutting piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343, whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, so that the ball pulling member 583. Even if the game balls are strongly supplied onto the partition part 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like are It is possible to prevent damage and also to prevent the game ball from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 of the dish unit 300 is disposed between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower cover 334 below the lower dish body 324, and forms the lower plate center of the dish unit 300. The opening base 351 and the plate-like opening/closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 are rotated. And a lower plate ball removing slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate ball removing button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removing slider 353. There is.

The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a vertically penetrating at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324. Further, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and a shutter ball removing hole which is disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and which can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and which vertically penetrates. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by a coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removing base 351 and the lower dish ball removing base 351 so that the closing portion 352a closes the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a. ..

Although not shown in detail, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes an abutment pin capable of abutting the lower dish ball removing slider 353, and the abutment pin abuts the lower dish ball removing slider 353. The closing plate 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slider 353 so as to move rearward, or the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is slid forward by the urging force of the coil spring 356. You can do it.

Further, in the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening/closing shutter 352 is substantially the same as the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position in order to hold the lower dish ball removing slider 353 in the moving position.

This lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Therefore, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening/closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removing button 354 in the closed state is pressed rearward, the lower plate ball removing button 354 and the lower plate ball removing slider 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removing slider 353 slides rearward to open and close. The shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b move rearward against the biasing force of the coil spring 356.

Then, as the opening/closing shutter 352 is rotated rearward, the shutter ball removing hole 352b comes to overlap the lower plate ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower plate ball removing hole. Matching with 324b, the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball removing hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removing slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower dish ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removing slider 353 holds the slide by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removing slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removing button 354 remains rearwardly retracted and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is opened. The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if they are held in the same state as the extraction hole 3324b and the lower tray ball removal button 354 is not continuously pressed.

On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the retracted and opened state is further pushed rearward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the holding of the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower plate is removed. The opening/closing shutter 352 is configured such that the ball-sliding slide 353 can slide, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball-hole 324b. It rotates in the direction of moving to the direction (front) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the open/close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 moves down. It returns to the closed position that substantially coincides with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 302.

It should be noted that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

The ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a loan remaining display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball rental unit 360, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit 300. It is possible to lend (pay out) to the upper plate 301 of the dish, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash inserted and the prepaid card will be returned after subtracting the remaining amount of the loan There is. In addition, the remaining balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball rental unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 which projects rearward from the rear surface and which mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 on the shaft support side (left side in front view).

More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 has a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the loan remaining display portion 363, and a loan remaining display portion 363 that is arranged on the rear side of the front cover 365 and the ball rental button 361. And a ball rental unit substrate 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and a rear side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit substrate 366. And a rear cover 367 attached to the. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and is formed between the button openings 310m. The transparent front cover 365 includes a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the cover 365 and projections 310o formed on the outer circumferences of the two button openings 310m and projecting forward. The transparent front cover 365 closes the display opening 310n. The lending remaining display portion 363 arranged on the rear side is visible from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 360 of this example has a ball rental unit attachment portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and has a front surface. It is arranged to face. Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a different color from the dish unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362.

In addition, the ball-renting unit 360 includes a protrusion 310o that protrudes forward (on the player's side) from the outer periphery of the ball-renting button 361 and the return button 362. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent the 361, the return button 362, and the like from being erroneously operated.

The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as the conventional pachinko machine equipped with two storage plates. The machine can be used as a pachinko machine, and even a new pachinko machine 1 (new model of pachinko machine) can reduce the anxiety and the like given to the player and make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play. Has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and seen from the upper right front side, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation portion of the operation unit is pressed.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and the pressure that can be pressed by the player. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state, and not only the operation of driving the game ball into the player, , It is also possible to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that fixes the drive gear 412 to a rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 slidably in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation portion 405 arranged in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. A base member having a spring 418 biased upward, an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. 420, an upper cover 422 that has an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 to pass through, and a base member 420 that is attached below the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420. Mainly includes a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surfaces of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

The operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and has an opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a plating which is arranged on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and has a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with layers and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and the dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface. , A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted and a lower portion of the operation portion holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation portion 401. 432b, a press detection sensor 432c that detects an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration board 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation section holding member 416 by the board holding claws 416g of the operation section holding member 416.

The dial operation part 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a light-transmissive material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and an outer side from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending cylindrically downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b, and an outer cylinder portion 401c shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder. A flange portion 401d that extends annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c is mainly provided. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation portion 401 includes a connection locking portion 401e (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked to allow dial operation. The portion 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Further, the dial operation portion 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner tubular portion 401a. The protrusion 401f can come into contact with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, the details of which will be described later. The step portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By abutting against the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

As shown in the drawing, the contacting surfaces of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 are lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The inclined surface is formed so as to have a large contact area when they abut each other. Thus, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operating portion 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operating portion 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation portion 405 side. It has become.

The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an upper end closed, and has a bottomed tubular button body 406, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is applied to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is like this.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower outer periphery and having a lower end protruding outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b of the operation portion holding member 416 are provided. By locking with the locking projection 416f (see FIG. 49 and FIG. 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button holding cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (depressing operation portion 405) does not rotate inside the button support cylinder 416b. It should be noted that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the clearance causes the button body 406 to move at a predetermined angle. It can be rotated within a range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a pressure detection piece 406c extending downward from a position different from the lower portion of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and detectable by the pressure detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432. The pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter below the substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than that on the upper side, and a step portion 407a is provided between the upper side and the lower side. Are formed. In the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405), the lower side of the step portion 407a is smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the upper side of the step portion 407a is the dial operation portion. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. Accordingly, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner tubular portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operating portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401a (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character "Push" is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has a ring-shaped sliding contact with the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. You can do it.

Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the facing positions of the upper ends and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation part 401 are integrally rotatably connected by being engaged with the connection engagement part 401e of the inner cylinder part 401a.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are adapted to be detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and slits formed between the rotation detection pieces 410c and 410c. With 410d, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to rotate integrally with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 rotates the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, by rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in the forward and reverse directions in small steps by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time for each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b and the like. It is possible to add a feeling.

Further, the operation portion holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f (lock projection 416f formed on an inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking the locking claw 406b of the button body 406). 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for sending light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom portion of the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation portion 405). An opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration board 432 can pass through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416e through which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 faces from the upper side, and a pair of board holding claws 416g extending downward from the lower surface for locking and holding the button decoration board 432. I have it.

Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed inside the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406, and locks the same. It further includes a plurality of contact portions that can contact the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 has a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, and the like at appropriate positions. Is equipped with.

The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be rotatably supported. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is urged upward.

The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is unlikely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower recess 420b that is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 can be fitted and a bottom portion (ceiling part) of the lower recess 420b, and vertically penetrates the operation portion holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape that allows the gear rail 416a to pass therethrough, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and that is recessed downward at least to accommodate the driven gear 410 are provided. I have it. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f opening downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed above the upper concave portion 420c, and a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g located above different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430 protruding to the bottom. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses for mounting the respective members, mounting holes and the like at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower recess portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass through the opening 420a in the center. The operation portion holding member 416 can be supported by screwing the operation portion holding member 416 from above into the operation portion holding member 416 through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base member 420 has the upper end of the gear rail 416a slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, slightly above the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation member holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof that fits with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424, which will be described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions with respect to each other. The board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 in the surface by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass, on the top plate thereof. ing. The top cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

The upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the minor axis direction (front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1) and has a lower end protruding outwardly, which is a claw-shaped locking piece 422c. Equipped with. The locking piece 422c can be locked with the upper plate front decoration member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c with the upper plate front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off from the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

In the upper cover 422, the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 422a from below with the operation portion holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial member 401 and the like attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass therethrough, it is possible to prevent the dial operation part 401 from coming off upward by the opening 422a.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper side, and has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that are engageable with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

As shown in the drawing, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that vertically penetrates through the center and allows the upper cover 422 to pass through, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a to mount the operation unit of the dish unit 300. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

The operation unit 400 of this example is adapted to be attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426, and although not shown in detail, it is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In this state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached so that the lower surface thereof is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when a pressing operation is performed or a tapping operation is performed, so that the impact can be mitigated.

In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attaching portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then, The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation portion 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 have an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length of the rotation detection piece 410 in the circumferential direction. It is said that. As a result, when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection/non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and rotation by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b. It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating from the detection pattern of the detection piece 410c.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation portion 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the operation unit 400 gradually rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 as shown in FIG. Since the 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner tubular portion 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation portion 405 is dialed via the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is hard to break.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small increments in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other. By repeating turning and reversing, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game or effect. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. In addition to being operable, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and it is possible to entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. it can.

In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is inevitably hit and the operation unit The force of striking 401, 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the concentration of hit impact can be suppressed to prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. As a result, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 capable of withstanding a smash, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405, entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300, and when the operation portions 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with a shock or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 becomes the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the impact and the load can be received by the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, so that the impacts and the like from the operation portions 401 and 405 are dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like. The operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can improve impact resistance and load resistance.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward at a position away from the position supporting the operation portions 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 is impacted by the operation portions 401 and 405 by coming into contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. The part supporting the member is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, since the operation portion holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side holds the dial operation portion 401 so that a part of the dial operation portion 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view, the dial operation portion 401 is held. When the operating portion 401 is struck from the upper side, even if the operating portion holding member 416 holding the dial operating portion 401 comes off from the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operating portion 401 contacts the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can favorably prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 in accordance with the game state, the dial operation unit 401 is arbitrarily rotated (rotationally driven including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the effect produced by the operation units 401 and 405, the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit is operated. It is possible to make the effect using 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and prevent it from getting tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the dial operating unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotary shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is, by definition, set to the dial operating unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotating shaft of (410), even if the dial operating unit 401 or the pressing operating unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotating shaft of the dial operating unit 401. It is possible to avoid directly contacting the dial drive motor 414 and prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, since the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 supports the dial operating portion 401 through the opening 420a, the dial operating portion 401 is supported. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to the impact or load from the 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut against the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 will be It is possible to reliably prevent the depression from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating portion 401 and the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operating portion 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 that rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial drive motor 414 frequently rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 or the dial drive motor 414. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player in spite of the fact that the dial drive motor 414 generates a large amount of heat due to an excessive load, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from malfunctioning due to overheating, and to set the dial drive means 414 under a high load. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of withstanding, and can sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial driving means 414 as described above and entertain the player. You can

Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the pressing of the pressing operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, and it is more convenient for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sense of realization, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by entertaining the player. Further, since the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation sections 401 and 405 are provided, the operation sections 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated, so that the operation sections 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are brought into contact with each other, so that the player operates the pressing operation portion 405. When is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 vibrates the dial operation part 401 by repeating forward/reverse rotation within a predetermined angle range, so that the dial operation part 401 is vibrated by virtue of the step 407a in contact with the protrusion 401f. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, and entertaining the effect using the operation unit 400. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move arbitrarily, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that something is happening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from decreasing. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 is allowed to participate. In addition to facilitating the operation, the player can positively operate the operation unit 400, entertaining the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance and impact resistance of the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being deteriorated due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation part 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation part 405, a dial drive is performed. Even if the motor 414 drives the dial operation unit 401 to rotate, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The roles of the section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can be easily entertained with the operation unit 400, and the upper surface of the pressing operation section 405 can be guided. The characters "PUSH" displayed can be easily read by the player without turning or tilting greatly, and the player can be sure to recognize that the pressing operation unit 405 is operated by pressing. be able to.

Further, the dial operating portion 401 is provided with a protruding portion 401f protruding from the inner periphery of the inner tubular portion 401a toward the axial center side, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operating portion 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined vertical position. Since the stepped portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner tubular portion 401a of the dial operating portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operating portion 405 can be brought as close as possible at the upper end of the operation unit 400. In addition, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 can be provided through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the foreign matter makes it difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate and for the pressing operation unit 405 to become difficult to press. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed, a portion of the dial operation portion 401 in the circumferential direction is pressed. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position deviated from the center of the pressing operation unit 405 to the outer periphery), the dial operation unit 401 is surely contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 are in contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation portion 401 side, and the load resistance with respect to the pressing operation portion 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation portion 401, there is a case where it is not inclined. By comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially distributed outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing the load from concentrating and increasing the resistance of the operation unit 400. The loadability and shock resistance can be surely enhanced, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of malfunctions during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward/reverse rotation, not only the dial operation portion 401 is simply rotated, but also the dial operation portion 401 can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, forward/reverse rotation. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) having the above-described operational effects can be surely embodied because it can be easily vibrated by repetition.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the plate unit 300 has a high strength and rigidity in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently deal with a strong hit to the operation unit 400 (pressing operation portion 405), and it is possible to easily entertain the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51(A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 51(B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as disassembled and seen from the rear. As illustrated, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower plate side cover 330 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and has a cylindrical front end and bulges in a direction perpendicular to the axis in a round shape, a handle main body 504 that is disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle main body 504. A front end cover 506 that is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502, and cooperates with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the handle body 504.

Further, in the handle device 500, a rear end and a front end are rotatably supported by an inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and a rear end and a front end are rotatably supported. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with 504 and that has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that is integrally rotatable with the transmission gear 511. The rotational position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 511. The biasing auxiliary spring 514, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the touch sensor 516 are attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the firing stop switch 518 and the inner base 508. A one-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported and operates the firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504, and the handle body 504 is rotated to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). A handle return spring 522 for urging the handle return spring 522 so as to return it to the rotation end in the direction.

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and bulges rearward in a round shape, and has a rear end portion that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylinder. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting the handle base 502 into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis of the handle body 504 is formed, and three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward are formed on the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b protruding rearward, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, one end of the handle body 504 is biased by the handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 so as to rotate counterclockwise in the front view.

The handle device 500 of this example is configured to be attached to the handle attaching portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face the outer side (open side) in a plan view seen from above, so that the handle mounting portion 114 is mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip portion inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). It is designed to be attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable in the turning operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the turning position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with a conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player contacts the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is hit. You can do it. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be hit. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

When the player presses the one-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the one-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 153) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotation drive can be stopped. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, it is possible to temporarily stop the shooting of the game ball, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, before operating the one-shot button 520. It is possible to shoot a game ball with the driving strength.

In the handle device 500 of this example, after the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, the firing control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so that the frame 5 is linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed, and the link is released when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, the structure of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a defect in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest due to a defect in hitting the game ball.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52(A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 52(B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 53 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is shot by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hitting ball launching device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example is provided with a cover base 542 having a flow path for a plurality of game balls inside, the front side of which is open, and a front cover 544 which closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first ball entrance 542a which is arranged in the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a cover which communicates with the first ball entrance 542a. A first ball passage 542b that widens to the right in front view as it goes to the front end of the base 542, and a second ball entrance 542c that is arranged outside the first ball entrance 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. And a second ball passage 542d which communicates with the second ball inlet 542c and extends downward and is inclined downward toward the lower right corner in a front view. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 is such that the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is approximately three times the height of the outer diameter of the game ball, as shown in the figure. A storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e that is open upward, and can communicate the game ball to an upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening/closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening/closing crank 793. The open/close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a and the second ball outlet 544b which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is adapted to be connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a passes through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet. The upper plate 301 can be supplied from 544a through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball outlet. 544b can supply the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300 (see FIG. 82).

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the game ball shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 from the second ball outlet 544b through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply). ) You can do it.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms the upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and the cover base 542 is swingable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space 546. Of the swing member 548 that is pivotally supported, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a direction in which the full member detection sensor 550 does not detect the swing member 548. And 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported by the cover base 542 and an upper end that rotates leftward when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , Is provided, and static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to circulation of the game balls can be removed.

In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540, When the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls stay in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and further, the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. When the normal passage 773 on the upstream side of is also filled up, the game balls start to flow to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch unit 770. From the full tank outlet 776 of the foul cover unit 540 to the lower tray 302 of the dish unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the game balls cannot be output from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the second ball passage 542d stays in the accommodation space 546. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a lot of the game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the rocking member 548 moves to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 153) stops the payout of the game balls from the prize ball unit 700, and the game is played. It is designed to give a notification to a person to discharge the game ball in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

In addition, when the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is detected. It becomes non-detection, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2I. Ball feeding unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. 54A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 54B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. 55 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. Further, FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. Further, FIG. 57(A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, FIG. 57(B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and FIG. 57(C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front. , (D) are explanatory views showing the action of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. It is possible to pull out to the lower tray 302 by operating the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the upper tray ball removing mechanism 340.

In this ball feeding unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b opening to the lower side of the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and closing the rear end of the front cover 581 and opening the front. Box-shaped, a rear cover 582 having a batting ball supply port 582a for supplying a gaming ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from an entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the batting ball launcher 650, a rear cover 582 and a front cover. A ball removing member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a that partitions the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581; , The game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent to the hitting ball supply port 582a of the rear cover one by one, and are supported rotatably around an axis extending vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. And a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. It is arranged.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing port 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper dish ball punching base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball removing member 583 partitions the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing opening 581b below the entrance 581a, and the partition surface 583a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584, and the partition 583a. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584 and bending in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extending in the front-rear direction. The pivot rod 583b rotatably supported by the rod, the rod-shaped operating rod 583c projecting forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 583b, and the pivot rod 583b below the operating rod 583c. It has a weight portion 583d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110. The upper plate of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 is brought into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a via the 113.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a blocking portion 584a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending toward the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 and extending in the vertical direction, and the blocking portion 584a. A ball holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

In the ball feeding member 584, the shutoff portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b faces the ball hitting supply port 582a. It is adapted to rotate between the facing holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the ball hitting launcher 650 from the ball hitting supply port 582a, and enters the partition part 583a from the entrance 581a. The blocking section 584a blocks the movement of the ball toward the ball holding section 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) side and remains in the state of staying on the partition section 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the side of the rod portion 584c closes the hit ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition part 583a is held in the ball holding part 584b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 is moved forward and backward by the movement of the ball feeding operation rod 586 whose tip swings vertically due to the driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 585, and the movement of the tip swinging vertically in the ball feeding operation rod 586. A ball feed crank 587 that rotates about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the up-down direction. The ball feed crank 587 includes an engaging portion 587a which is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 587a which engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation in FIG.

The ball feeding unit 580 of this example uses a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587 to transmit the movement of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 which is swung by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 moving forward and backward. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launcher 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

Further, although the ball removing member 583 rotatably supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example receives a moment to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the weight portion 583c, The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300, so that the rotation thereof is restricted. In normal times, the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 581b side. Then, when the player presses down the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and abuts. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, whereby the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344 of the plate unit 300. , Is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition 581a. Also, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball is The partition portion 583a can be prevented from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 of this example is provided with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed such that the entire outer shape in a rear view is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is located on the opposite side from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the tip that is the left side in the rear view. The upper piece part 588b and the lower piece part 588c, which are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) as a boundary, and the tips of the upper piece part 588b and the lower piece part 588c are mutually separated. A V-shape formed between the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b in a direction perpendicular (backward) to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 so as to move away. The cut portion 588d has a shape of a cut portion 588d, and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is bent at the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (the left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b is moved backward, so that the cutting portion 588d is formed. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted inside the V shape. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. Is formed.

Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d. It is like this. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the drawing, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is provided. The portion corresponding to the portion where the mark is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, is formed to communicate with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal gaming ball I with the wire Iw attached is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the fraudulent gaming ball I is played by the ball striking device 650 in the game area of the game board 4. When struck into the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the batted ball launching device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in a front view, and between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Attempt to enter the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I will be pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the illegal moving path of the game ball I, and the path of the game ball. It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance within. Therefore, the wire Iw extending from the dish unit 300 to the side of the ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 is such that the game ball I moves to the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). In order to move on the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view. Then, the wire Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at that position. After being guided to the inside of 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the impulsive force of the game ball I.

Thereby, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the illegal game ball I at the cutting portion 588d of the illegality preventing member 588 in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view). Then, the cutting portion 588d acts on the wire Iw by friction or shearing force (see FIG. 57D). At this time, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is dampened by the momentum due to the friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, so that it does not enter the game area 1100 and is between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, an illegal act is performed with the illegal game ball I attached with the wire rod Iw in the game area 605. You can prevent it from being exposed. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the illegality preventing member 588 as described above, so that the illegal act cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to damp the illegal momentum of the illegal game ball I and the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent the intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

As described above, according to this example, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, the player uses the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is driven to send the game ball to the ball striking device 650, and the ball striking device 650 drives the game ball into the game area 1100, whereby the game window of the door frame 5 is opened. The game is played in the game area 1100 which is visible through 101, and the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. 585 etc.) and a discharging mechanism (ball removing member 583) are arranged, so that not only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 but also the ball feeding member 584 and the ball hitting device 650 are possible. When the game balls in the upper plate 301 are discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341 as much as possible, the number of the game balls remaining on the ball feeding member 584 side is reduced as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unpleasant and to prevent the interest from decreasing.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 having the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300, and to hit the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by the operation, and to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled up with the game balls in an early stage. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's annoyance and suppress a decrease in interest, and the size of the plate unit 300 can be reduced while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game is relatively performed. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, compared with a case where the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 are provided separately, only the ball feed unit 580 is attached to the ball feed member 580. Since the 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached to each other, the labor for assembling can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 have a problem. However, even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be easily solved.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the upper dish ball It is not necessary to configure a transmission mechanism (upper plate ball removing mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removing button 341 to the ball removing member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the openable/closable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the transmission mechanism ( It is possible to avoid the risk that the transmission mechanism is quickly consumed and malfunctions or is damaged due to the interruption of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340), and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580 and the like. And durability can be improved.

Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, only by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, the game balls can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the discharge of the game balls from, and it is possible for the player to easily operate the ball removing operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removing button 341.

Further, the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 is made movable by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, since the partition part 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 and the partition part 583a as small as possible, and the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feeding device are provided. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described operational effects can be provided.

Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is biased upward, and when the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 connects the admission port 581a and the hitting ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts on the partition part 583a, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition part 583a (ball removing member The durability of 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact on the partition 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper bowl ball removing slider 343, even if the game ball collides with the partition 583a, it can be made difficult to splash and the splash of the game ball can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing a problem.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, compared to the case where the partition portion 583a is slid, it relates to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a in the planar projection can be reduced. The effect of can be achieved.

Further, since the partition part 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the entry port 581a and the ball removal port 581b communicate with each other, when a problem occurs in the partition part 583a or the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340, the partition part 583a Is rotated by its own weight so that the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other, and the gaming ball in the upper tray 301 is shot even though the upper tray ball removal button 341 is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player side without being sent to the device 650 side, it is possible to let the player recognize that a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 and to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem. It is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered by moving it.

Further, in the ball removing member 583, the partition portion 583a is rotated through the bent rotation rod portion 583b. Therefore, when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is bent. The impact is linearly transmitted to the rotary shaft by dispersing the light with the rotary shaft 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotary rod portion 583b, and the durability of the ball removing member 583 is improved. Can be increased.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game ball in the upper plate 301, the left and right sides of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are discharged. It is possible to minimize the movement in the direction, improve the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580, and discharge the game ball satisfactorily. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge route of the game balls in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can serve as a discharging mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from unnecessarily increasing in size.

Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the attachment recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the ball striking device 650. As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. With respect to the wire Iw being pulled fast (strongly), the wire Iw can be surely cut, and the illegal momentum of the game ball I is attenuated to prevent it from entering the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting concave portion 582b which is recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front side, it is necessary to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward may not be projected rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece portion 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 may injure an operator during assembly or the like. It is possible to prevent it.

In addition, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material being sandwiched. Thus, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, so that the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. This glass unit 590 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 that is formed of synthetic resin and has an opening that is approximately the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 108). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two stopper pieces 592a which are disposed on the upper portions of the left and right sides and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement portion which extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and extends downward. And a stop piece 592b.

In this glass unit 590, the locking piece 592b at the lower end is locked so as to engage with the vertical bending protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Modeling decoration on door frame]
Next, a modeling decoration on the door frame 5, that is, a geometrical decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame by cutting it at a substantially vertical center. As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls lined up and down below the vertically elongated oval game window 101. In order to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 which closes the game window 101, on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. The handle device 500 of FIG. Further, the door frame 5 has the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left and right and the upper side of the game window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

The door frame 5 has greatly different appearances on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has a rugged natural rock-like appearance due to the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244, which are visible from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240, have a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. Has become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the door frame 5 differs in the amount of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It projects more than 240 forward. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved plane shape.

Accordingly, in the door frame 5 of the present example, when viewed from the front right, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 appear to be volumes similar to each other (see FIG. 19), while the left front When viewed from the above, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that different impressions can be given depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like this. In other words, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the pachinko machine 1 relative to the pachinko machine 1 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be made to appear as if it were a different type of pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing to the player and can strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left-right asymmetrical, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are lined up in the left-right direction in an island facility of a game hall, etc., the overall appearance of the island facility feels smooth and solid. By arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of different configurations alternately, it is possible to give a rhythmic impression and to give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). Therefore, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each of the units 200, 240, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby causing the game window 101. It is designed to be able to emit light with any color so as to surround it. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided on the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246 are included. , 254b, 256 are turned on or off to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emitting decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration on the door frame. Further, FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment is a ring-shaped outer periphery of the game window 101 that substantially corresponds to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed so as to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is equipped with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and the gaming window 101 is made to emit light as appropriate. The outer circumference of the can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference except for the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens parts 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centering around the lower part of the left and right center of the game window 101. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by a single smooth curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

Further, the door frame 5 is behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side upper decoration board 214, the right side lower decoration board 216, and the left side upper decoration board 254. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256, which are arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, have circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a, respectively. It is provided with LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens sections 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). .. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is used as an LED. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214, the right-side lower decorative substrate 216, the left-side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), white coating, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b and the like are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210, 250 from becoming too dark and unattractive to look, and by reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated brighter.

As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portions of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that face the left-right center of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. And four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to the. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 and an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed behind the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decoration substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the extension frame lens portion 282c and the upper central decoration substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper central decoration substrate 288, and the upper central lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted. It is possible to individually decorate the and. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290, and each extension frame lens portion 282c can be illuminated and decorated. .. The LEDs 288a, 288b, 290a of the upper central decoration substrate 288 and the upper side decoration substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and has an appearance continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this plate unit 300, an upper plate decoration board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper plate front decoration member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper plate decoration board 322 allows the upper plate front decoration member 316 to operate. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 for decorating the right side portion and the outer periphery on the front side of the upper plate ball removing button 341 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation portion 401 and a light-transmissive columnar pressing operation portion arranged inside the dial operation portion 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are arranged below the dial operation section 401 and the push operation section 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 430b (four in this example) arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a high-intensity white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full-color LED. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effect as the above can be obtained.

By the way, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery of the upper side of the lower side of the game window 101 correspond to each other. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a have a first annular group 102 close to the game window 101 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), and by making the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light as appropriate, substantially concentric circles surrounding the game window 101 A plurality of (two in this example) light-emitting decorations can be provided. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch close to the game window 101 is illuminated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are made to emit light. When all the lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , A radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) in the left-right direction so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be divided so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is set as the notification group 105, and by making this LED 214c emit light appropriately, the game is played. A variety of information can be notified to a person or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. Is defined as an upper center group 106 for illuminating and decorating the upper center of the. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make luminous decorations that become dots. The LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that lights and decorates both left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 arranged below the game window 101, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate 301 is illuminated and decorated. It is a dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the upper center of the dish unit 300 in the lower center of the game window 101 are the operation units 400. The operation unit group 109 is used for light emission decoration. By appropriately causing the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109 to emit light, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be determined. The player can be notified.

The light emitting decoration of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in further detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a-102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and the peripheral lenses 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been.

The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, the central portion 106a, the right portion 106b, and the left portion 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. In addition, the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include a pair of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are diagonally arranged with the pressing operation unit 405 interposed therebetween, and the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b. No. 2 system, and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In the light emission control, the number is 84 times, which is triple. The LEDs 288a and 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 109a, and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, it is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b formed by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, so that the same number of systems is used for the actual light emission control, that is, ten systems.

Therefore, the actual number of systems for light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. As a result, it is possible to produce a luminescent effect with a rich expression.

As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first annular group 102 is sequentially emitted to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitted in the same color or similar colors) to spread outward with the game window 101 as the center. Luminous effect, or conversely, luminous effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequentially emitting the same color or similar colors), Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with an LED (detailed illustration is omitted) provided in the game board 4, the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101, and the first annular group 102. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged on the outer side, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, by appropriately emitting light to each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284, or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited to this. , If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to favorably perform a light emission effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

Further, by making only the radial group 104 emit light, a light emission effect is produced in which the game window 101 is emitted as a center, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By doing so, a light-emitting effect in which the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 is made to emit light substantially uniformly, or by making the radial group 104 emit light (lighting/blinking) while the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are emitting light It is possible to give a luminous effect that gives an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by individually emitting light from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to provide a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b) are rotated.

Further, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, an opportunity is given to the player or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability variation game state, a time shortening game state, a probability variation short time gaming state). , Etc.) can be performed.

Further, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, the upper plate 301 is made to emit light, and by making the light emitted in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation are performed. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405. In addition, by making the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 emit light as appropriate, a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guides the rotating operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is produced. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108,. For each 109 or each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, it is possible to perform a light-emission effect with different gradations of light-emission color, brightness, etc. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is axially supported on the left side in front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end portion of the front view of 600, are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The award ball unit 700 for and a flow of game balls from the award ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the body frame 3 attached to the front surface of the body frame base 600. A ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 for

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the door frame 5 except the game board 4 and electric parts provided in the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unit of the above, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 which is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and which locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view that is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially forward and backward. It is formed so as to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the locking device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, when the main body frame base 600 is laid down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed on the main body frame base 600. Is able to improve.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 is a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer circumference of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms a front end outer periphery of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side in front view, a recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Door frame protrusion 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the door, upper bending protrusion 167 protruding rearward from the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and open side protruding rearward from the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the outer bending protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and a lower rear wall portion which spreads laterally in a plate shape. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like this.

Further, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board placing portion 606 on which the game board 4 is placed and the game board placing portion 606. Positioning projections 607 protruding upward from the substantially center in the left-right direction and engaging with out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and predetermined positions on the inner wall on the right side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605 are formed on the game board of the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 arranged. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 fits into the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the front side right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. There is. The front left side of the game board 4 will be described later in detail, but its movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. The unit 610 is provided (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally so that the upper shaft supporting metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft supporting metal fitting 640 can be mounted with sufficient strength. You can do it. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and the door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 in front view. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with a positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110 in the above, and a firing solenoid 654 of a hitting ball launching device 650 that is formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in a front view. And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, in the main body frame base 600 of this example, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed further rearward than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state where the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. A foul space 626 spreading downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 descends. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with an opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and a plurality of openings on the upper side of the opening 614 and both left and right sides in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is adapted to be closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the lower rear wall portion 604. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having an impact wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around a shaft center supported by a fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. The operation piece 690b extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in a front view). This game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a projects upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving to the front side. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, so that by making contact with the stopper 617, the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is regulated. Has become.

Further, in the body frame base 600, a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( As shown in FIG. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that extend vertically inward in the front-rear direction on the inner side (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in front view. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and a lock engaging hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is lined up in the left-right direction under the lower end of the door hook hole 620. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the substantially vertical center, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, respectively. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000 is performed. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

Further, the main body frame base 600 is gently and obliquely descended from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall part 604, and then, at the substantially center in the left-right direction, the lower rear wall part 604. It is provided with a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 that hangs down from an intermediate position in the vertical direction to a position slightly higher in the vertical direction. This main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is configured such that the rear side is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800, and the details will be described later, but the game balls that have flowed through the ball removal passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 are It is now in circulation.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided at the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 605 at the rear end on the rear side in the rear view, and a plurality of rear cover shaft support portions 623 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction and pivotally support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 diagonally upper left in front view of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 of the body frame 3 are attached to the body mount base 600 on the metal fixture mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower left ends of the front view of the body frame base 600 using predetermined screws, respectively. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the upper metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side in front view of the shaft support pin 633. And a door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63) penetrating in the up and down direction, and a downward swing from the left end of the front extension portion 632 in front view as viewed from the front to rotate the door frame 5 toward the open side. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) that regulates the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5, and the body frame 3 is axially supported with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame support metal fitting 644 for The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that vertically penetrates near the front end of the front extension portion 642b, and the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the front extension portion 642b. A stopper 642d is provided upright from the left end of the front side of 642a as viewed from the front, and restricts the pivot end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, the mounting portion 642a, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame support metal fittings 644 of the lower support metal fittings 640 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and have a plate-shaped mounting portion 644a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. Also in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extending portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of this example is such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame is mounted. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support metal fitting 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is like this.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 to form a shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal support 630 and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal support 640. Are located on the same axis, and the main body frame shaft support holes of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 are fitted and inserted into the support protrusions 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. The metal fitting 642c and the metal fitting 642c are positioned coaxially with each other, and the door pin 5 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame fitting hole 642c of the door frame fitting 642 in the lower fitting fitting 640. The lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extending portion 642b of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, and then the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the shaft pin 155 is not supported. Once it is slid downward, the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the strength according to the rotating operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, a launching base 652 made of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward from the lower back face of the launching base 652. Of the launch solenoid 654, the hammer 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement trajectory of the hammer tip 658. A hammer 656 at the tip of a ball hammer 656 is provided between a launch rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in a front view and is attached to the front surface of the launch base 652, and a launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660. At the same time that 658 is allowed to pass, a ball stopper piece 662 that holds a game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 and forms a gap that the game ball cannot pass through, and is held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the ball stop piece 662. And a stopper 664 for restricting the rotation of the hitting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) to the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position at which the played game ball can be hit.

Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocally rotates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the batting mallet 656 of the batting launcher 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 and a tip extending in a gentle arc from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b, which is oriented in the normal direction and has a tip 658 fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c, which extends to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and is in contact with the stopper 664, are provided. ing. Since the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 contacts the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated to the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower side is recessed so as to extend substantially along the lower extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-back direction. On the other hand, the center is formed in a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 which covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting a turning end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and a turning position of the hitting mallet 656 apart from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 abuts can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the abutting can be suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc., the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower part of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601), is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding opening 601. A foul space 626 is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the fal space 626 that extends downward in the left-right direction by a predetermined width. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example shoots the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by launching the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view of the launch rail 660. You can do it. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 is provided. The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received in the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the hitting ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotating operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It can be driven so as to be synchronized with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is adapted to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Therefore, the launching solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. By (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting mallet 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize Ball Unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. Further, FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear view of the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit in the prize ball unit, which is disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a ball circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Based on the above, the pachinko machine 1 is dispensed to the upper plate 301. The prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and that aligns the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sends it to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls that are aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction and the game ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. It is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fixing and fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof and to the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear view. Back cover fastening holes 780b are formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75, etc.).

In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in a front view. And is integrally molded with transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a by a predetermined width and is arranged in substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate arranged beside the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal board mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the upper edge of the rear wall portion 710b, and a rear side of a vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740 to the award ball, the prize ball passage 715 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 for guiding the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 downward, and the rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and escape holes 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to escape. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a mounting hole, a mounting boss, or the like for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, or the like, or the body frame base 600. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper side, and has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a rectangular shape only in the right rear portion (open side rear portion) in plan view A discharge port 723 that is formed by a portion of the right rear part that projects rearward of the bottom wall portion 721 of the right side 722 and that opens downward, and a plate shape from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Formed on the eaves portion 724 that extends to the rear, a rod-shaped shaft portion 725 that extends rearward from the lower left end of the eaves portion 724 in a plan view, and a prize ball formed near the base end of the shaft portion 725 and on both front side ends of the outer peripheral wall portion 722. An attachment portion 726 for attaching the tank 720 to the prize ball tank attachment portion 711 of the prize ball base 710.

In this prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the drawing, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein, and the other end side hangs down by its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and is capable of leveling and aligning game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game balls can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730, and the tank It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although not shown in detail, the top surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view is lowered toward the right side, In plan view, the right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game balls can be made smooth, and the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed and the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 is a gutter having a predetermined depth with an open upper side, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction, and a left end (axial support side) end in front view. The bottom is slanted so that This tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude further downward and are locked from the upper side to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 are provided.

This tank rail 731 is arranged such that the right end (open side) end in front view is located immediately below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 are stored. After receiving, it can be rolled to the left and passed from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper that can be moved back and forth in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a ground plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game ball that are partitioned into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 is provided with a mounting portion 734a on which the ball stopper 735 is mounted, and two slits 734b which vertically pass through the protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735.

In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 axially supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. In addition, the ball pressing plate 734 is for forcibly setting the game ball that has not been stepped up by the ball leveling member 727 to be stepped up, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and the pair of alignment gears 732 is axially supported so that the pitch of the teeth is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately prized one by one. Device 740.

It should be noted that the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball inside the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. Has become. Although not shown in detail, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 can be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 inside the tank rail 731, it is possible to remove the static electricity charged.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the ball stopper 735 rotatably mounted on the mounting portion 734 a of the ball retainer plate 734 is rotated, and the projecting piece 735 a of the ball stopper 735 is passed through the slit 734 a to the inside of the tank rail 730. By inserting into the projection rail 735a, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of the game balls and the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game ball discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 that is attached to the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage that opens to the upper end on the rear surface side and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined width, and a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end (open side) lower end in rear view A prize ball passage 741c opening to the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d communicating with the lower end (right side in the rear view) of the sorting space 741b in the rear view and extending downward and opening to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back lid 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support disposed below the back lid 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects rearward of the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is axially supported by the unit base 741, and a second gear 746 that meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741 are the third gear. A rotation detection board 749 is provided on the opposite side with the 747 interposed therebetween so as to be integrally rotatable, and has a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In addition, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls that are attached to the unit base 741 and circulate in the prize ball passage 741c. Is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 that holds the rotation angle sensor 752 and the rotation angle sensor 752 that detects the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. I have it.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection plate 749). ), and a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side with the back cover 742 sandwiched therebetween and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The metal fitting 757, the payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 sandwiched therebetween, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744 and the back cover 742 are detachably supported to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759 is provided.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the open rear end of the ball removal passage 741d. Are to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be alleviated. You can do it. In addition, the unit base 741 has a side surface on one side (left side in rear view) lower than a position in the supply passage 741a that bulges rearward, and is cut out at the outside of the cut portion of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the out-of-ball switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and so as to penetrate in the front-back direction below the prize ball passage 741c. And a motor insertion hole 741g which is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball break switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and is present in the supply passage 741a. It is possible to detect the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a by the ball break switch 750 by pressing the operation piece by the game ball. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball-off switch 750 (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the hall indicating that the ball is out. It will be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotor 748), a switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and a distribution space 741b. And a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742, which is disposed at an upper portion of the unit base 741. I have it. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 to the grounding metal fitting attaching portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 comes into contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped grounding metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball flowing through the supply passage 741a through the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 is removed. You can do it.

The back lid 742 of the prize ball device 740 is in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end thereof bulges backward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment/detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the rear surface of the center in the up-down direction, and a relay board mounting portion. A sensor board mounting portion 742c for mounting the sensor board 753, which is disposed below the portion 742b, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is configured to come into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 is prevented. It is designed to facilitate heat dissipation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated in the recess 748a one by one and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the space between the concave portions 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and the detection slits 749a are detected by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

In the prize ball device 740 of the present example, the payout motor 744 is generated by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit, or the like to the payout control board 4110 or operating the ball removal switch 860b. Is rotated so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is designed to rotate. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detecting board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 78, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then transferred to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out to the ball removing passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 is arranged. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball removing passage 741d are, from the lower end of the ball removing passage 741d, a ball removing passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770, a main body frame base ball removing passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit. It is possible to discharge the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the rear side through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when it is assembled to the main body frame 3, the prize from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full tank distribution unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, the game balls can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 when the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300.

The full-tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the upper part of the center in the front-rear direction by a locking part 770a that is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710, and is fixed to the rear end upper part on the back surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710. And a fixed portion 770b. The full-tank branching unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the attachment locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and thus the prize ball base 710. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the drawing, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole is lowered toward the front end from the rear end, and is opened upward in the substantial center of the rear end upper part in the left-right direction. A prize ball socket 771 for receiving a game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball socket 771 and expanding in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And, a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball toward the front side from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 79), and discharges the game ball flowing through the normal passage 773 to the front to front the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 that opens to the right end of the view and a full tank passage 775 that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position farther to the right in rear view than directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 79). ) And a game ball that has flowed through the full tank passage 775 to the front, and a full tank ball outlet 776 that opens to the left of the normal ball outlet 774 in front view is provided.

Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball removal receiving opening 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part in front view and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball removal passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball received in the withdrawal opening 777 to the front side, and the game ball that has flowed through the ball removal passage 778 is discharged forward and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view and A ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full-ball outlet 776.

In the full tank branching unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5. The ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are arranged so as to communicate with each other, and the game ball discharged from the normal ball exit 774 passes through the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 to reach the plate unit 300. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the body frame base ball passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 779 are main body frame base 600. It is designed to be delivered to the main body frame base removal passage 622.

In this full tank branching unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down in the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 through the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and exits above the dish unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

By the way, when the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) while the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot be ejected from the upper plate 301 side from the 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage 773 in the upstream is also filled through the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and then moves laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b, under the dish unit 300. It is designed to be supplied to the dish 302.

The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full tank branching unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging without disassembling the full tank branching unit 7700. ..

In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example, when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are full, the game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740 are automatically Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the upper plate is full and the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button of the upper plate like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to avoid interruption of the driving of the game ball, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience during the game and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example branches the passage of the game ball paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game balls accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. The game balls can be directly driven by 650, and the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 301 is substantially the amount of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. You can Therefore, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided and the game is played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player can be provided, and the wide game area 1100 can entertain the player.

Further, since the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray so that the first inlet Even when only one 542a and the second ball inlet 542c), it is possible to send the game ball to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branching unit 770) of the game balls in the main body frame 3. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost required for the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be dealt with without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

Further, the game balls sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 are preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if the game balls are exchanged for, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing due to lack of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. ..

Also, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. It becomes possible to dedicate the player to the driving operation of the game ball and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even if the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 having two storing plates, It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, it is possible to deepen the storage dish to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls, and the player can frequently play without worrying about the storage amount. And the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays can be accommodated without changing the body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 of the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. Therefore, the substantial amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full with game balls and the game balls cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the storage amount of the substantial game balls stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the amount of game balls stored in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). The number can be increased as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 are set to have a size such that the game balls can be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the amount of retention (storage amount) of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 is set. Since the number can be increased, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be adapted to the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

Further, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, a game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In doing so, it is possible to easily find the location of the ball clogging from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to eliminate the problem early and increase the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening/closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view, and is attached to the main body frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 are closed to move the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game balls.

The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view so as not to project from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, an opening/closing crank 793 for sliding the opening/closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised via the opening/closing crank 793. And an opening/closing spring 794 that biases the

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening/closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to project above the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank arranged on the front surface of the left end portion in front view to support the opening/closing crank 793 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening/closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged near the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

Further, the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter main body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter main body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ) And a drive hole 792b having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening/closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in front view. Drive rod 793b extending outward from the right side to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and protruding rearward from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening/closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d that extends downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and has a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end of the open/close spring 794 formed on the intermediate upper surface of the drive rod 793b). ) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening/closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised, it is arranged on the rear side through the opening/closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full ball outlet 776, etc. in the full tank branching unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, when the opening/closing crank 793 rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, the drive pin 793c of the opening/closing crank 793 rotates in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening/closing shutter 792 is adapted to slide in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 contacts the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is configured to be rotated clockwise in the front view against the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening/closing shutter 792 descends so that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 and the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening/closing crank 793 is opened. Is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the urging force of the opening/closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, in response to opening/closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 automatically causes the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, it is possible to prevent the game balls from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as disassembled and seen from the front. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after disassembling it. Further, FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the action of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. 89(A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and FIG. 89(B) is a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 89(A).

The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. The emission power board box 830 attached to the rear surface of the right end of the front view of 810, the power board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the emission power board box 830 from the rear side, and the power board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear surface and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 that is attached to the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. A terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front; a main side relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810; And a terminal plate 882.

The board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 of the present example has a shape extending in the left-right direction as shown in the drawing, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered one step downward and is gradually inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shield wall portion 811 that projects forward from the front surface, an opening 812 that is disposed above the position at which the center of the shield wall portion 811 in the left-right direction is lowered and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shield wall portion 811. And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting section 813 in front view. Cylindrical duct part 814 penetrating through, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speakers 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and left side in rear view (right side in front view) A box housing portion 816, which is opened rearward and upward and is capable of housing the front side of the firing power supply board box 830, is provided on the rear surface of the upper portion.

In this board unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. In addition, the board base unit 810 sends the game ball, which has flowed down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622, to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-back direction. You can do it.

In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are forward from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. To face. Further, the board unit base 810 can favorably transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side through the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, it is possible to form an accommodating recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 literally includes a speaker 821 mounted facing the front side. This speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, has a horizontally elongated rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with a space on the rear side of the speaker 821 via a predetermined labyrinth-like passage to invert the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 to move forward. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted to the front. ing.

The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape having an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 is designed to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the launching power supply board 831, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like via the slits 830a formed in the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

This firing power supply board box 830 is detachable from above in a housing recess formed by a box housing 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing 843 of a power board box holder 840 which will be described later and opened upward. It is supposed to be accommodated. Accordingly, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily removed from the front side of the body frame 3 for replacement or repair. Yes (see Figure 63).

Further, the emission power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the emission power supply board 831 includes a DC/DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the power from the DC/DC converter 831a. And a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 to drive it. This emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a as heat dissipation holes formed on its upper and lower surfaces in order to radiate heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a and electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC/DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed serves as a heat dissipation hole. The slit 830a is formed. In addition, the launch power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides its internal space into two spaces, a space for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall with the lower surface. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 to close the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830, the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces, that is, a housing space 830c for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a housing space 830d for housing the DC/DC converter 831a, are formed, the partition wall 830b serves as a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , A storage space 830d for storing the DC/DC converter 831a and a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is housed by being released to the outside via the 830a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC/DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a is a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated by being radiated to the outside through the slit 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the combined current flowing in the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the emission power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its small size, and the replacement operation of the emission power supply board 831 can be facilitated, which can contribute to the reduction of the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the launch power supply board box 830 with the launch power supply board 831 still attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830.

Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game must be interrupted, the work of exchanging the firing power supply board 831 is easy. By doing so, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to very easily eliminate the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire at an early stage and restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is deteriorated early by repeated charging/discharging at a frequency of 100 times per minute, for example, every time the firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654, and the life is shortened. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, but in the case where charging/discharging is repeatedly performed at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Since it does not exist, its life is extremely long as compared with the firing power supply board 831. In other words, the emission power supply substrate 831 reaches the end of its life relatively early due to deterioration caused by charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply substrate 851 reaches the end of life due to aging. The DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 that is separate from the power supply board 851, so that the life is shortened. It is possible to concentrate the electronic components on the power supply board 851 due to the long-term change of As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component, which has a long service life and is aged, from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 which has a short service life.

Further, since the launch power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached and detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity for changing the hitting characteristic Even if an illegal attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power board 831, and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. By doing so, it is possible to make it harder to carry out fraud, and it is possible to prevent fraudulently changing the launching power board 831 that has been optimized and intentionally changing the optimized driving strength, and at the same time making it difficult to carry out fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a player who feels irritated or the like from developing into fraud such as fraud.

Further, since the emission power board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the emission power board 831 is tampered with, the emission power board 831 is immediately replaced to tamper with it. It can be resolved, the period of interruption of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced by changing the model, the launch power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, which matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By changing to the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC/DC converter 831a capable of realizing the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the hit ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 are changed to a new game. It can be matched with board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed and the interest of the player is prevented from decreasing. can do.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached and detached from the front side, when exchanging the launch power supply board 831, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 to the island facility such as a game hall, The time and effort required for the exchange can be simplified, the exchange can be performed in a short time, and the burden on the game hall side can be prevented from increasing. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply board box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the driving characteristic is changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control section 4120 (the payout control board 4110) is replaced. It is possible to reduce the cost required for, and to reduce the burden on the hall side.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is exchanged so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the firing control unit 4120 can be used for a long time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is deteriorated, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above. You can replace it to solve the problem, shorten the game interruption period as much as possible, and early eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

In addition, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601 in order to be detachable. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing a fraudulent act is entered through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having high defense power against fraudulent activity can be prevented while preventing fraudulent activity from being performed on the firing power supply board 831.

Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position supporting the launch power supply board box 830 is rearward of the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the launch power supply is possible. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the emission power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the emission power supply board 831 can be easily attached/detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 supplies power to the emission solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 easily deteriorates, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be resolved early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is a discharge ball receiver that receives a game ball discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 on the left front side with respect to the left-right center in a front view. A portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, a discharge passage 842 and a front side of the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) in front and A front box accommodating portion 843 that is opened upward and is capable of accommodating the rear side of the firing power supply board box 830 and a rear end of the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed to the front side and capable of accommodating the front end of the power supply board box 850. And a rear box accommodating portion 844.

The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 is formed by flowing through the body frame base ball-out passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and passing through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810. The game ball that has flowed down to and the game ball that has been discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 will be described later in detail through the discharge passage 842, on the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged to.

Further, in the power supply board box holder 840, the front box housing portion 843 is formed at a position corresponding to the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810. An accommodation recess for accommodating the box 830 can be formed.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is designed to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and the heat from the electronic components and the like can be externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 86, the power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

In addition, the power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that projects rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 on the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 87, in the power supply board box 850, the standing wall portion 850b is slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 with the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 connected to the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854. Is formed so as to project to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the wiring cord 854 wrapping around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is adapted to be connected.

By the way, when connecting the connector terminal with the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the board and then pulling the wiring cord toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. A force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 side can be prevented from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. The wire cord 854 can be easily turned off by the wiring guide portion 850d after the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and a series of operations can be continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the work process for assembling.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed such that the size in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When mounted on, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction such that the connection with the 853 is released, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. This makes it easier to remove the board, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, the bending degree of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from breaking due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is probably located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connected connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and it is impossible. It is possible to prevent the application of various forces, and it is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. Further, since the power supply board 850 is covered with the power supply board 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, or the like, which causes a defect, from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and defense power against fraud can be enhanced. Has become.

Further, the direction in which the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power supply terminals 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminals are connected to the power supply terminals 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting 855 can be made to easily act on the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the breakage of the power supply and the power supply terminal 851 from coming off from the power supply board 851 due to the breakage of the power supply, and the pachinko machine 1 in which the trouble does not easily occur can be provided.

Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means including the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 can be fixed. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being released. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor current flow.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with the protrusions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if the wiring cord 854 is slid along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that prevents the above and surely achieves the above-described effects.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to be moved to the standing wall portion 850b side, the wiring cord 854 is hard to come off from the standing wall portion 850b. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to carry out a series of work continuously, and it is possible to simplify the work process relating to assembly and suppress an increase in cost.

The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a horizontally long, thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened. 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 153) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separating/cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and at one place of the plurality of separating/cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 from each other, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened/closed. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball removal switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the rear surface on the upper left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. A board base 871 having the board base 871, a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 that is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b that extends vertically in the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. Also, a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and a board box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873 are provided.

The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 of the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency display for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each made of transparent synthetic resin, and are connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. Also, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a problem such as a ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display or CR unit installed on the island facility side is displayed. The status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 of the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 includes a fixing piece (not shown) that is formed on the upper inside of the board mounting portion 871a and fixes the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and a peripheral panel relay formed on the lower inside of the board mounting portion 871a. And a locking piece 871i for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, so that the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871i. ing.

In addition, the board base 871 has a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in a thin box shape that is open to the rear side, and the inner circumference of the board base 871 has a size that allows the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 to be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in rear view in the left-right direction. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f which is arranged on the left outer side of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The ridge 871e of the board base 871 has a state in which the amount of rearward projection is slightly less than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the drawing, it is provided on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as much as possible. It is arranged so that it will be close to.

Further, the board base 871 is disposed on the rear right side of the board cover mounting portion 871b rearward in the vertical direction so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of bearings 871g for pivotally supporting the board box cover 875 and a left end rear view. And a locking portion 871h in the shape of a rectangular tube which is arranged on the rear surface near the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and is insertable into the board cover attachment portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening portion 873b. The inner wall portion 873d extending from 873a forward (to the side of the board base 871) and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has a plurality of openings 873f arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and a vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. Pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and elastic claw-shaped engagements that can be engaged with the engagement holes 871f of the substrate base 871 that are formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear. And a pawl piece 873i. Although not shown, inner wall portions 873d extending forward are also formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening portion 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 is in the shape of a thin box whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the forward movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. Has become. Further, in the connection terminal plate cover 873, the fixing piece 873h is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked in the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the substrate cover attaching portion 871b.

The CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) thereof. In addition, the payout control board 4110, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a rectangular two-piece connector. There is.

In addition, the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through hole 875b penetrating in the front-rear direction corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and front and rear from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b. And a locking piece 875d that is locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The substrate box cover 875 pivotally supports the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be opened and closed. There is. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (a side pivotally supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective collision walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like this.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as the D-sub connector, and therefore, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear, as shown in the drawing.

As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example, in the assembled state, has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Of the projection 871e and the outer piece portion 871c, and in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the shaft portion 875a of the substrate box cover 875. Since the side wall 875c and the side wall 875c are respectively present, a multi-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to intrude an illicit tool with excellent flexibility between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool will not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal will not be bent. It is possible to surely prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the plate 874 and reliably prevent an illegal act with respect to the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 abuts on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a is attached. Even if a D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It is like this.

Further, the terminal board box 870 includes a pair of shaft portions 875a on a board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 on the side of the shaft portion 875a of the through hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Since an impact wall 875c having a length that spans between them is provided and the impact wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like can be inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to perform fraudulent activity and reducing the deterrent force. It can be expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, in a state in which the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector, it is illegal to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are separated from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the space between the pachinko machine 1 and the tip of the illegal tool enters the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal board 874. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal board 874.

Further, when the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board are arranged in the direction along the front surface (the back surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The ridge 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871 and the outer wall portion 873c and inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board Since each of the impact walls 875c of the box cover 875 is present, a multi-layered defense wall is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. By analogy, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is allowed to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal board is not bent. It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the 874, and reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion can be covered by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear surface of the board base 871 to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and an opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. The board box cover 875 having a plate-shaped impact wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through hole 875b on the pivotally supported side to the rear surface of the board base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are axially supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and an unauthorized tool is allowed to enter, the unauthorized wall 875c prevents the unauthorized tool from connecting terminals. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then the connection terminal board cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c, even if an attempt is made to insert a driver or the like between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted and a gap can be prevented from being formed, and fraudulent acts can be made difficult and deterrence can be enhanced.

Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the wiring cord-side terminal connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, a countermeasure is taken. Since the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875 cover the rear side of the opened opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body, the outside of the terminal board box 870 ( A needle-shaped electrode cannot be inserted from the rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the terminals of the connected wiring cords, which has a high crime prevention capability. Can be

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e that holds the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c is extended to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform fraud, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). It is possible to keep the protection of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874a. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such as.

Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an unauthorized tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or has the CR unit connection terminal board 874 itself been replaced with an unauthorized tool? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether or not the electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like are replaced with unauthorized ones. Since it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts and to detect fraudulent acts, it is possible to hesitate to perform fraudulent acts against those who perform fraudulent acts, and enhance deterrence against fraudulent acts. it can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the rear surface side of the main body frame 3 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 3 is turned to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 is turned to the operator side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal board 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

The main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are the peripheral control section 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the door frame. 5 is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, the respective decorative boards, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals are directed from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side.

The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are covered with the relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 63. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side are exposed to the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

In addition, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362 of the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side, a loan remaining display portion 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500. This is for relaying the connection between the 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 is provided on each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the dish unit 300, and the operation unit 400, and each of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288. , 290, 322, 430, 432, and the dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided in the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main frame 3 side. It is for relaying.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90(A) is a front perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover taken apart and seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. This back cover 900 has a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of axial support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction and project downward and are axially supported by the back cover axial support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body portion 902 in front view, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the rear cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and a rear cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and the rear cover 900 near the lower engaging piece 908. 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fastening mechanism 920 of the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating to the left side in the front-rear direction in the rear view of the lower engagement piece 908 of the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically elongated rectangular locking port 922 that is disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in a rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a slot 923b of the guide member 923, which is inserted from the rear side of the main body 902. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a guide member 923 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923. And a holding member 925. The guide member 923 of the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923 a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disc-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw part 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall off from the long hole 923b. In this fastening mechanism 920, when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening member 924 protruding to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 that is inserted from the rear side to the front side of the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw part 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900, The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 902 is maintained.

Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. When the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example does not remove the fastening member 924 even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, the fastening and fastening can be easily performed only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. The back cover 900 can be released, and the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified and maintainability can be improved.

In addition, the back cover 900 has a connection cutout 910 that is cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower end of the main body 902 on the right side in a front view, and a confirmation opening that penetrates a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connection cutout 910 in a front view. 912, and a confirmation cutout 914 that is cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 5, this back cover 900 is in a state of being closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 through the connection notch 910. Is facing the rear side. Further, the back cover 900 has a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 through the check opening 912 and faces the rear side. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the cutout portion 914. Accordingly, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

In addition, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 of the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at a position slightly leftward from the center when viewed from the front, and are wide and extend long in the vertical direction and are arranged in rows in the left-right direction at predetermined intervals. These through holes 918 are in a state in which the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is housed and held in the main body frame 3 in the rear of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided on the side, so that heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Therefore, when the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is guided by the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 by being held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900, and the fastening member 924 is removed from the back cover 900. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from falling off.

Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been fastened at a predetermined position at the time of maintenance or the like. Since it can be held near the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is configured to extend at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be directly positioned in the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a can be securely attached to the back cover fastening hole 780b in a correct state. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion of the holding member 925 and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the long hole 923b of the guide member 923, and at the same time, the holding member 925. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by a gap between the guide member 923 and the long hole 923b.

Further, a housing concave portion capable of housing the holding member 925 is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back of the main body frame 3. When fastening to the cover fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are in close contact with each other. By doing so, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of a defect. It can be made to look good as well.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion so as to be screwed with the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is possible to fasten by simply pulling as compared with the engagement by the locking claw. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove because the back cover 900 cannot be removed, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

Furthermore, since the guide member 923 is flexible and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, or move the male screw portion 924 straightly with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

In addition, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900 with the locking opening. Since it is elastically locked to the 922, the tip end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923, which is movably attached, extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923a can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the front end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. Is further provided with a plurality of engaging pieces 908 for engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the rear cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3 so that the fastening member 924 is fastened. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 at only one place, and the work such as assembling and maintenance. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening members 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the body frame 3. Therefore, only by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3, even when the fastening by the fastening members 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the labor required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side crime prevention plate]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the drawing, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a U-shape that is shallow in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. , A positioning member 956 fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engaging with the positioning recessed portion 1119 of the game board 4.

The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 has a side plate piece 952a extending substantially in the vertical direction and having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600, and a front-rear direction having a substantially constant depth. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap behind the front end piece 952b and having a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the front side from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending in the right direction as viewed from the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 108). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by the side plate piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d and the front constituent member 1110 in the game board 4. The left side when viewed from the front with the game panel 1150 is designed to be inserted (see FIG. 108).

In the side crime prevention plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In the side crime prevention plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 causes the shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 to support the shaft supporting side plate. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the letter-like protrusion 166, and prevents a tool for performing an illegal act from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view. (See FIG. 108). Further, the main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength/rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 is enhanced, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be enhanced to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped shaft-supporting side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted in the U-shaped side. Since it is in a state of being sandwiched by the projecting pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotal-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the pivotal support side of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 by contact, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented, which can prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, since the side surface crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being easily distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the side crime prevention plate 950 on the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5 (axial support side) is made of metal. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal.

Further, as will be described later in detail, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is provided with the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one place between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (opening side) are locked by the three hook portions 1041 for the door frame, Even if the open side is gouged by an unauthorized tool such as a crowbar, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from expanding, and prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened. it can.

Further, the rear end of the side plate piece 952a in the side crime prevention plate 950 is made to extend rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the front-back dimension of the side plate piece 952a becomes longer. Since the bending rigidity against the load applied in the front-rear direction becomes strong, the strength and rigidity of the entire side crime prevention plate 950 can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the side crime prevention plate 950 from being forcibly bent and performing fraudulent acts. ..

Further, since the side face crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the metal extruded mold material, the side face crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, and it is possible to reduce defects such as a decrease in strength occurring during processing as compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The side crime prevention plate 950 can be made as small as possible and has high durability and strength.

[1-3I. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93(A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 94(A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and FIG. 94(B) is a sliding rod for a door frame and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. FIG. 4C is a rear perspective view showing the above, and FIG. Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device after disassembling it, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the door frame sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the lock device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 from approximately the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 68. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in an upper part of a front end right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600, a lock locking hole 621 formed in a lower part, and a peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base body 1001 as a lock base body having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base body 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped so that the sliding cannot be performed illegally. A first tampering prevention member 1023 and a second tampering prevention member 1032 attached to the bottom of the base body 1001 are provided.

The U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base body 1001 has a lateral width dimension that is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device in which a base body formed to have an L-shaped cross section is integrated. As a result, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, which further increases the game area. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

The U-shaped base body 1001 is mounted such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the locking device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 become the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is in a completely covered state and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts against the lock device 1000 from the outside.

In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side) thereof. A hook through opening 1002, a screw stopper 1003 projecting outward from the top and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw stopper. An upper end portion and an intermediate portion on the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projecting portion 1003 is provided, and the front end project from the lower ends of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 603 of the main body frame base 600 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other when the screw locking portion 603 is moved upward after being inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attaching portion 625 via the interlocking screw.

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only in the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003, but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described below and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, lower and middle sides are provided with the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole. Since the structure is such that the locking device 1000 is inserted into the main body frame 621 for positioning and locking, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw, the lock device 1000 can be constructed with an extremely simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having an extremely thin width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front and rear sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 forming the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) is provided on the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 forming the fixing structure on the rear side is provided so as to project from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side corresponds to the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling, as compared with the case where the locking device 1000 is formed on the contacting side surface 1001b.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it while the body frame sliding rod 1050 is stored, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper ends of the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower locations of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower ends of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. Thus, the door frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved upward and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with a tamper-proof cutout portion 1007 formed on a closed side surface at a lower portion thereof, and a side surface 1001b which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side, and protrudes laterally from the front end. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020 penetrating the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed respectively. Although the details of the fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is provided on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The lock insertion hole 1009, which is provided so as to project from the front end portion toward the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010, are mounted at two upper and lower positions in order to mount the screw 1012. A mounting hole 1014 bored in and a screw fastening portion 1003 bored to attach the lower part of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 that biases the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and a side escape hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. Equipped with.

The cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and has one end side serving as a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

In this cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion is inserted from a rear side into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008, and then attachment holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower portions of a lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through.

The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illicitly rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire or a wire, thereby tampering with the body frame sliding rod 1050. This is to prevent lowering. As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023, together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001, passes through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is adapted to be attached by a lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006.

Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base body 1001 on the plate-shaped surface thereof, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted therein. The projecting piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The ascending engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to the outer periphery of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 in the front upper diagonal direction so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 is provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97B (clockwise rotation in FIG. 97B).

Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base body 1001 side from an outer periphery of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely rearward and downward, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a restriction protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that penetrate through the restriction protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and that are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inserted into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the body frame sliding rod 1050 from unintentionally sliding. In addition, the restriction protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

In addition, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed in the pin hole 1029 is Guide the first tampering prevention member 1023 along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with the horizontally elongated opening formed in the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base body 1001. You can do it. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second tampering prevention member 1032 connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 is formed of a plate material having an inverted "te" shape, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second tampering prevention member 1032 may be rotatably connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first tampering prevention member 1023. You can do it. The second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, the spring 1035 urges the spring upward. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the lower inside of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the locking device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base body 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 that project toward the front at three locations in the upper, lower, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base body 1001 with the door frame sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600 (see FIG. 63 and FIG. 68, etc.) protrudes forward and the door is opened. The hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5 can be locked. It should be noted that the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with 165 can be released.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet elongated hole 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, a guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The rivet elongated hole 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is adapted to be inserted with the rivet 1006 which is inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the rivet 1006 is slid for the door frame. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the raising operation of the rod 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 that has penetrated the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact with the rivet elongated hole 1042. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is configured such that the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, it is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at the upper end portion for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 causes the sliding of the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 and can prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like this.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 has a tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The section constitutes a movable space. Further, when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured such that the pivot movement of the engagement cam 1016 causes the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame to ascend. For engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief cutout portion 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction larger than the tampering prevention cutout portion 1007 at the rear of the lower portion of the vertical side. The escape notch portion 1049 interferes with the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 surely engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so as not to become.

On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. Equipped with. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of one vertically long metal plate as in the conventional case, and is made of a metal including an upper hook member 1051 and a lower hook member 1052 having hook portions 1054 and 1065. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently housed in the narrow space of the U-shaped base body 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating in a lateral direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper inside of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claw portion is formed upward.

Further, the rivet oblong hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet oblong hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. A guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1040 are inserted. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured so that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. It has no play and can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet for penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. The long hole 1061, the downward engaging hole 1062 arranged below the long hole for rivet 1061, the play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engaging hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed at the lower portion of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portions 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed on the lower portion on the inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw portion is formed upward. Further, the rivet elongated hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet elongated hole 1061 is riveted. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

Further, when the first engaging projection piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 descends the body frame sliding rod 1050 by the rotating operation. Is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is inserted into the second engaging projection 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the second engaging projection 1018 when the second engaging projection 1018 is rotated. The distal end of the can form a movable space. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the sliding lever 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding blade for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the moving rod 1050.

Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without backlash.

Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and superposed. In a state in which they are overlapped with each other, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook penetrating opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001 and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the body frame. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the long holes for rivet 1055, 1061, 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the lowermost end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and attach the first tampering prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is fixed to the pin hole. It is necessary to fix the guide pin 1028 to the 1029 with a screw (not shown) and then insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base body 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057 to form the door. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in mutually opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is hung over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second improper prevention. The member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement projection portion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is also inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tampering prevention member 1023.

As described above, in order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning with the lock attaching portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 forming the locking structure of the front part is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall part 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while the rear part is fixed. Since the screw fastening portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b contacting the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 96(A). In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are engaged with the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 are The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In that state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is rotated in a direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96(B). The tip of the first engaging projection 1017 is engaged with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and to connect with this. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down to descend. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the body frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the body frame 3 to the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 96A), but the hook portion 1054. , 1065 are inclined downward toward the outer side, and therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the inclined portions of the upper sides of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are closed by the closing plates 24, 25. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the hooks 1054, 1065 upward claws and the closing plates 24, 25 are again locked, and the main body frame slide is performed. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a not-shown key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96(C), The tip of the second engaging projection piece 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

Note that when the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the inclined portion of the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame becomes the hook cover 165. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is lifted upward by abutting the upper end of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the U-shaped base body 1001 has a substantially vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. A door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to reliably lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. You are unable to perform any act.

As described above, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the locking device 1000 of the present example does not engage in a fraudulent act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. You can't. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a locking mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032. The second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97(A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact each other. It is in the state of having done. In this state, the urging force of the spring 1035 causes the first tampering prevention member 1023 to rotate counterclockwise, the stopper piece 1027 enters the tampering prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 tampering prevention notch. It is in a state of engaging with an engaging cutout portion 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the body frame sliding rod 1050 to pull it down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) downward, and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to unlock the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engaging protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engaging protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. Starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement cutout 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state to also rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are released, and the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Therefore, the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the second tampering prevention member 1023. The positional relationship with 1032 is almost the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. 97(A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97(A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not interfere with the closing of the main body frame 3. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be tampered with.

Even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming a case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the above are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, respectively, and are completely covered. Since it is in the state, even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 are pulled down. Since this prevents unauthorized tools from entering the enclosed space, the structure is such that illegal activities cannot be performed easily.

As described above, the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment has a door frame sliding rod 1040 inside the U-shaped base body 1001 whose lateral width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device integrated in the L-shaped base body. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely increased, and even if the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed.

Further, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the inside The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, which are arranged in the above, are completely covered by the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. It is impossible to easily carry out an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided therein.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. Since it is structured such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three positions on the upper, lower and middle sides of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with screws by using a screw, the structure is extremely simple. With such a structure, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

In the lock device 1000 of this example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attaching piece 1008 and a cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 are provided near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with a screw. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 that attaches the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. A structure may be adopted in which lock mounting holes that are screwed through the piece 1008 are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625. It can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped base body (lock base body), and a door frame slide rod 1040 and a main body frame slide rod are placed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and a first side wall 540. The structure may be such that 1050 is housed, and the same effects as those of the locking device 1000 described above can be obtained.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of this example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (backward and rearward) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The award ball tank 720 storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the game balls discharged from the award ball tank 720 are aligned and the rear wall portion of the prize ball base 710 is arranged. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of 710b, and game balls released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Part of the prize ball device 740, which is attached to the rear side of the rear side 710b, has a transparent side 904 and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600. Since the transparent back cover 900 arranged in the same plane is provided, the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900 and the like. A pachinko machine 1 that can visually check the rear side surface and can easily inspect the rear side of the game board 4 (visual inspection) without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. can do.

Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., so that the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be seen. Even when tools such as a driver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt are left between the game board 4 and the back cover 900 when the game board 4 is detached from the front side of the 601 and the game machine 4 is removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of some trouble due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an unauthorized device or tool for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear side or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it is possible to easily find out, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts are performed, and it is possible to easily find out an illegal device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 can be hesitant to attach an unauthorized device or the like, and has a high deterrent against illegal acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4, or the game board 4 is used. It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 (see FIG. 65) from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the main body. Since the depth D of the frame base 600 is set to about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. The action and effect can be surely exhibited. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is laid down can be made as low as possible to have a flat shape. The attachment work for attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 can be facilitated.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating the rearward projection, it is possible to catch or abut other members in the installed island equipment. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of trouble. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a buffer material having a simple shape can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the stacking efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 and the like, so the game board It is possible to make the rear side of No. 4 and the like easier to see, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and control can be prevented from becoming instable due to heat, the control of the game becoming unstable, and the deformation of members such as synthetic resin. be able to. Further, the slits 916 and the through holes 918 of the back cover 900 are set to a size that the game balls cannot pass through. Therefore, for example, even if the game balls spill on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the game balls pass through the slits 916 and the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 107. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 102(A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in the game board in a state where it is attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like as seen from the front, and FIG. 104 is a game as seen from the back of FIG. 103. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. In addition, FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using a front component member of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 and the like as seen from the front, and FIG. 107 is a game board as seen from the back of FIG. FIG.

As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 of the present embodiment defines the outer periphery of a game area 1100 in which a player operates a handle device 500 to hit a game ball, and the outer shape is a substantially rectangular front shape. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defining the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160. A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface of the game machine 1100 and controls a game content performed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180, which is capable of displaying the game status and is visibly attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, is provided. Although not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 and the details will be described later, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, it is further provided (see FIGS. 110 to 117, etc.).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by the front component member 1110, the game panel 1150, the board holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1110 of the game board 4 will be described. The outer shape of the front component member 1110 of the game board 4 of this example is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1110 includes an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from a lower end on the left side in the front view toward the left in a clockwise direction along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction in a front view, and passes through an upper end in the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to an obliquely upper right portion. An inner rail 1112 that is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from a lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in front view, the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. Of the game area 1100 at the boundary portion between the inner rail 1112 and the inner rail 1112, and the stop portion 1114 to which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 can be brought into contact with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111. From the upper end of the inner rail 1112, which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 and which is arranged at the lowermost end and is lowered toward the rear, and the upper end of the inner rail 1112. Only the closed position extending upward and the open position in which the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front can be rotated and can be returned to the closed position side. And a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring (not shown).

When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, as shown in FIG. It is adapted to be located on an extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space that is widened in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launching device 650. By jumping over the space, it can be driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball hit between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is installed. , By turning to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is hit strongly with the ball launch device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. It is possible to forcibly change the rolling direction of the game ball by bringing the game ball into contact with this stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (struck) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

In addition, if the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not accepted in the winning holes (general winning hole, starting hole, big winning hole, role winning hole, etc.) of the table unit 2000, which will be described later, the game is played. It flows down to the lower end of the region 1100, and is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. It is designed to be discharged to.

On the other hand, when the game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device 650 cannot cross the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downward in the opposite direction, and from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, a foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed. When it falls, it is received in the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and is discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

The outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to its surface to improve wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball and to allow the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. Further, the stopper portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin disposed on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is mitigated. The game ball can be repelled inward.

In addition, the front component 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention protrusion 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially vertical center along the inner rail 1113 from the lower side of the outlet guide surface 1115. A rail-shaped crime prevention groove 1118 that extends to the front end and is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component member 1110 overlaps with the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivotal support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the inside of the game area 1100. You can't.

Further, in the front component member 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime projection 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. In addition, the post-crime prevention protrusion 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (the side opposite to the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even with the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the crime prevention rear projection 182, an illegal tool such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

Further, the front component 1110 is arranged at the left end in the front view in the vertical direction and is spaced apart in the vertical direction, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 that are recessed from the front to the rear and open at the left end, and are separated in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 that are arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 that is arranged on the left side of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 when viewed from the front, is opened downward, and is formed in an arcuate shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. Near the left end of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage notch 1122, which is a rectangular notch extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction. The positioning recessed portion 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to the positioning member 956 attached inside the side surface crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 in front view. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, so that the game board stopper 1120 can be attached to the game board. By locking to the locking portion 608, the front end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

In addition, the fixed recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a state in which the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game board fixing tool 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 is seen in a front view. When it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixing tool 690. It is like this. Further, the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage notch 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, so that the game board 4 holds the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3. The front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152 in the state of being inserted into.

Further, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center of the lower side of the through hole 1123 in the left-right direction to the left in front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate paper sticking portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in front view to stick a certificate stamp for certifying confirmation are provided. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 has a predetermined fastening band with respect to a fastening hole formed in the conventional body frame when the game board 4 is attached to the conventional body frame. By winding and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged outside the rail crime prevention groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right in front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing the game panel 1150, the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 can be held between them. In addition, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 on the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at a lower portion in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a horizontally elongated front end on the left side in the front view at the lower end. And a downward opening of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction through the ball passage cutout 1152 of the same shape as the ball passage cutout 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the lower right corner in front view. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted is provided.

Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 near the lower left and right ends, and the positioning protrusion 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 to be formed, and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 (see FIG. 101) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1151 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front and the lower end side is opened downward. And a notch portion 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1150 in the game board 4 of this example can define the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is defined by the front component member 1110, and within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are arranged in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the game panel 1150 is formed so that the outlet 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and when assembled on the game board 4, it is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component member 1110. The game ball guided to the rear by the out-out guide surface 1115 thus entered enters the out-hole 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box-like shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharging portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the up-down direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at approximately the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the top surface of the bottom wall portion has the out-ball discharging portion 1161. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and are discharged (discharged) from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit and the back unit, and are supplied (discharged) to the bottom surface of the substrate holder 1160. It is adapted to be discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161. It should be noted that the out-ball discharging section 1161 is located directly above the discharging-ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All of the game balls discharged from are passed through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The substrate holder 1160 also includes a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 that project forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are designed so that the tip ends are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520, and are fitted with the rear ends of the attachment bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. With the boss 1126 fitted, a predetermined screw is threaded from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126 to attach the substrate holder 1160 to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160 while being assembled.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, the board holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 to which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side, and a fixing portion 1163 at the rear end of the rear surface of the rear wall portion. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 is arranged so as to face the 1163, and has a locking portion 1164 that can be locked from the rear side. The fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 allow the main control substrate box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 whose rear side is opened, and a thin horizontally long box-shaped substrate base 1171 which covers the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 and is fitted into the inside of the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be fitted is provided, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals and the like mounted on the rear surface side is provided at the front end of the board cover 1171. In addition, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and is fixed to the fixing piece 1174 that fits into the fixing portion 1163 of the board holder 1160, and the right end of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the rear. An elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 is provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right and left ends in a rear view by sandwiching the elastic fixing pieces 1175, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing part 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the hermetic seal. A protective cover 1177 and a board management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same structure as the separating/cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is caulked and fixed at any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulked and fixed sealing portion 1176 so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. Has become. As a result, whether the main control board box 1170 has been opened improperly can be clearly discriminated visually from the outside.

Since the main control board box 1170 is provided with four sealing parts 1176 in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, in the main control board box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached over the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and the hermetic seal is cut when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated. It must be peeled off or peeled off, and even with this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened/closed, the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified, or the main control board 4100 is replaced with an unauthorized main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even so, it is possible to visually confirm it from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent acts from being performed.

Further, the main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-back direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like are exposed to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f exposed from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and hermetically sealed seal are cleverly worked, the pachinko machine 1 having a high crime prevention performance can be confirmed by visually observing whether the main control board 4100 has been tampered with or not. You can do it.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110, and the display unit 1181 disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side and the front component member 1110. And a rear protruding portion 1182 protruding rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 102A, the display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example displays a game state that changes depending on the game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view. A game state indicator 1183 for one LED and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game state indicator 1183 for displaying the number of holdings of the game balls to the first starting opening 2201. For the first special symbol memory display 1184, the first special symbol is the first special symbol result which is arranged on the right side of the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and is selected by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2201. The first special symbol display device 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying as, and a lottery by receiving the game ball into the second starting opening 2587b which is arranged diagonally right above the first special symbol display device 1185. From the second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result as the second special symbol, and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 It is provided with a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of holdings regarding the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2587b.

Further, in the display section 1181 of the function display unit 1180, a normal symbol storage display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the passage of the gate section 2585a by the game ball, and below the normal symbol storage display 1188. A normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for displaying the normal lottery result selected as a regular symbol by a game ball placed on the side by passing through the gate portion 2585a, and an oblique upper right of the normal symbol memory display 1188. When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like arranged side by side, the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening/closing patterns of the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509 is displayed. And a round display 1190 made up of two LEDs.

The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED whose red, green, and orange colors can be changed, and the color of the emitted light and the lighting and blinking. Depending on the combination, it is possible to display various game states (for example, probability variation state, time reduction state, probability variation short time state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.).

Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180, when the first special symbol can not be variably displayed in the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2201. In this case, the start of variable display is displayed as a hold number (memorized number) of the first special symbol that has been held (stored). This first special symbol memory display 1184 has two first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b consisting of a predetermined LED, by the lighting/flashing pattern of the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b, hold The number can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b. Lights together, when the number of reservations is three, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180, when the second special symbol can not be variably displayed in the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball was received in the second starting opening 2587b. In this case, the start of variable display is held (stored) and the number of held (memorized) second special symbols is displayed. This second special symbol memory display 1187 has two second special symbol memory lamps 1187, 1187b consisting of a predetermined LED, by the lighting/flashing pattern of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b, hold The number can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a, 1187b. Lights up together, when the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are both It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are the first special lottery selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after changing for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and is stopped by the light-emitting pattern (special pattern) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be recognized by the player.

Further, the normal symbol display device 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red/green/orange color LED that is capable of changing its luminescent color, and is a combination of luminescent color to be emitted and lighting/blinking. As a result, it is possible to display the normal lottery result that is drawn by the game balls passing through the gate portion 2585a. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 1189, like the special symbol, is changed and displayed for a predetermined time, and then is stopped and displayed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180, when the normal symbol can not be variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a, the start of variable display is suspended. The number of stored (memorized) ordinary symbols is displayed. This normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom depending on the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four variable display of the normal symbols are reserved (stored).

Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a two-round display lamp 1190a and a fifteen-round display lamp 1190b, each of which is composed of a predetermined LED. By turning on each lamp, the round in the "big hit" game is played. The number can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 102(A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. Moreover, the game state display 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol storage The display device 1188, the normal pattern display device 1189, and the round display device 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 153). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150, the function The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified and the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player or game The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by a clerk in the hall without any confusion.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 configured by 7-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are respectively configured by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display 1188 is configured by two LEDs.

In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as the above with this function display unit 1180, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol display device 1186 are configured by eight LED groups, so 7 Compared with the case of using the segment LED, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are difficult to understand, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming uncomfortable during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game. The game can be made more entertaining by devoting it to the movable effect and effect image.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1200 having a different form from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configurations as those described above, and detailed description thereof is omitted here. The game panel 1200 according to the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1150, and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

The panel plate 1210 of this game panel 1200 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or glass or metal. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1210 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if an obstacle nail is planted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1211 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. Equipped with. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 each having an indented front side at both ends of an upper side and a lower side thereof. The engagement step portion 1213 is notched to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 into the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, as will be described in detail later, the panel plate 1210 has a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500, and the front side with respect to the openings. The attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed (not shown).

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1150 made of a wooden board described above (in this example, approximately 20 mm) and made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1220 holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner, and has a holding step portion 1221 that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and inside the holding step portion 1221 is approximately the same size as the game area 1100. A through hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction is mainly provided.

The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is supposed to be on the same plane as. The front step inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to temperature changes and changes with time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be filled in the clearance.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with engaging claws 1224 and engaging pieces 1225 which engage with the engaging step 1213 at positions corresponding to the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and extends from the front surface of the holding step 1221 to the front side. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed between the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 and the panel. The plate 1210 is configured to extend a predetermined amount along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 toward the upper side (center side) in a state in which a predetermined gap having a size capable of inserting the engagement step 1213 is formed. By engaging the engaging step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claws 1224 and the engaging pieces 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. The boss insertion hole 1226 has a mounting boss for the front component member 1110. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned with respect to each other.

As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount in the front side so as to leave an outer peripheral edge below and slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 has a recessed shape above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height in a state in which the rear surface-side outer peripheral portion projects rearward, and the recessed amount ( Depth) is a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) capable of accommodating the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 114, etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 that is attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. It is desirable that the distance is between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010c can be prevented from projecting rearward of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be prevented from protruding. (Pachinko machine 1) can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228, which are arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and into which predetermined screws can be screwed, in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning projection formed on a member that is mounted and fixed by using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning projection that protrudes forward from a fixing portion 3010c formed on the front surface of the back box 3010 and formed in a flange shape (shown in the figure). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) as viewed from the rear.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a large diameter inner hole and a small diameter inner hole are mixed so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be fixedly mounted. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the lower end on the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height, and within the range, the panel holder 1220 has Since the front surface is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball emitted from the hitting ball launching device 650 is smoothly guided. It has become so. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a lightening portion 1230, so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, support them, and maintain the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-shaped rib is formed.

In addition, in this panel holder 1220, a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to a positioning means such as an obstacle nail implanting device (not shown) and an assembly jig is formed, and the obstacle nail implanting device holds the game panel 1150. It is possible to set it in the state of being. In addition, in the lower portion of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guiding surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and a lower end penetrating leftward in the front-rear direction in the front-rear direction and downward Is opened to the front passage 1112 of the front component 1110, and the ball passage notch 1123 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122, and the rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating the lower right corner of the front view in the front-rear direction. And an insertion hole 1234.

In addition, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) in which a rear surface side of the out port 1232 is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front and a lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 104 ). The member 1110 is provided with a notch portion 1236 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 and which is notched so as to penetrate from the right end in front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of attachment holes for attaching and fixing the panel holder 1220 to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out-ball discharge groove 1235 of the panel holder 1220 is provided on the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board placing portion 606 of the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to fit with the positioning protrusion 607 provided, and the outboard discharge groove 1235 fits with the positioning protrusion 607, so that the game board 4 relatively moves in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame 3. It is becoming regulated.

In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 and the engaging step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 on the panel holder 1220 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device without modifying the planting device, and suppress an increase in cost for planting the faulty nail. You can do it.

Although not shown in the figure, the game panel 1200 of this example is configured such that a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. In addition, the front unit 2000 can be attached. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thus, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit 2000 is supported, so that it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit 2000.

Further, since the game panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200 even if the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and it is a transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 is visible to the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 in which the positions of obstacle nails, winning holes and the like change depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained by only replacing the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, it is possible to make the panel holder 1220 a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of various members so as to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of previous component]
Next, a front component member 1110A having a different form from the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. It should be noted that the gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 106 and 108 have the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220, which are different from those in the embodiments of FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example of FIGS. 103 to 105 except for the above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 is different from the above-mentioned front component 1110 in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different, and it is not provided with a function display unit 1180. The points are very different. The other configurations are the same as those of the previous component member 1110, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using this front component member 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). Prepared for 2000).

As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending inward in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front with the out-port guide surface 1115 as a base point up to the stop portions 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out-port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a gentle arcuate shape is formed between the stopper portion 1114 and the right-hand certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged directly below the stopper portion 1114, and the lower end of the arcuate portion is provided with an outlet port. The portion up to the guide surface 1115 is formed in a linear shape inclined so as to decrease toward the out-port guide surface 1115.

The front component member 1110A of this example has a wider game area 1100 than the above-described front component member 1110, and the wide game region 1100 can make the player more entertaining. You can do it.

In the example of FIGS. 106 and 107, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A. You may make it attach the game panel 1150 which consists of one board as shown in 101.

[1-5. Security mechanism for pachinko machines]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 109 is a perspective view seen from the rear with the game board housed in the main body frame.

First, as shown in FIG. 108, the crime prevention structure on the pivotal support side of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a side surface on the pivotal support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcement unit 150 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the side-face crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and its vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 (1110A) of the game board 4 and the game panel 1150 are combined. The side-face crime prevention plate 950 includes a plate-shaped side plate piece 952a that extends in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end that extends from the front end of the side plate piece 952a to a substantially perpendicular direction inner side (open side). The piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending from the side plate piece 952a along the front end piece 952b so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and a substantially inward direction inward from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side surface security plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

Further, the side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The height of the main body frame 3 is increased, and the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like can be favorably supported.

On the other hand, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by using spot welding, rivets or the like, as described above, using a plurality of elongated metal plates. On the outer side of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft-supporting side, a shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross-section opening to the outside (shaft-supporting side) is provided. In the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 has a higher strength due to the shaft-supporting side U-shaped protruding piece 166, and the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. ..

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft supporting side is provided. If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main body frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, and the gap is generated. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side crime prevention plate 950. A rear piece of the substantially U-shaped shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is adapted to be inserted (entered), and the front end piece 952b is pivotally supported. It is configured to be sandwiched by the U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped protruding piece 166 of the shaft supporting side from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened and the main body frame. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 to the door 3.

Further, since the side surface crime prevention plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is reduced. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being easily distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Further, since the rear end of the side plate piece 952a of the side crime prevention plate 950 extends rearward of the game panel 1150 of the game board 4, the body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side plate piece 952a is temporarily assumed. Even if is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be penetrated from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150), and an illegal act is performed. Can be surely prevented. As shown in FIG. 108, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the side crime prevention plate 950 so as to cover the outside thereof, the pachinko machine 1 has a sturdy side surface, It is able to fully counter the vandalism of. In addition, generally, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it becomes almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the side plate piece 952c from the rear end, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 109, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 that houses the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full-tank branching unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear and side surfaces of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 can be replaced by the game board 4. It can be seen from the rear side of the body frame 3 without removing it from the body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found and an unauthorized act can be prevented. Further, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the unauthorized device, and the deterrence against the illegal action can be enhanced. ing.

Further, from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and therefore the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. Even when tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt are left between the main frame 3 and the game board 4 when the game board 4 is removed from and attached to the outside It is possible to easily find out from the above, and it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed composition of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 117. FIG. 110 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board as seen obliquely from the front right, and FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the oblique left front. Further, FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the main components constituting the game board disassembled and seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the main components constituting the game board disassembled and obliquely seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view of the game board cut at substantially the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, and FIG. 117 is a cross-sectional view of the game board cut at the center in the horizontal direction and viewed from the right side.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and when a player operates the handle device 500, a game ball (also simply referred to as a “sphere”) as a game medium is generated. A frame-shaped front component member 1110A that defines and forms the inner periphery of the game region 1100 to be driven, and a predetermined shape that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A so as to close the game region 1100 and in a position corresponding to the game region 1100. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1150 having a plurality of openings 1158 penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIGS. 114 and 115 and the like) and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100.

The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wooden plywood such as a plywood board.

In addition, the game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a back side of the back unit 3000 from the player side. A main liquid crystal display device 1900 that is visibly attached and can display a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a substrate holder 1160. And a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example is arranged in the lower part of the game area 1100 at the upper right of the out port 1151 when viewed from the front, and at the left side of the attacker unit 2100 immediately above the out port 1151. A starting opening unit 2200, a front side unit 2300 extending in an arc shape along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2200, and a function display unit 1180 attached to the front side unit 2300 and capable of displaying a game state. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area 1100.

Further, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is opened, and the rear wall 3010a is formed with an opening 3010b which penetrates the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the front-rear direction. A rear box 3010, a panel relay board 3020 attached to the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, a lamp drive board 3021, a motor drive board 3023, and a front lamp relay board 3025.

Further, the back unit 3000 is installed in the back box 3010 and has a sub-bottom middle rendering unit 3100 having a sub liquid crystal display device 3111, and a back-bottom left rendering unit 3200 and a back bottom left rendering unit 3200 mounted on both left and right sides of the back-bottom central rendering unit 3100. Lower right rendering unit 3300, back lower left rendering unit 3200, and ball discharging unit 3400 attached to the front of lower back right rendering unit 3300, rear rear rendering unit 3500 attached to the left and right sides inside back box 3010, respectively. The rear left production unit 3600 and the back right production unit 3700 respectively arranged on the front side of the rear effect unit 3500, and the back production unit 3800 attached to the front side of the back rear effect unit 3500 are provided.

Further, on the rear side of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board 4, peripheral control for accommodating a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 153) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150, which will be described later in detail. A board box 1910 is provided.

In the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a frame-shaped center role object 2500 is attached to the game panel 1150 so that the main liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the player in the approximate center of the game area 1100. There is. At least part of each of the left and right ends of the center accessory 2500 extends to the inner circumference of the game area 1100, and divides the game area 1100 into upper and lower parts. As will be described later in detail, the game ball hit into the game area 1100 can flow down on the left and right outer sides of the window portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. Then, in the game area 1100, an area on the upper left in a front view of the center accessory 2500 and an area from the lower side to the substantially center in the vertical direction on the left side are formed in a relatively wide area in which the game balls can flow. In this area, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

In the game board 4 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is driven toward the left side in front view, that is, the left route 1100L side of the highest part in the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of protrusions of the center accessory 2500 are made. The left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down between the parts 2512. Then, when entering the warp entrance 2503 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, a distribution member that distributes to either the warp exit 2505 side for supplying to the stage 2506 or the discharge opening 2508 side for returning to the game area 1100. It is supplied to the 2520 and distributed to either one. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel harassed and excited by paying attention to whether or not the game ball entering the warp entrance 2503 is distributed to the warp exit 2505 side (stage 2506 side) by the distribution member 2520. The player can entertain the movement of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the game balls are distributed to the warp exit 2505 side with high probability.

The game balls distributed to the warp exit 2505 side by the distribution member 2520 are supplied to the stage 2506. The game ball supplied to this stage 2506 is released into the game area 1100 after rolling on the stage 2506 in the left-right direction, and it is possible to entertain a movement different from the movement by the obstacle nail, and the chance exit of the stage 2506. When the game ball is released from 2506d into the game area 1100, it is possible to win the first start opening 2201 of the start opening unit 2200 with a high probability.

If the game ball hit to the left route 1100L side does not enter the warp entrance 2503, it enters the entrance 2507 and enters into the game area 1100 from the outlet 2508 below the distribution member 2520. Is released. The game ball that has been driven into the left route 1100L side of the game area 1100 and discharged from the discharge port 2508 of the center accessory 2500 is guided to the left-right center side of the game area 1100 by the left shelf 2302 of the front side unit 2300. There is a possibility of winning the general winning opening 2301 of the front side unit 2300.

On the other hand, when the game ball is driven toward the right side in front view, that is, the right route 1100R side with respect to the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and the inner periphery of the game area 1100. Through the narrow gap between the first starter unit 2580 and the attacker passage 2509a opened near the hitting portion 1114 of the front component 1110A, and is discharged directly above the gate portion 2585a of the second starting opening unit 2580. That is, by right-handing, the game ball can be passed through the gate portion 2585a with an extremely high probability.

Further, as will be described later in detail, when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a and is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the ordinary lottery result is drawn and executed in an extremely short time. If the result is “normal hit”, the door member 2589 rotates to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2587b, and the game ball that has entered the gate portion 2585a is won in the second starting port 2587b. be able to. If the ordinary lottery result is "ordinary loss", the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a flows down the front surface of the door member 2589 that closes the second starting opening 2587b and the guide member 2584 causes the game ball to move to the first position in the attacker unit 2100. It is released to the big winning hole 2102 side. Therefore, a game can be played by directly hitting the second starting opening 2587b and the first special winning opening 2102.

Further, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 2201 or the second starting opening 2587b, a special lottery result is drawn, and a special advantageous game state in which a player such as a jackpot game is advantageous is generated. When is selected by lottery, the first special winning opening 2102 and the second special winning opening 2509 arranged in the attacker passage 2509a can receive game balls in a predetermined pattern. Then, when the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509 becomes available, by hitting the right, there is a very high probability that the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509 has a game ball. Can be awarded.

As described above, in the game board 4 of the present embodiment, it is possible to play different impressions on the right side and the left side of the center accessory 2500, and it is possible to provide a variety of games and prevent them from getting bored. You can

[2-1. Overall structure of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the table unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the table unit of the game board seen from the back.

The table unit 2000 on the game board 4 includes an attacker unit 2100 which is disposed on the upper right side of the outlet 1151 at the lower center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and in the left-right direction of the game area 1100. A starting opening unit 2200 arranged in the center immediately above the out opening 1151 and attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a front side extending in an arc shape substantially along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 arranged on the left side of the starting opening unit 2200. A unit 2300, a function display unit 1180 attached to the front surface of the front side unit 2300 at substantially the center in the up-down direction, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 disposed at substantially the center of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150. , Are provided.

The attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is a general winning opening 2101 capable of always accepting a game ball driven into the game area 1100, and a first winning prize as a variable winning opening arranged below the general winning opening 2101. The winning port 2102 is provided. Although the details of the first big winning opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 will be described later, the game balls can be accepted in accordance with the special lottery result obtained by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. It will be possible.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the attacker unit 2100 is provided with a first starting opening 2201a which is always capable of accepting a game ball driven into the game area 1100, on the upper right side of the first special winning opening 2102. (Not shown in FIGS. 118 and 119). Further, a sensor (not shown) similar to the first starting port sensor 3422 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting port 2201 as described later is also provided in the first starting port 2201a. As described above, the game ball that has been hit to the right and passed through the gate portion 2585a flows down the front surface of the door member 2589 and is guided by the guide member 2584 of the attacker unit 2100 when it is not received in the second starting opening 2587b. Although it is discharged to the first big winning opening 2102 side, the first starting opening 2201a is arranged at a position where such a game ball can be received before reaching the first big winning opening 2102. As a more detailed arrangement position, the game balls released to the first big winning opening 2102 side by the guide member 2584 are the first starting opening 2201a at a predetermined entrance ratio (for example, about 1/20 to 1/5). It is preferable that the position is such that the ball enters.

In this way, the first starting opening 2201a is arranged on the flow path of the game ball that can enter the second starting opening 2587b, so that the player can play the big hit game or the advantageous state (high probability time saving state described later). When right-handing is performed, in a mode that does not require special game technology, and in a mode that cannot avoid entering the ball (in other words, a mode in which the player cannot select the recipient of the game ball). , The first starting opening 2201a is characterized in that a game ball is received. In addition, the processing (for example, paying out three prize balls for each one ball entered, executing a first special lottery, etc.) is performed by accepting game balls into the first starting port 2201a. Since it is the same as the case of accepting the game ball into 2201, the description thereof will be omitted hereinafter by the processing relating to the first starting port 2201 unless otherwise mentioned.

Further, the situation in which the game ball is expected to enter the first starting opening 2201a is a game state in which the game is played by right-handing, and specifically, during a big hit game and an advantageous state (a time saving state described later). ). In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in other normal game states (non-time saving state to be described later), the majority of the game balls hit the game ball with a strength that does not reach the right side of the center accessory 2500. The operation (so-called “left hit” or “top hit”) is recommended, and the game progresses by inserting the game ball into the first starting opening 2201. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to expect the game ball to be received into the first starting opening 2201a by hitting the right side even in the normal game state, but "left hitting" and "heaven" It is not preferable from the viewpoint of game specification that it is easier to enter the game ball into the first starting opening 2201a by "right hitting" than entering the game ball into the first starting opening 2201 by "hitting". More specifically, if the entry rate of the first starting opening 2201a due to "right hitting" becomes too high, it is more advantageous for the player to play right hitting in the normal game state, as the game progresses more advantageously. As a result, the original driving operation of the gaming machine may not be protected. Therefore, the arrangement of the first starting opening 2201a is not determined based on only the "predetermined ball entry ratio" described above, and the game progress recommended in the normal game state ("left hit" or "top hit") It is desirable to consider so that the entry rate of the game ball to the first starting opening 2201a by "right hitting" is lower than the entry rate of the game ball to the first starting opening 2201. By arranging the first starting opening 2201a so as to satisfy such a condition, the player is allowed to protect the original playing method of the pachinko machine 1 that right-handing is recommended only during a big hit game and in an advantageous state. be able to.

Further, the starting port unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 has a first starting port 2201 which opens upward and can always receive a game ball, which will be described later in detail. The first starting opening 2201 is disposed substantially in the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and directly below the chance outlet 2506d on the stage 2506 of the center accessory 2500, and the probability that the game ball emitted from the chance outlet 2506d is high is high. Can be accepted at.

Further, the front side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, has three general winning openings 2301 capable of always accepting game balls. Further, the front side unit 2300 is provided with a left shelf 2302 for guiding the game ball toward the center side on the upper surface of the function display bonnet 2307 to which the function display unit 1180 is attached.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a large opening 1158 formed substantially in the center of the game panel 1150, and the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side. Etc. are formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be visually recognized from the player side. In this center accessory 2500, a peripheral wall portion 2502 that prevents game balls from entering the frame, a warp inlet 2503 opened at a predetermined position on the left outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2502 in front view, and a warp inlet 2503 are entered. Within the game area 1100 after rolling the game ball discharged from the warp passage 2504, the warp outlet 2505 capable of discharging the game ball flowing through the warp passage 2504, and the warp outlet 2505 And a distribution member 2520 that distributes the game balls that have entered the warp entrance 2503 to either the warp exit 2505 side or the discharge opening 2508 side that discharges into the game area 1100. There is.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is an attacker passage 2509a which is open to the right outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2502 when viewed from the front and through which game balls can circulate, and a second big winning opening 2509 which is arranged in the attacker passage 2509a and serves as a variable winning opening. , A gate portion 2585a which is arranged immediately below the downstream end of the attacker passage 2509a and which can detect passage of a game ball, and a second starting opening 2587b which is arranged directly below the gate portion 2585a and serves as a variable winning opening. The second starting port 2587b of the center accessory 2500 can receive the game ball according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2585a. In addition, the second winning hole 2509 of the center accessory 2500 can receive a game ball according to a special lottery result selected by receiving a game ball into the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b. .. Further, in the second big winning opening 2509, a specific area 2509b as a special winning opening is provided. In the specific area 2509b, a specific count sensor 2578a attached to the unit base 2571 and capable of detecting the game ball received in the specific area 2509b, and a specific area 2509b attached above the specific count sensor 2578a and moved in the horizontal direction. A movable piece 2578b capable of adjusting the acceptance of the game ball into is arranged. Details of the specific area 2509b will be described later in [2-5] with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148, FIG. 180, and the like.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 132. 120 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed on the right side of the lower left-right center of the game panel 1150, and then the game panel 1150. Is fixed to the front of the. The attacker unit 2100 includes a general winning opening 2101 in which a game ball driven into the game area 1100 can be received, and a first big winning opening 2102 arranged below the general winning opening 2101. .. The first special winning opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally elongated plate-like opening/closing member 2104 described later.

As shown in the drawing, the general winning opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is in a state where it can always receive the game ball. The first big winning opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 is a horizontally long rectangular shape which is 4 to 6 times as long as the diameter of the game ball in the front-to-left direction and slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball in the vertical direction. The opening is opened by a plate-shaped opening/closing member 2104. The opening/closing member 2104 of the first special winning opening 2102 is rotatable around the lower side as a rotation axis. When the opening/closing member 2104 is in a substantially vertical state, it is impossible to receive a game ball, and the opening/closing member 2104 is substantially closed. In the horizontal state, it is possible to receive the game balls, which is a so-called variable winning port.

The attacker unit 2100 of this embodiment will be described in more detail. The attacker unit 2100 is attached to the top of the horizontally long plate-shaped base plate 2104a, the base plate 2104a, which is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150 and penetrates the first big winning port 2102, and constitutes the general winning port 2101. An attacker base 2104 having a box-shaped receiving portion 2104b that projects forward from the front surface and is open at the top and the rear, and a trough portion 2104c that can direct the game ball from the lower rear end of the receiving portion 2104b to the rear, and an attacker. The base 2104 is provided with a horizontally elongated plate-shaped opening/closing member 2104 capable of closing the first special winning opening 2102 opened in the base plate 2104a. The gutter portion 2103c of the attacker base 2103 can transfer the game ball received in the general winning opening 2101 to the ball discharging unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 described later.

The opening/closing member 2104 includes a shaft portion 2103a that extends outward from the lower portions of the left and right ends, and an action pin 2103b that extends rightward from a position diagonally below and below the shaft portion 2103a at the right end in front view. .. The opening/closing member 2104 can open and close the first special winning opening 2102 by the shaft portion 2103a being rotatably supported by the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 described later.

In addition, the attacker unit 2100 includes a pair of upper bearing portions 2105a capable of supporting the shaft portion 2104a of the opening/closing member 2104, a horizontally elongated box-shaped upper accommodation portion 2105b corresponding to the first special winning opening 2102, the front and lower portions of which are open. And, on the rear side of the accommodation portion 2105b, there is a through hole upper portion 2105c which is formed substantially immediately below the trough portion 2103c of the attacker base 2103 and vertically penetrates through which a game ball can pass, and a base plate 2104a of the attacker base 2104. An upper case 2105 attached to the rear side is provided.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 faces a pair of lower bearing portions 2106a that rotatably supports the shaft portion 2104a of the opening/closing member 2104 in cooperation with the upper bearing portion 2105a of the upper case 2105 and the upper accommodation portion 2105b of the upper case 2105. Then, a horizontally elongated box-shaped lower housing portion 2106b, which is open to the front and the upper side, a lower through hole 2106c that communicates with the upper through hole 2105c of the upper case 2105 on the rear side of the lower housing portion 2106b and allows the game ball to pass therethrough in the vertical direction, Also, a through hole 2106d which vertically penetrates the bottom wall of the accommodation portion lower 2106b at a position on the left side of the passage hole lower 2106c in the front view and allows a game ball to pass therethrough, is combined with the upper case 2105 from the lower side and the attacker. The base 2104 includes a lower case 2106 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2104a. The lower case 2106 is inclined so that the bottom wall of the lower housing portion 2106b is lowered toward the through hole 2106d.

By combining the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, the shaft portion 2104a of the opening/closing member 2104 can be rotatably supported by the upper bearing portion 2105a and the lower bearing portion 2106a, and the opening/closing member 2104 can be supported. The first special winning opening 2102 can be opened and closed by rotating. In addition, the upper housing 2105b and the lower housing 2106 of the upper housing portion 2105b and the lower housing portion 2106b can form a space in which a game ball can be stored behind the first special winning opening 2102 and penetrate the stored game ball. It can be discharged downward through the hole 2106d. Note that the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 are formed of a light-transmitting material.

Further, the attacker unit 2100 has a plunger 2107a which is sandwiched by an upper case 2105 and a lower case 2106 and is capable of advancing and retreating in the left-right direction. And a link member 2108 for rotating the member 2104. The first attacker solenoid 2107 is disposed on the right side in front view of the upper passage hole 2105c and the lower passage hole 2106c so that the plunger 2107a advances and retracts from the right end.

Further, the link member 2108 is arranged near the tip of the plunger 2107a that moves forward and backward of the first attacker unit 2107, and is rotatably supported by the upper case 2105 and the lower case 2106 with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The shaft 2108a, an engaged portion 2108b arranged at a position eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 2108a, integrally rotated with the rotating shaft 2108a, and engaged with the tip of the plunger 2107a, and an engaged portion 2108b. And a pair of actuating pins 2108c which are arranged at positions different from those of the above and are eccentric from the axis of the rotating shaft 2108a and which are integrally rotated with the rotating shaft 2108a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The pair of operating pins 2108c of the link member 2108 extend forward, and the operating pin 2104b of the opening/closing member 2104 is located between the pair of operating pins 2108c when the attacker unit 2100 is assembled.

Also, the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the lower surface of the lower case 2106, receives a game ball that has passed through the through hole 2106d, and then discharges downwardly behind the through hole 2106d, and a passage member 2109 and an upper case 2105. A preliminary sensor 2110 mounted on the upper surface just above the passage hole 2105c and capable of detecting a game ball, and a first count for detecting a game ball mounted on the through hole 2106d of the lower case 2106 and received in the first big winning opening 2102. And a sensor 2111.

In the present embodiment, the game ball is not supplied to the spare sensor 2110 of the attacker unit 2100.

Further, a transparent substrate cover 2112 attached to the rear surface of the base plate 2103a of the attacker base 2103 so as to straddle the rear side of the attacker unit 2100, the upper case 2105, and the lower case 2106, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2112. And a first special winning opening decoration substrate 2113 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, a first attacker solenoid 2107, a preliminary sensor 2110, a first count sensor 2111, and a panel relay substrate 3020 which are attached to the upper surface of the upper case 2105. And an attacker unit relay terminal plate 2114 for relaying the connection of the above. The first special winning opening decoration substrate 2113 is connected to the lamp driving substrate 3021 of the back unit 3000.

In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, in a normal state, the plunger 2107a of the first attacker solenoid 2107 is extended. In this state, the action pin 2104b of the opening/closing member 2104 is pushed downward by one actuating pin 2108c of the link member 2108, and the plate-like opening/closing member 2104 is upright so that the first big winning opening 2102 It is in a closed state.

From this normal state, when the first attacker solenoid 2107 is energized by a big hit game or the like, the plunger 2107a moves to the left in the front view and becomes immersed. When the plunger 2107a moves to the left when viewed from the front, the linked member 2108 is engaged with the tip end of the plunger 2107a and the engaged portion 2108b of the link member 2108 causes the link member 2108 to center around the axis of the rotation shaft 2108a. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. When the link member 2108 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front, the pair of operating pins 2108c of the link member 2108 revolves in the direction of rising, and the operating pin 2104b of the opening/closing member 2104 rises as the operating pin 2108c moves up. The shaft 2104a rotates in the direction. As a result, the opening/closing member 2104 rotates about the shaft portion 2104a so that its upper side moves forward, and the game ball can be received in the first special winning opening 2102.

In addition, the attacker unit 2100 can cause the LED provided on the first special winning opening decoration substrate 2113 to emit light, so that the first special winning opening 2102 can be illuminated and decorated together with the translucent opening/closing member 2104.

[2-3. Starter unit]
Subsequently, the starting opening unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the starting opening unit of the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 125 is a perspective view of the starting opening unit of the front unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the starting opening unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the starting opening unit disassembled and seen from the rear. As shown in the figure, the starting opening unit 2200 of the present example is arranged directly above the out opening 1151 at the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction, and is capable of receiving a constant game ball that opens upward. A mouth 2201 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the starting port unit 2200 of this example is a plate-shaped starting port base 2202 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the starting port base 2202 and swells to the front to start first. The opening bonnet 2203 in which the opening 2201 is arranged, the translucent lens member 2204 attached to the rear side of the starting opening base 2202, and the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side of the lens member 2204. A first starting opening decoration substrate 2205, a cylindrical reflector 2206 arranged between the first starting opening decoration substrate 2205 and the starting opening bonnet 2203 and extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear side of the first starting opening decoration substrate 2205. And a substrate cover 2207 attached to the rear side of the lens member 2204.

The starting opening base 2202 of the starting opening unit 2200 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface and a plated layer having metallic luster. Further, the starting opening base 2202 penetrates in the front-rear direction at a substantially central position and allows the reflector 2206 to pass therethrough, and penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position outside the starting opening bonnet 2203 in a front view to face the lens member 2204. And a plurality of openings 2202b.

Further, the starting opening bonnet 2203 of the starting opening unit 2200 is formed in a box shape having an open rear side, and has a predetermined decoration on the front surface. Further, the starting opening bonnet 2203 is provided with a box-shaped receiving portion 2203a which forms the first starting opening 2201 and is opened upward and backward at the top. The starting opening bonnet 2203 is entirely formed of a light-transmissive material, and a plating layer having a metallic luster is formed on a portion of the front surface below the receiving portion 2203a except a substantial center thereof. There is.

The lens member 2204 of the starting opening unit 2200 has a trough portion 2204a formed at the upper end for guiding the game ball received in the first starting opening 2201 backward, and an insertion hole 2202a of the starting opening base 2202 below the trough portion 2204a. An insertion hole 2204b penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the reflector 2206 can pass therethrough and a decorative portion 2204c that bulges forward and faces the player side from the opening 2202b of the starting port base 2202. The lens member 2204 can guide light from the LED provided near the outer periphery of the first starting opening decoration substrate 2205 to lighten and decorate the openings 2202b of the starting opening base 2202 and the side surface of the starting opening bonnet 2203.

The reflector 2206 of the starting opening unit 2200 is made of a material having a low light-transmitting property, and is attached to the rear surface of the lens member 2204. The reflector 2206 can prevent the light from the LED provided near the center of the first starting opening decoration board 2205 from leaking to the outside, and is provided near the outer circumference of the first starting opening decoration board 2205. The light from the LED can be prevented from leaking inward, and only the center of the front surface of the starting opening hood 2203 can be illuminated and decorated.

When the game ball is received in the receiving portion 2203a of the starting opening bonnet 2203 forming the first starting opening 2201, the starting opening unit 2200 of the present embodiment causes the trough portion 2204a in the lens member 2204 on the rear side from the starting opening bonnet 2203 to move. It can be delivered to the ball discharging unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

[2-4. Front side unit]
Next, the table side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. 128A is a perspective view of the front side unit of the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 128B is a perspective view of the front side unit of the front unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the front side unit disassembled as seen from the front, and FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the front side unit disassembled as seen from the rear.

The front side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1150, at a position lower than the center in the up-down direction, and the inner circumference of the game area 1100. It is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 so as to be in contact with (the right side surface of the inner rail 1112 when viewed from the front). The front side unit 2300 has an outer shape in a front view formed in an arc shape along the inner circumference of the game area 1100.

The front side unit 2300 of the present embodiment is capable of always accepting game balls and arranged in an arc shape along the inner circumference of the game area 1100, and has three general winning openings 2301 and the front of the three general winning openings 2301. The left shelf 2302, on which the gaming balls that are arranged on the left side and on the upper side and inclined on the lower side on the right side can roll, and the two general winning openings 2301 near the left-right center of the game area 1100, are arranged on the right side. The right shelf 2303 is provided with which the gaming ball inclined so as to be lowered can roll.

Further, the front side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and has a front side base 2304 having three general winning openings 2301 formed in an arc shape as a whole, and a front side arranged on the rear side of the front side base 2304. Front side decorative substrate 2305 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a substrate cover 2306 that covers the rear side of the front side decorative substrate 2305 and is attached to the rear side of the front side base 2304, and the front side of the uppermost general winning opening 2301. A shallow box-shaped function display bonnet 2307, which is attached to the front surface of the front side base 2304 on the left side and the upper side of the view and whose rear side is open, is provided. In the front side unit 2300 of this embodiment, the function display board 1191 is attached to the rear side of the function display bonnet 2307.

The front side bases 2304 of the front side unit 2300 respectively project forward and are arranged below the upper center 2304a which forms one general winning opening 2301 and is disposed slightly downward from the substantially vertical center. The lower receiving portion 2304b which is disposed on the side and forms the two general winning openings 2301 and the rear receiving portions 2304a and the lower receiving portion 2304b which extend rearward respectively and play back the game balls received in the respective general winning opening 2301 And a gutter part 2304c for guiding to. The upper receiving portion 2304a is formed so that one general winning opening 2301 opens upward. The lower receiving portion 2304c is formed such that the general winning opening 2301 on the side closer to the upper receiving portion 2304a in a front view is formed to open diagonally to the upper left, and the general winning opening 2301 on the side far from the upper receiving portion 2304a, It is formed so as to open to the right. Further, the upper surface of the lower receiving portion 2304c is inclined so that the right side becomes lower, and is a right shelf portion 2303 that can guide the game ball.

Further, the front side base 2304 includes a fan-shaped frame-shaped bonnet mounting portion 2304d for mounting the function display bonnet 2307 on the left side of the upper receiving portion 2304a when viewed from the front. The front side base 2304 is provided with a predetermined translucent decoration on the front surface excluding the bonnet mounting portion 2304d.

The function display bonnet 2307 of the front side unit 2300 is formed in a fan shape having a circular arc along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 in a front view, and the upper surface inclined so that the right side becomes lower is the left shelf 2302. Has been done. Further, the function display bonnet 2307 has a plurality of openings 2307a corresponding to the plurality of LEDs mounted on the function display substrate 1191 on the front surface. Although not shown in detail, the function display bonnet 2307 extends rearward so as to surround each opening 2307a on the rear side, and the light from the LED of the function display substrate 1191 corresponding to one opening 2307a is emitted to the other side. It is provided with a reflector piece that prevents leakage into the opening 2307a. In this embodiment, the function display substrate 1191 and the function display bonnet 2307 constitute a function display unit 1180.

The front side unit 2300 of the present embodiment has the left side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 1100, more specifically, the game ball discharged from the discharge port 2508 and flowing down by the left shelf 2302 and the right shelf 2303. It is possible to guide in the direction (center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction). The front side unit 2300 sends the game balls received in the three general winning openings 2301 of the front side unit 2300 to the rear side of the game panel 1150 by the respective gutters 2304c, and the balls of the back unit 3000 described later. It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3400.

[2-5. Center goods]
Subsequently, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 148. 131 is a front view of the center accessory of the front unit, FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled into the main members and seen from behind. is there. Further, FIG. 136 is a perspective view of the distribution member of the center character seen from the front, and FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the distribution member of the center character viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 138 is a front sectional view showing the left route of the center accessory along with a part of the warp passage. FIG. 139 is a perspective view showing the lower warp passage member and the stage member in the center accessory. Also, FIG. 140(a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit of the center accessory as seen from the front, and FIG. 140(b) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the second attacker unit of the center character as seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the second attacker unit of the center character as disassembled and seen from the rear. is there.

Further, FIG. 143(a) is a perspective view of the second starting opening unit of the center accessory as seen from the front, and FIG. 143(b) is a perspective view of the second starting opening unit of the center accessory as seen from the rear. Also, FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the second starting opening unit of the center accessory as seen from the front, and FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the second starting opening unit of the center accessory as seen from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 146(a) is a front sectional view showing the right route in the center accessory, and FIG. 146(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). Further, FIG. 147(a) is an enlarged front sectional view showing an essential part of the right route when the second starting opening of the center accessory is in an open state, and FIG. 147(b) is the second starting opening in (a). FIG. 4 is a side sectional view taken along the line. Further, FIGS. 148(a) and 148(b) are front sectional views showing enlarged main parts of the right route when the second special winning opening in the center accessory is in the open state. FIG. 148(a) shows a case where the game ball cannot enter the specific area 2509b, and FIG. 148(b) shows a case where the game ball enters the specific area 2509b.

The center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 that penetrates substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is then attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. The game area 1100 can be divided into upper and lower parts by attaching to. As shown in FIG. 110 and the like, this center accessory 2500 is provided with a window portion 2501 whose rear side can be visually recognized from the player side, and the window portion 2501 forms an entire frame shape.

The center accessory 2500 bulges forward from the game panel 1150 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1150, and a peripheral wall portion 2502 capable of preventing a game ball from entering the window portion 2501 and a front surface of the peripheral wall portion 2502. A warp entrance 2503 that opens to the outer peripheral surface on the left side where game balls can enter, a warp passage 2504 in which game balls that enter the warp entrance 2503 can flow, and a game ball that has flowed in the warp passage 2504 can be discharged to the peripheral wall portion. Only the warp outlet 2505 opening to the inner peripheral surface (inside the window portion 2501) of 2502 and the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 are supplied and are arranged at the lower part of the window portion 2501 to supply the supplied game ball. It is provided with a stage 2506 for rolling back and releasing it into the game area 1100.

The stage 2506 of the center accessory 2500 has a warp outlet 2505 arranged at the left end when viewed from the front and a first stage 2506a which is curved in the left-right direction and is capable of discharging a game ball forward, and the front side of the first stage 2506a. The second stage 2506b, which is arranged on the lower side and extends in the left-right direction in a curved shape so that the game ball can be discharged into the front game area 1100, corresponds to the position directly above the first starting port 2201 of the first stage 2506a. A chance entrance 2506c which is opened to a position where a game ball can enter, and a game ball which has entered the chance entrance 2506c is discharged into the game area 1100 and directly above the first starting opening 2201 on the front side and the lower side of the second stage 2506b. A chance exit 2506d opened at a corresponding position.

The first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b of the stage 2506 have a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and the positions corresponding to directly above the first starting port 2201, that is, the center role object 2500 is attached to the game panel 1150. In such a state, the substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape so as to be slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. Further, the lowest part of the first stage 2506a is formed to be outside in the left-right direction with respect to the lowest part of the second stage 2506b.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 139 and the like, the stage 2506 is provided with a plurality of guide portions 2506e which are arranged at predetermined positions of the first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b and are inclined so as to become lower toward the front, and the first stage 2506a. And a bank portion 2506f which is arranged at the front end of the second stage 2506b excluding the portion where the guide portion 2506e is arranged and which projects upward. The guide portion 2506e of the stage 2506 is provided at a position corresponding to the lowest position of the first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b and directly above the first starting port 2201 on the second stage 2506b.

In this center accessory 2500, the outer peripheral shape of the upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502 is in the game area 1100 from the position closer to the left than the center in the left-right direction in front view to the position corresponding to the stop portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A. It is formed in an arc shape along the inner circumference, and on the left side of the part formed in the arc shape, it is recessed downward by a predetermined distance, and is formed in an inclined shape so that it becomes lower toward the left. .. As a result, the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 through the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 of the front component member 1110A passes through the peripheral wall portion 2502 on the left side of the window portion 2501 when viewed from the front. Either 1100L or a right route 1100R passing through the window 2501 on the right side in front view is circulated.

Further, as shown in the figure, the center accessory 2500 has a part of both left and right ends extending to the inner circumference of the game area 1100, near the inner circumference of the game area 1100 on the left side in front view of the warp entrance 2503, and on the downstream side. Entrance 2507 that is open to the entrance, a game ball that entered the entrance 2507 is released into the game area 1100, and an exit 2508 that is opened to a position below the sorting member 2520 described later, and the window part 2501 on the right side in front view. At the upper part of the peripheral wall portion 2502, the game ball is guided from the right end of the arc-shaped portion along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to the upstream side of the attacker unit 2100, and the second major winning opening 2509 (see FIG. 146, etc.) in the passage. The attacker passage 2509a in which the reference) is arranged. As a result, the game ball hit in the game area 1100 flows in the center accessory 2500 regardless of whether the game route is in the left route 1100L or the right route 1100R.

As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the center accessory 2500 has a frame-like shape that is attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side and includes a part of the peripheral wall portion 2502 and forms the rear wall of the warp passage 2504. A center base 2510, a distribution member 2520 mounted in the warp passage 2504 on the front surface of the center base 2510, a left passage cover 2530 that covers the front side of the distribution member 2520 and forms a front wall of the warp passage 2504, and a distribution member. A left passage rear cover 2540 attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 at a position behind the 2520 and capable of guiding a game ball, and a warp passage 2504 attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 downstream of the distribution member 2520. A lower warp passage member 2550 having a warp outlet 2505 and forming a part thereof, and a stage member 2560 having a stage 2506 attached to the rear side of the lower side of the center base 2510 are provided.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a second attacker unit 2570 attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 on the right side in a front view, and a second starter disposed below the second attacker unit 2570 and attached to the lower end of the right side of the center base 2510. The mouth unit 2580, a right passage cover upper 2600 that is attached to the front side of the right side of the center base 2510 when viewed from the front, and can cover a part of the second attacker unit 2570, and is arranged below the right passage cover 2600 and the center base. A right passage cover lower portion 2605 which is attached to the front surface of 2510 and can cover a part of each of the second attacker unit 2570 and the second starting port unit 2580, and is attached to the rear side of the second attacker unit 2570 to emit light forward. A center right light emitting unit 2610 capable of irradiation and a branch sensor 2620 attached to the center base 2510 from the rear side are provided.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is mounted on the rear side of the center base 2510 on the upper side of the distribution member 2520 and has a cylindrical reflector 2630 extending in the front-rear direction. A center left decorative substrate 2632 that is arranged and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, a center left substrate cover 2634 that covers the rear side of the center left decorative substrate 2632 and is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510, a center base 2510 and a reflector 2630. And a magnetic detection sensor 2636 that is sandwiched between and and can detect magnetism. The center left decorative substrate 2632 and the center left substrate cover 2634 are formed with holes through which the rear ends of the reflectors 2630 can be inserted.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the second attacker unit 2570 when viewed from the front, and a center right light emission decoration unit 2640 capable of light emission decoration, a center right light emission decoration unit 2640, and A transparent plate-shaped protective cover 2650 that is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 and prevents the game balls from entering the rear side through the window 2501 and irradiates light toward the left side surface of the protective cover 2650 when viewed from the front. A protective cover left decorative substrate 2652 having a plurality of possible LEDs mounted thereon and extending in a plate shape in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction, and a substrate cover that holds the rear end of the protective cover left decorative substrate 2652 and is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510. 2654, and.

Further, the center accessory 2500 includes an on-center production unit 2660 that is attached to the upper part of the frame on the front side of the center base 2510, is decorated with a logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and is movable according to the gaming state. ..

Next, each member constituting the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail. The center base 2510 of the center accessory 2500 has a peripheral wall portion 2502 that bulges forward of the game panel 1150, and is arranged substantially in the entire circumference except for a portion where the stage member 2560 on the lower side is attached. Further, the center base 2510 is formed in a plate shape whose lower side to which the stage member 2560 is attached is along the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the chance outlet 2506d is opened at a position corresponding to immediately above the first starting opening 2201. There is.

The center base 2510 of the present embodiment forms the rear wall of the passage from the warp inlet 2503 to the distribution member 2520 in the warp passage 2504, and extends in the up-down direction along the left end of the window portion 2501 in front view and is recessed rearward. The recess 2510a, the plate-shaped left extension 2510b extending leftward from the left end of the passage recess 2510a, the left extension 2510b and the passage recess 2510a are formed on the lower side and are horizontally long and recessed rearward. A distribution space recess 2510c to which the distribution member 2520 is attached, a right opening 2510d that opens downward to the bottom of the right end of the distribution space recess 2510c in a front view and allows a game ball to pass, and a distribution larger than the right opening 2510d. A left opening 2510e that opens rearward is provided at a position on the left side of the center of the space recess 2510c in the left-right direction.

Further, the center base 2510 has a shelf portion 2510f that extends in a plate shape from the upper end of the left extension portion 2510b to the front and is inclined so that the left end is low, and below the left end of the shelf portion 2510f and above the distribution space recess 2510c. A passage opening 2510g through which the game ball can pass through the left extending portion 2510b in the front-rear direction at the position of, and a guide piece 2510h that extends forward from the lower end of the passage opening 2510g and becomes lower toward the rear, The left extension 2510b is provided with a passage hole 2510i penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position below the shelf 2510f and through which the reflector 2630 can pass.

Further, the center base 2510 is provided with a plate-like passage wall 2510j which forms a part of the peripheral wall portion 2502 on the right side of the window portion 2501 when viewed from the front and forms an attacker passage 2509a through which game balls can flow, and which extends forward. ing. As shown in detail in FIG. 146 and the like, this center base 2510 guides the game ball flowing rightward in a front view along the upper arc-shaped portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502 and cranks it by the passage wall 2510j. The formed branch entry passage 2510k, a branch space 2510l having a predetermined width formed by a passage wall 2510j, which communicates with the lower end of the branch entry passage 2510k, and a branch sensor 2620 is disposed immediately below the lower end of the branch entry passage 2510k. A communication passage 2510m which is formed by a passage wall 2510j and extends in a substantially arc shape for guiding the game ball downward and communicates with the lower end of the communication passage 2510m and the lower end communicates with the inside of the game area 1100. The second special winning opening 2509 is arranged and a second attacker space 2510n having a predetermined area formed by the passage wall 2510j.

In addition, the center base 2510 communicates with the upper part of the second attacker space 2510n, and the lower end communicates with the inside of the game area 1100 through the left side of the second attacker space 2510n when viewed from the front, and the game ball formed by the passage wall 2510j flows. A possible bypass passage 2510o and a part of the inner wall of the second attacker space 2510n are formed, and a guide portion 2510p that guides the game balls flowing through the communication passage 2510m that is inclined toward the second special winning opening 2509 and becomes lower. When viewed from the front, the right end forms the upper end of the second special winning opening 2509, the left end forms the inlet end of the bypass passage 2510o, and the inclined part 2510q is inclined so that the right end side becomes lower, and below the inclined part 2510q. It is provided with an insertion hole 2510r which penetrates in the front-rear direction and in which a part of the second attacker unit 2570 is inserted from the rear side. The guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510 is formed such that the extension line of the inclined surface passes through the second special winning opening 2509.

Further, the center base 2510 is a plate-like upward extension that extends outward along the front surface of the game panel 1150 from the rear end of the portion recessed downward from the center in the left-right direction in front view in the upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 2502. A projecting part 2511, a plurality of (three in this example) projecting parts 2512 projecting forward from the upper extending part 2511, and a center where a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side of the upper extending part 2511. An upper left decoration substrate 2513 and a substrate cover 2514 that covers the rear side of the center upper left decoration substrate 2513 and is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 are provided.

The distribution member 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is attached to the distribution space recess 2510c of the center base 2510, and the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2503 is placed on either the warp outlet 2505 side or the discharge outlet 2508 side. It is to distribute. As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, this distributing member 2520 extends in the left-right direction and is curved so that the center in the left-right direction becomes low, and the rolling surface 2521 on which the game ball can roll, and the rolling surface 2521. Of the fan-shaped discharge part 2522 which is arranged at the lowest position of the discharge part and spreads rearward in the left-right direction and which is lowered, and a ridge part 2523 which is arranged on the rear side and the lower side of the discharge part 2522 and extends in the front-rear direction, A guide surface 2524 capable of guiding the game ball by extending obliquely downward from the left and right sides of the ridge portion 2523, and a protrusion 2525 protruding upward from a portion excluding the discharge portion 2522 at the rear end of the rolling surface 2521. , Are provided.

The rolling surface 2521 extending in the left-right direction of the distribution member 2520 is formed so that the position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction in front view becomes the lowest. Further, the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520 is formed such that the right side in front view has a larger inclination angle from the horizontal than the left side with respect to the lowest portion.

The left passage cover 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is disposed in front of the passage recess 2510a of the center base 2510, forms the upper front side of the warp inlet 2503 and the warp passage 2504, and has a light-transmitting upper warp passage cover 2531. A guide passage cover 2532 having a light-transmitting property, which is arranged apart from the warp passage cover 2531 to the left in a front view and guides the entrance 2507 and the game ball entering the entrance 2507 to the guide piece 2510h of the center base 2510, A transparent plate-shaped distribution space cover 2533, which is arranged below the guide passage cover 2532 and the upper warp passage cover 2531 and closes the front side of the distribution space recess 2510c of the center base 2510, and above the distribution space cover 2533. A center left decoration body 2534 having a semi-spherical and translucent shape, which is disposed between the upper warp passage cover 2531 and the guide passage cover 2532 and bulges forward.

The upper warp passage cover 2531 of the left passage cover 2530 is formed in a box shape that is open at the upper side, the lower side, and the rear side and extends in the up-down direction. By cooperating with the passage recess 2510a of the center base 2510, The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2503 can be made to flow in a zigzag shape in the front-rear direction. Further, the guide passage cover 2532 is formed in a box shape that is open at the upper side, the lower side, and the rear side and extends in the up-down direction, and the rear side is closed by the left extending portion 2510b of the center base 2510. A guide passage 2532a for guiding the game ball can be formed.

Further, the center left decoration body 2534 of the left passage cover 2530 has a transparent hemispherical front surface formed as a smooth surface, and a rear surface formed as a multi-sided surface having a plurality of triangular surfaces having different sizes and shapes. .. As a result, the plate thickness of the hemispherical portion becomes non-uniform, a lens is formed for each triangular portion, and the transmitted light can be irregularly refracted. Further, the center left decoration 2534 has a relief-shaped decoration having a metallic luster on the outer periphery of the front surface of a hemisphere. The center left decorative body 2534 is arranged in front of the passage hole 2510i of the center base 2510, and is movable left and right of the rear left effect unit 3600 in the rear unit 3000 arranged rearward through the cylinder of the reflector 2630. The light from the decorative body unit 3610 can be used for light emission decoration.

The left passage rear cover 2540 of the center accessory 2500 is formed in a box shape having an open front side, and can cover the left opening 2510e and the passage opening 2510g of the center base 2510. This left passage cover 2540 guides the game ball guided to the rear side of the center base 2510 by passing through the passage opening 2510g by being guided by the guide piece 2510h of the center base 2510, and the left opening portion in the lower right of the front view. It is provided with a guide wall 2541 that guides to a height of approximately the lower side of 2510e, and a release slope 2542 that guides the game ball guided by the guide wall 2541 forward and is gently inclined.

The discharge slope 2542 of the left passage rear cover 2540 extends from the rear side to the lower side of the left opening 2510e in the center base 2510, and the game ball guided to the discharge slope 2542 by the guide wall 2541 is the slope of the discharge slope 2542. Thus, it rolls forward and is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 through the left opening 2510e.

The lower warp passage member 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is formed in a rectangular tube shape that is translucent and extends in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 139, an opening 2551 through which a game ball can pass is formed in the upper portion. The warp outlet 2505 is formed at the lower part of the right side surface when viewed from the front. The opening 2551 of the lower warp passage member 2550 coincides with the right opening portion 2510d of the center base 2510 in the assembled state, and the game ball passing through the right opening portion 2510d can flow in the lower warp passage member 2550.

The stage member 2560 of the center accessory 2500 includes a transparent stage body 2561 including a first stage 2506a and a second stage 2506b, a transparent stage back cover 2562 that covers the rear side and the lower side of the stage body 2561, and a stage back. The stage decoration substrate 2563 is provided between the cover 2562 and the stage body 2561 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The stage body 2561 of the stage member 2560 includes a rear wall portion 2561a extending upward in a plate shape from the rear end of the first stage 2506a excluding the chance entrance 2506c. The rear wall portion 2561a of the stage main body 2561 can prevent the game ball supplied to the stage 2506 from dropping to the rear side of the stage 2506. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the stage main body 2561 has a cross section on the back side of the first stage 2506a, the second stage 2506b, and the portion vertically extending between the first stage 2506a and the second stage 2506b. A plurality of lens portions 2561b each having a semicircular shape and extending in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction are provided. These lens portions 2561b make it difficult to visually recognize the lower side of the stage 2506, and the entire stage 2506 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the LEDs of the stage decoration substrate 2563.

The stage back cover 2562 of the stage member 2560 includes a chance passage 2562a that connects the chance inlet 2506c and the chance outlet 2506d, and a return portion 2562b that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rear wall portion 2561a of the stage body 2561. There is. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the stage decoration substrate 2563 of the stage member 2560 is arranged behind the stage 2506 and under the first stage 2506a.

As shown in FIGS. 140 to 142, the second attacker unit 2570 of the center accessory 2500 includes a unit base 2571 attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 and a front and rear direction extending to a predetermined position on the lower front surface of the unit base 2571. A second opening/closing member 2572 supported rotatably around an axis, a transparent plate-shaped front cover 2573 arranged in front of the second opening/closing member 2572 and attached to the front surface of the unit base 2571, and a unit base 2571. A second attacker solenoid 2574 disposed on the rear side of the second attacker solenoid 2574 having a plunger 2574a capable of advancing and retracting, and a second opening/closing member 2572 which is attached to the tip of the plunger 2574a of the second attacker solenoid 2574 and transmits the advancing/retreating of the plunger 2574a. And a link member 2575 that allows the link member 2575 to move.

Further, the second attacker unit 2570 includes a solenoid base 2576 that receives and supports the second attacker solenoid 2574 from the rear side and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2571, and a front surface of the second attacker solenoid 2574 that is attached to the front side of the solenoid base 2576. A solenoid cover 2577 that covers the unit, a second count sensor 2578 attached to the unit base 2571 from the rear side and capable of detecting a game ball received in the second special winning opening 2509, and a unit base detected by the second count sensor 2578. It is provided with a passage cover 2579 that guides the game ball guided to the rear side of 2571 downward and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2571.

The unit base 2571 of the second attacker unit 2570 is formed in a crescent shape with a wide lower end in a front view, and is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side. The unit base 2571 has a plate-shaped insertion surface 2571a that slightly protrudes forward from the front surface of the lower portion and has an outer shape corresponding to the insertion hole 2510r of the center base 2510, and penetrates in the front-rear direction at approximately the center of the insertion surface 2571a to make a second opening/closing operation. A shaft hole 2571b that rotatably supports the member 2572, an opening 2571c that penetrates in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the shaft hole 2571b and into which an action pin 2572c of a second opening/closing member 2572 described later is inserted, and a shaft hole 2571b. In the position on the left side of the front view, a rectangular opening penetrates in the anteroposterior direction to pass through a passage opening 2571d through which a game ball received in the second special winning opening 2509 can pass, and the front portion protrudes from the outer periphery excluding the upper side of the passing opening 2571d. The receiving portion 2571e, a guiding portion 2571f that extends outward from the left and right upper ends of the receiving portion 2571e, respectively, and inclines so as to become lower toward the inside of the receiving portion 2571e, and the receiving portion 2571e faces below the guiding portion 2571f. The sensor holding portion 2571g formed on the left and right side surfaces for holding the second count sensor 2578, and the triangular guiding piece 2571h that extends upward from the bottom surface of the receiving portion 2571e and is inclined downward toward the rear are provided. There is.

In addition, the unit base 2571 is formed in the lower right protrusion 2571i that protrudes forward from the lower right position in front view of the shaft hole 2571b, the lower right protrusion 2571i, and the guide part 2571f on the right side in front view. It is provided with a pair of stopper portions 2571j that regulate the rotation range of 2572, and plate-shaped ribs 2571k that extend from the lower end of the lower right protrusion 2571i to the substantially center and lower end of the right side surface of the receiving portion 2571e in front view. .. The front ends of the lower right protruding portion 2571i, the stopper portion 2571j, and the rib 2571k protrude forward to the same position as the front end of the receiving portion 2571e. A front cover 2573 is attached so as to cover the front sides of the receiving portion 2571e, the guiding portion 2571f, the lower right protruding portion 2571i, and the rib 2571k.

Further, the unit base 2571 is provided with a ball passage 2571l that extends rearward from the rear surface and is opened rearward to guide the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 2571d in the front view right direction. At the rear end of this ball passage 2571l, a passage cover 2579 is attached so that an opening through which game balls can pass is formed at the rear end right end in front view.

When the second attacker unit 2570 is attached to the center base 2510, the insertion surface 2571a of the unit base 2571 projects forward so that the front surface of the insertion surface 2571a substantially coincides with the rear surface of the second attacker space 2510n in the front-rear direction. Further, the right end of the guiding portion 2571f on the right side of the unit base 2571 in front view forms the lower end of the second special winning opening 2509. Further, the stopper portions 2571j formed respectively on the right guiding portion 2571f and the lower right protruding portion 2571i are arranged so as to face each other along an arc centered on the axis of the shaft hole 2571b, and They are arranged at an angle of about 90 degrees around the axis of 2571b. By contacting the stopper piece 2572c of the second opening/closing member 2572 with the pair of stopper portions 2571j, the rotation range of the second opening/closing member 2572 can be restricted, and the second opening/closing member 2572 can be opened and closed. Can be positioned.

The second opening/closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 is a drop-shaped blade portion 2572a that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2509 and a shaft hole 2571b of the unit base 2571 that extends rearward from the base end of the blade portion 2572a. The shaft portion 2572b that is inserted and supported, the action pin 2572c that extends rearward from the rear side of the blade portion 2572a at a position where the shaft portion 2572b is eccentric, and the base portion of the blade portion 2572a to the tip of the blade portion 2572a are the shafts. It is provided with a stopper piece 2572d extending to the opposite side across the portion 2572b.

The second opening/closing member 2572 is rotated from the front side of the unit base 2571 by inserting the shaft portion 2572b into the shaft hole 2572b of the unit base 2571 so that the action pin 2572c penetrates the opening portion 2571c of the unit base 2571. While being supported movably, the stopper piece 2572d is located between the pair of stopper portions 2571j in the unit base 2571, and the stopper piece 2572d that rotates together with the blade portion 2572a comes into contact with the stopper portion 2571j, so that the predetermined angle range is achieved. It can only be rotated inside.

The rear end of the action pin 2572c of the second opening/closing member 2572 is slidably inserted into the slit 2575c of the link member 2575. As a result, when the link member 2572 moves forward and backward by the plunger 2574a of the second attacker solenoid 2574, the rear end of the action pin 2572c slides vertically in the slit 2575c of the link member 2575, and the second opening/closing member 2572 moves. It rotates about the shaft portion 2572b.

In the second opening/closing member 2572, the stopper piece 2572d is located between the pair of stopper portions 2571j in the unit base 2571 in the assembled state, and the blade portion 2572a rises substantially vertically to form the second large winning opening 2509. When it is closed, the stopper piece 2572d abuts on the stopper portion 2571j of the lower right protrusion 2571i, and the tip of the blade portion 2572a moves to the right in the front view to open the second special winning opening 2509. The rotation range of the second opening/closing member 2572 is regulated by the 2572d coming into contact with the lower stopper portion 2571j of the right guiding portion 2571f.

The second attacker solenoid 2574 of the second attacker unit 2570 is arranged so that the plunger 2574a extends rightward when viewed from the front. Further, the link member 2575 of the second attacker unit 2570 extends in a plate shape from the front end of the plunger attachment portion 2575a attached to the tip of the plunger 2574a of the second attacker solenoid 2574 and the front end of the plunger attachment portion 2575a in the front view right direction. The extension piece 2575b and the slit 2575c that penetrates the extension piece 2575b in the front-rear direction and extends in the up-down direction and into which the action pin 2572c of the second opening/closing member 2572 is slidably inserted are provided.

The solenoid base 2576 of the second attacker unit 2570 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and accommodates the second attacker solenoid 2574 and can slide the link member 2575 in the left-right direction in cooperation with the solenoid cover 2577. Hold on.

By attaching the second attacker unit 2570 of the present embodiment to the center base 2510, the inclined portion 2510q of the center base 2510 and the guiding portion 2571f of the unit base 2571 form the second special winning opening 2509.

As shown in FIGS. 146 to 148, a specific area 2509b is provided in the second special winning opening 2509, and the game ball passes (or enters) the specific area 2509b (V zone) to specify. The accessory condition device of is activated. As shown in FIGS. 146 to 148, the specific area 2509b is a sensor which is attached to the unit base 2571 and which allows the game balls received in the specific area 2509b to pass therethrough. A sensor 2578a and a movable piece 2578b which is attached above the specific count sensor 2578a and which can be adjusted to receive the game ball in the specific area 2509b by moving in the horizontal direction are arranged.

The movable piece 2578b is operable in the horizontal direction by a driving device (not shown), and is normally fixed to a left-side standby position as shown in FIG. 148(a). When the movable piece 2578b is in the standby position, the game ball that has entered the second attacker unit 2570 cannot enter the specific area 2509b, that is, the specific count sensor 2578a does not detect it. Further, the driving device, when the special lottery result indicating the winning in the special lottery is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186, according to the predetermined operation control, the movable piece 2578b. Move to the operating position to the right of the fixed position. As shown in FIG. 148(b), when the movable piece 2578b is in the operating position, the game ball that has entered the second attacker unit 2570 can easily enter the specific area 2509b, that is, the specific count sensor. It becomes a mode that is easily detected by 2578b.

When the second opening/closing member 2572 is in the open state in the big hit game state, the game ball received in the second special winning opening 2509 moves toward the specific area 2509b when the movable piece 2578b is in the operating position. When the passing of the game ball is detected by the specific count sensor 2578a, it is determined that the player has entered (passed) the specific area 2509b (V winning). After that, the game ball with the V winning is guided rearward by the guide piece 2571h, enters the rear side ball passage 2571l through the passage opening 2571d of the unit base 2571, and is discharged rearward from the front end of the ball passage 2571l. R. When the game ball wins V, the detection information from the specific count sensor 2578a is input to the main control board 4100 via the panel relay board 3020, and the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a) ends the jackpot. The later game state is controlled to a high probability state, and the time saving state is also set.

When the second opening/closing member 2572 is in the open state in the big hit game state, the game ball received in the second special winning opening 2509 enters the specific area 2509b when the movable piece 2578b is in the standby position. However, the guide portion 2571f of the unit base 2571 guides the guide portion 2571f into the receiving portion 2571e, and the second count sensor 2578 detects the guide portion 2571e. Then, the game ball guided rearward by the guide piece 2571h enters the rear side ball passage 2571l through the passage opening 2571d of the unit base 2571, and is discharged rearward from the front end right side of the ball passage 2571l.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the operation control of the second opening/closing member 2572 (the second big winning opening 2509 in a broad sense) and the movable piece 2578b as described above, it is possible to adjust whether or not the V winning is possible. , "Short-time opening of specific area (V-short opening)" and "Long-time opening of specific area (V-long opening)" are set, and these different opening controls are executed based on the type of jackpot. Has become. Although details of each opening control will be described later, when the V-short opening is performed, even if the game ball enters the second attacker unit 2570 at the same time when the second opening/closing member 2572 is opened, the movable piece 2578b. Since it is in a standby state, it is not possible to expect a V winning, and in fact, there is an opportunity for a V winning only in a jackpot in which a V long opening is performed.

FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining a control example capable of adjusting whether or not V winning is possible. FIGS. 180(A) to (C) summarize the operating states of the respective members in a specific round (for example, the 13th round) in which the second special winning opening 2509 is opened, and more specifically, FIG. 180(A) shows the opening/closing state of the second special winning opening 2509 (opening/closing control of the second opening/closing member 2572) in the V long opening pattern, and FIG. 180(B) shows the second opening in the V short opening pattern. The open/close state of the special winning opening 2509 (open/close control of the second open/close member 2572) is shown, and FIG. 180(C) shows the control state of the VAT structure (that is, the position of the movable piece 2578b). In FIG. 180(C), the control state of the VAT structure being “OFF” corresponds to the movable piece 2578b being in the standby position, and the control state of the VAT structure being “ON” is the drive device. It corresponds to the movable piece 2578b being in the moving position by being moved by, but the state in which it is moving between the standby position and the moving position is omitted. In addition, in FIGS. 180A to 180C, the horizontal direction indicates the passage of time, the vertical broken lines t1 to t7 indicate the change timing of each situation, and the seconds shown above t1 to t7. The number indicates the elapsed time from t1.

In the example of FIG. 180, first, as shown in (A), the second special winning opening 2509 (second opening/closing member 2572) is opened with the start of a specific round during a big hit (t1). The game ball is ready to be received in the second special winning opening 2509. After that, the second special winning opening 2509 opened at t1 is, as shown in FIGS. 180(A) and 180(B), an extremely short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) at which it is almost unlikely that a game ball will be accepted. After being opened for the entire time, it is closed (t2). The opening/closing timing in the period from t1 to t2 is the same regardless of the opening pattern (V short open/V long open) of any specific area. Even if a game ball enters the second special winning opening 2509 during the period from t1 to t2, the movable piece 2578b is in the standby position as shown in FIG. Will never win a V.

Then, in the case of the V-short opening shown in FIG. 180(B), after the second special winning opening 2509 is closed at t2, the second special winning opening 2509 is again opened until the specific round ends (t6). Since it is not opened, the game ball does not enter the second big winning opening 2509 and does not pass through the V zone (specific area 2509b). Therefore, in the jackpot game, when such control of V short opening is included, the round in which the V short opening is performed is not only expected to be a V winning, but also a prize associated with entering a game ball into the big winning opening. The ball cannot be expected to be paid out, and the round cannot be counted as the actual round in which the prize ball is expected to be paid out. Thus, in the jackpot in which the V-short opening control is performed, the actual number of rounds is reduced from the actual number of rounds by the number of rounds in which the V-short opening control is performed (for example, a specific 2 described later). 16R (actual 15R) big hit).

On the other hand, in the case of the V-long opening shown in FIG. 180(A), after the second special winning opening 2509 is closed at t2, the specific round ends after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 0.8 seconds). Before (t6), the second special winning opening 2509 (second opening/closing member 2572) is opened again (t3), and the game ball is ready to be received in the second special winning opening 2509. Furthermore, the movable piece 2578b is moved to the operating position (VAT structure is ON) at a timing close to the opening of the second special winning opening 2509 at t3 (t4), and the game that has entered the second special winning opening 2509. A situation is provided in which the sphere can pass through the V zone. Further, unlike the short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) from t1 to t2, this open state is continued for a long time to the extent that the acceptance of the game ball into the V zone can be expected sufficiently. For example, in FIG. 180, the second special winning opening 2509 is opened for 28.5 seconds (t3 to t5), the movable piece 2578b is in the operating position for 30.0 seconds (t4 to t7), and the mutual open state is set. By being overlapped for 27.5 seconds (t4 to t5), it is possible to easily realize the V winning of the game ball within the period of t4 to t5. In addition, when the number of game balls entering the second special winning opening 2509 reaches a predetermined number (for example, eight), the second special winning opening 2509 opened at t3 elapses a predetermined time ( Although it is closed before t5), even in such a case, it can be easily estimated that at least one of the predetermined number of game balls that entered the ball will win the V zone.

Further, as described above, when the V long opening (FIG. 180(A)) or the V short opening (FIG. 180(B)) is performed, the opening/closing timing of the second special winning opening 2509 (second opening/closing member 2572) is Although different control is performed, as shown in FIG. 180(C), the movement timing of the movable piece 2578b (OFF/ON timing of the VAT structure) does not change due to the difference in the opening control of the specific area, and the fixed movement is performed. I do. The movable piece 2578b moves to the operating position at t4 and then returns to the standby position at t7. Note that t6 in FIG. 180 indicates the end timing of the specific round, but the relationship between the end timing of the specific round and the return timing of the movable piece 2578b is not particularly limited.

The number of game balls (the number of prizes) of the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2509 is the number of the game balls (V number of prizes) which is detected by the specific count sensor 2578a and enters the specific area 2509b. The number of game balls (V non-winning number) detected by the second count sensor 2578 without entering the specific area 2509b is regarded as a total number, and a predetermined prize ball is paid out according to the winning number. Therefore, when the upper limit number of balls (for example, 8) is set together with the opening of the specified time as the opening condition of the second big winning opening 2509, the total number of the V winning number and the V non-winning number is used. A comparison with the maximum number of balls entered is made. The method of arranging the sensors for detecting the number of winnings to the second special winning opening 2509 is not particularly limited. For example, as shown in FIGS. 146 to 148, the number of V winnings detected by the specific count sensor 2578a is set. The number of V non-winning prizes detected by the second count sensor 2578 may be detected by separate sensors and the detected counts may be summed up, or the second special winning opening 2509 may be provided separately from the specific count sensor 2578a. A sensor for detecting the total number of winning prizes may be provided. In this case, it is possible to detect the game ball received in the second special winning opening 2509 regardless of whether the game ball that has passed the specific count sensor 2578a can be detected or whether the game ball has passed the specific count sensor 2578a. The second count sensor 2578 may be arranged at any position. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, regarding the payout of prize balls to the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2509, the total number of winning prizes is counted by the second count sensor 2578 and the payout is made. It will be described as being performed.

Further, in the second attacker unit 2570, in a normal state, the plunger 2574a of the second attacker solenoid 2574 is advanced to the right side in the front view by the urging force of a spring (not shown). The blade portion 2572a of the second opening/closing member 2572 is in a state of standing up substantially vertically through. As a result, the second special winning opening 2509 is closed by the second opening/closing member 2572. On the other hand, when the second attacker solenoid 2574 is energized by a big hit game or the like, the plunger 2574a retracts into the second attacker solenoid 2574, and the second opening/closing member 2572 rotates clockwise in the front view via the link member 2575. To do. As a result, the second special winning opening 2509 is opened.

As shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the second starting port unit 2580 of the center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2510 below the second attacker unit 2570 and penetrates in the front-rear direction at the substantially center in the left-right direction. In addition, a unit base plate 2581 having an opening 2581a extending in the up-down direction, an inverted triangular lower right front cover 2582 attached to the front surface on the left side from substantially the center of the unit base plate 2581 in front view, and a lower right front cover 2582. A normal symbol display board 1191a on which a normal symbol display device 1189 composed of LEDs is mounted on the rear side and a normal symbol display board 1191a is held from the rear side and is attached to the rear side of the lower right front cover 2582. A holder 2583 and a guide member 2584 attached to the lower part of the opening 2581a on the front surface of the unit base plate 2581 on the front left side of the lower right front cover 2582 are provided.

The second starting opening unit 2580 is a gate member having a gate portion 2585a and a barrier portion 2585b that are attached to the rear side of the unit base plate 2581 and project forward through the opening 2581a of the unit base plate 2581 and are vertically arranged. 2585, a gate sensor 2586 attached to the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 to detect passage of the game ball, and a game ball attached to the rear side of the gate member 2585 and passed through the gate portion 2582a to be guided backward It has a guide passage 2587a for guiding to, a second starting opening 2587b opened on the lower side of the guide passage 2587a, and a discharge passage 2587c through which the game balls passing through the second starting opening 2587b circulate, and the right side in front view is opened. A box-shaped passage member 2587 and a plate-shaped passage cover 2588 attached to the right end of the passage member 2587 in front view and attached to the rear side of the gate member 2585 are provided.

Further, the second starting port unit 2580 is attached to the door member 2589 that is rotatably supported by the passage member 2587 and the passage cover 2588 to open and close the second starting port 2587b, and the guide member 2587a in the passage member 2587. The starting opening solenoid 2590 having a plunger 2590a that can be moved back and forth in the vertical direction, a first link member 2591 that moves vertically as the plunger 2590a of the starting opening solenoid 2590 moves back and forth, and a vertical direction of the first link member 2591. Second link member 2592 for transmitting the movement of the door member 2589 to rotate the door member 2589, and a second ball member that is supported on the rear side of the second starting port 2587b of the passage member 2587 and detects the game ball that has passed through the second starting port 2587b. A starting port sensor 2593 and a link cover 2594 attached to the right side of the passage cover 2588 when viewed from the front are provided to cover the second link member 2592.

In addition, the second starting opening unit 2580 includes a second starting opening decoration substrate 2595 disposed behind the passage member 2587 and the passage cover 2588 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, and a second starting opening decoration substrate 2595. A first substrate cover 2596 that covers the side and is attached to the rear side of the unit base plate 2581, and an inverted L-shaped lower right decoration substrate 2597 that is arranged on the rear side of the unit base plate 2581 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. And a reflector 2598 arranged between the lower right front decorative board 2597 and the unit base plate 2581, and a second substrate cover 2599 which covers the rear side of the lower right front decorative board 2597 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base plate 2581. And are equipped with.

The unit base plate 2581 of the second starting opening unit 2580 is formed of a light-transmissive material, and penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the lower right front cover 2582 on the right side in front view of the opening 2581a. It has a mouth 2581b. Further, the unit base plate 2581 is decorated on the front surface on the left side in front view with respect to the portion to which the lower right front cover 2582 is attached.

The lower right front cover 2582 of the second starting opening unit 2580 corresponds to the inclined surface 2582a that forms the bottom of the second attacker space 2510n on the upper surface and is inclined so that the left side in front view becomes lower, and the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585. A display hole 2582b that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position at which the normal symbol display board 1191a of the normal symbol display substrate 1189 faces forward, and a through-hole 2582c that extends in an arc shape along the right side in front view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. , A plate-shaped partition piece 2582d that partitions the inside of the through hole 2582c into a plurality of parts in the vertical direction.

The guide member 2584 of the second starting opening unit 2580 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and can guide the game ball that was not received in the second starting opening 2587b to the left when viewed from the front.

The gate member 2585 of the second starting opening unit 2580 is arranged below the gate portion 2585a, which penetrates the opening 2581a of the unit base plate 2581 and projects forward, receives the game ball and guides it backward. A barrier portion 2585b that penetrates the opening portion 2581a and projects forward in a frame shape, a through hole 2585c that extends from the lower end of the gate portion 2585a to a lower side than the barrier portion 2585b, and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the left and right sides of the through hole 2585c. It is provided with a passage member 2587 that extends rearward from both sides and a holding piece 2585d that holds the passage lid 2588. In addition, the gate member 2585 includes a sensor holding portion 2585e that holds the gate sensor 2586 from the rear side above the gate portion 2585a. The gate member 2585 is made of a transparent material and allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the gate portion 2585a and the second starting opening 2587b.

The passage member 2587 of the second starting opening unit 2580 has a guide passage 2587a that guides the game ball guided rearward by the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 to the front and bulges backward in an arc shape, and below the guide passage 2587a. A second starting opening 2587b that opens in the front-rear direction on the side to allow a game ball to pass through, and a discharge passage 2587c that guides the game ball that has passed through the second starting opening 2587b to the rear side and discharges it downward, It is provided with a sensor holding portion 2587d for holding a second starting opening sensor 2593 that detects a game ball that has passed through the starting opening 2587b, and a solenoid holding portion 2587e for holding a starting opening solenoid 2590. The passage member 2587 can hold the starting opening solenoid 2590 by the solenoid holding portion 2587e so that the plunger 2590a advances and retreats downward from the lower surface.

The passage cover 2588 of the second starting opening unit 2580 has a first opening 2588a through which the extending portion 2591b of the first link member 2591 and the rear end of the second link member 2592 are inserted, and the first opening 2588a and the first opening 2588a. And a second opening 2588b through which the extending piece 2589b of the door member 2589 is inserted and which penetrates in the left-right direction on the front side of the.

The door member 2589 of the second starting opening unit 2580 includes a door portion 2589a capable of closing the second starting opening 2587b from the front side, an extension piece 2589b extending rearward from the lower end of the door portion 2589a and the right end in front view, and It is provided with a transmission pin 2589c that protrudes rightward from the rear end of the projecting piece 2589b. The door member 2589 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the left-right direction by a passage member 2587 and a passage lid 2588 at the lower left and right sides of the lower end of the door portion 2589a at a position below the front end of the second starting port 2587a. .. Further, the extending piece 2589b of the door member 2589 passes through the second opening 2588b of the passage cover 2588, and the rear end thereof extends to the right side of the passage cover 2588 in front view. Further, the transmission pin 2589c is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2592d of the second link member 2592.

The first link member 2591 of the second starting port unit 2580 includes a plunger mounting part 2591a to which the tip of the plunger 2590a of the starting port solenoid 2590 is mounted and which is movably supported in the vertical direction by a passage cover 2588, and a plunger mounting part 2591a. An extension portion 2591b extending downward from the right end in front view and a link pin 2591c protruding from the lower end of the extension portion 2591b to the right in front view are provided. The extending portion 2591b of the first link member 2591 passes through the first opening 2588a of the passage cover 2588, and the lower end thereof extends to the right side of the passage cover 2588 in front view. The link pin 2591c is slidably inserted into the link slit 2592c of the second link member 2592.

The second link member 2592 of the second starting opening unit 2580 has a main body 2592a extending in the front-rear direction in a strip shape, and a rear side of the extending portion 2591b of the first link member 2591 formed at the rear end of the main body 2592a. At a position, a shaft portion 2592b rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the left-right direction by a passage member 2587 and a passage cover 2588, and a main body 2592a formed at a position near the front end of the shaft portion 2592b and penetrating the main body 2592a. A link slit 2592c, which is a long hole extending in the longitudinal direction and into which the link pin 2591c of the first link member 2591 is slidably inserted, and a body 2592a formed at the front end of the body 2592a and penetrating the body 2592a in the longitudinal direction. And a transmission slit 2592d into which the transmission pin 2589c of the door member 2589 is slidably inserted.

The lower right front decorative board 2597 of the second starting opening unit 2580 has a plurality of LEDs located at a position corresponding to the through opening 2581b of the unit base plate 2581 and a position above the upper end of the unit base plate 2581. It is formed in an inverted L shape. Accordingly, the inside of the through hole 2582c of the lower right front cover 2582 and the upper side of the inclined surface 2582a can be illuminated and decorated.

In the second starting port unit 2580 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the plunger 2590a of the starting port solenoid 2590 projects downward, and the door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 stands up substantially vertically. The second starting port 2587b is closed by the member 2589 (see FIG. 146). In a normal state, a game ball that has entered the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 from above is detected by the gate sensor 2586 and then sent from the gate portion 2585a to the guide passage 2587a of the passage member 2587 on the rear side. Through the guide passage 2587a, it is sent to the lower barrier portion 2585b of the front gate portion 2585a. Then, passing through the frame of the barrier portion 2585b and passing through the front side of the second starting port 2587b closed by the door member 2589, it is sent to the guide member 2584 and guided by the guide member 2584 in the left direction when viewed from the front. Released into 1100.

In the second starting opening unit 2580, when the starting opening solenoid 2590 is energized from the normal state, the plunger 2590a moves up so as to be retracted into the starting opening solenoid 2590, and the first link member 2591 also moves up together with the plunger 2590a. Then, as the first link member 2591 rises, the link pin 2591c of the first link member 2591 slides in the link slit 2592c of the second link member 2592, and at the same time, the second link member 2592 moves through the link slit 2592c. It rotates about the rear end shaft portion 2592b in a direction in which the front end rises. When the tip of the second link member 2592 is rotated in the upward direction, the transmission pin 2589c of the door member 2589 slides in the transmission slit 2592d at the tip of the second link member 2592, and at the same time, the transmission pin 2589c is moved in the upward direction. The door member 2589 rotates. As a result, the upper end of the door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 is rotated in the direction of moving forward, and the second starting port 2587b that was closed by the door portion 2589a is opened and the second starting port 2587a is opened. The game ball can be accepted (see FIG. 147).

The upper part 2600 of the right passage cover of the center accessory 2500 has a transparent plate shape and is decorated on the front surface. The upper right passage cover 2600 closes the front surface of the attacker passage 2509a above the second attacker space 2510n and the front surface of the bypass passage 2510o. Further, the lower right passage cover 2605 of the center accessory 2500 is a transparent plate, and the front surface is decorated. The lower right passage cover 2605 closes the front surface of the second attacker space 2510n of the attacker passage 2509a and covers the front surface of the lower right front cover 2582 of the second starting opening unit 2580.

The center right light emitting unit 2610 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rear of the right passage cover 2600 on the rear side of the second attacker unit 2570 and has a front right upper decoration board 2611 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. , The front right middle decorative board 2612, which is arranged on the rear side of the second attacker unit 2570 along the lower end of the second attacker unit 2570 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and covers the rear side of the front right upper decorative board 2611. An upper right board cover 2613, a right middle board cover 2614 that is attached to the lower rear part of the upper right board cover 2613 and covers the rear side of the front right middle decoration board 2612, and a front relay board 2615 that is arranged behind the upper right board cover 2613. And a substrate cover 2616 which covers the rear side of the front relay substrate 2615 and is attached to the rear side of the upper right substrate cover 2613.

The center right light emission decoration unit 2640 of the center accessory 2500 includes a center right decoration body 2641 having a light-transmitting property that stereoscopically imitates a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and a center right decoration body 2641. Center right decorative board 2642 which is disposed on the front side and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side, and the center right decorative body 2641 which is disposed on the rear side of the center right decorative board 2642 and which supports the center right decorative body 2641 from the rear side and on the rear side of the center base 2510. A board cover 2643 to be attached, a protection cover right on which a plurality of LEDs which are arranged on the rear side of the board cover 2643 and are capable of emitting light toward the right side surface of the protection cover 2650 are mounted, and a decorative board 2644 and a protection cover right A substrate support member 2645 that supports the decorative substrate 2644 and is attached to the rear side of the substrate cover 2643 is provided.

The center effect unit 2660 of the center accessory 2500 includes an on-center drive unit 2670 attached to the center base 2510, and an on-center movable decorative body unit 2690 arranged in front of the on-center drive unit 2670 and moved up and down by the on-center drive unit 2670. And an on-center ornament 2700 attached to the front of the on-center drive unit 2670 above the on-center movable ornament unit 2690.

Although not shown in detail, the above-center drive unit 2670 of the above-center production unit 2660 is a shallow box-shaped unit base 2671 that is attached to the front side of the center base 2510 and extends in the left-right direction, and is open at the front. A front drive motor 2672 mounted on the rear side of the base 2671 and having a rotary shaft penetrating the unit base 2671 and extending to the front side, a drive gear fixed to the rotary shaft of the front drive motor 2672, and meshing with the drive gear. The driven gear, which is rotatably supported by the unit base and has a plate-shaped detection piece extending rearward, is rotatably supported by the unit base by meshing with the driven gear and is eccentric from the center of rotation. A working gear having a working pin projecting forward.

Further, the center upper drive unit 2670 is rotatably supported by a unit slit disposed at a position where the action pin of the action gear is slidable, and a position separated from the action slit, and an axial center extending in the front-rear direction. The first shaft part, the first rod part extending from the first shaft part to a position farther than the working slit, the first transmission formed along the line passing through the center of rotation formed at the tip of the first rod part. The slit and the first shaft portion are formed on the side opposite to the direction in which the first rod portion extends, and are arranged in an arc shape along a circumference having a radius shorter than the first shaft portion to the working slit. A first link member having one gear portion, a second gear portion meshed with the first gear portion of the first link member and arranged in an arc shape along a circumference having the same radius as the first gear portion, The second shaft portion, which is disposed at the center of the two gear portions and is rotatably supported by the unit base, has the same length as the first rod portion of the first link member in the direction opposite to the second gear portion from the second shaft portion. And a second link member having a second transmission slit formed at the tip of the second rod portion and extending along a line passing through the center of rotation. The first link member and the second link member are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and the first rod portion and the second rod portion respectively extend outward in the left-right direction with respect to the first shaft portion and the second shaft portion. ing.

Further, the center upper drive unit 2670 is attached to the front side of the unit base 2671 and covers the drive gear, the driven gear, the acting gear, the first link member, and the front side of the second link member, and the unit cover and the unit base. An elevation shaft having upper and lower ends respectively supported at positions near the left and right ends of the unit base 2671 by 2671 and a vertically extending shaft, and a motor base mounted on the rear side of the unit base 2671 and a front drive motor 2672 mounted on the rear surface. And an up-and-down position detection sensor which is attached to the unit base 2671 and detects the up-and-down position of the movable center upper decoration 2690 by detecting the detection piece of the driven gear, and the upper center decoration between the unit base 2671 and the unit cover. It is provided with a center-on-decoration body decoration substrate which is arranged at a position corresponding to 2700 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The unit cover is provided with notches that extend downward in the vertical direction and are opened at positions closer to the center side from the elevating shafts at the left and right ends.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the above-center movable decorative body unit 2690 of the above-center production unit 2660 is a translucent logo decorative body 2691 with a predetermined logo formed according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. , A translucent unit having a translucent property, which is disposed on the rear side of the logo decoration body 2691, a movable center-on-decorative body which is disposed on the rear side of the transmissive unit and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a movable center-on-center A back cover that covers the back side of the decoration base plate and is attached to the back side of the logo decoration body 2691, and a first transmission slit and a second transmission slit of the first link member in the center upper drive unit 2670 that protrudes rearward from the back side of the back cover. A pair of transmission pins that are slidably inserted into the second transmission slits of the link member, and a unit in the center upper drive unit 2670 that is attached to the rear side of the back cover at a position outside the pair of transmission pins in the left-right direction. A pair of elevating sliders is supported so as to be elevatable by an elevating shaft through a notch in the cover.

The transmissive unit of the movable center upper decorative body unit 2690 includes a front diffusing sheet having a translucent property, which is arranged on the rear side of the logo decorative body 2691, and a frame shape along the characters of the logo, which is arranged on the rear side of the diffusing sheet. Corresponding to the formed front reflector, the colored color filter that is arranged behind the front reflector and has an opening corresponding to the logo letters and has translucency, and the logo letters arranged behind the color filters The rear diffusion sheet having the above-mentioned openings and capable of diffusing light, and the rear reflector arranged on the rear side of the rear diffusion sheet and having a shape along the characters of the logo.

The on-center movable decorative body unit 2690 can be slid (elevated) in the vertical direction by the elevating slider being supported by the elevating shaft of the on-center drive unit 2670.

Furthermore, the above-center decoration body 2700 of the above-center production unit 2660 includes a container-shaped decoration body main body whose front surface is subjected to predetermined decoration and whose rear side is open, and a center above-mentioned decoration body decoration arranged on the rear side of the decoration body main body. It is provided with a diffusing member for diffusing light from the substrate, a frame-shaped reflector arranged on the rear side of the diffusing member, and a translucent decorative member mounted on the front side of the main body of the decorative body.

In the on-center effect unit 2660 of this embodiment, when the obverse drive motor 2672 is rotationally driven, the action gear rotates via the drive gear and the driven gear, and the action pin of the action gear revolves at a predetermined radius. When the action pin revolves, the action pin slides in the action slit of the first link member, and the first link member rotates in a predetermined direction around the first shaft portion as the slide occurs. .. As the first link member rotates, the second gear of the second link member meshes with the first gear portion of the first link member so that the second link member becomes the first link member around the second shaft portion. Will rotate in the opposite direction. Therefore, the tips of the first rod portion and the second rod portion of the first link member and the second link member rotate in the vertical direction while maintaining the same height with each other, and the first rod portion and the first rod portion At the same time as the transmission pin of the movable center top decoration 2690 slides in the first transmission slit and the second transmission slit provided at the tip of the two rod portions, the movable center top decoration moves vertically. At this time, the pair of elevating sliders of the movable center upper decoration 2690 are slidably supported by the elevating shafts of the center upper drive unit, respectively, so that the movable center upper decoration can be smoothly moved up and down.

Next, the flow of the game balls in the center accessory 2500 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 138, on the left side of the window portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500 in front view, when the game ball flowing down to the left route 1100L side enters the warp entrance 2503 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2502, It flows through the warp passage 2504 formed by the center base 2510 and the left passage cover 2530. More specifically, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has entered the warp entrance 2503 is first zigzag forward and backward by the passage recess 2510a of the center base 2510 and the upper warp passage cover 2531 of the left passage cover 2530. It is guided downward while rolling. The game ball guided in the zigzag can be visually recognized from the player side through the upper warp passage cover 2531. Further, by guiding the game ball in a zigzag manner, it is possible to prevent the flow speed of the game ball from increasing.

The game ball entering the warp inlet 2503 and guided by the passage recess 2510a and the upper warp passage cover 2531 is supplied to the front end of the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520 arranged in the distribution space recess 2510c in front view. .. Then, the game ball supplied to the left end of the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520 rolls to the left in the front view along the inclination of the rolling surface 2521, and passes through the lowest discharge portion 2522. And rolls to the left of the discharge portion 2522. The left side of the discharging portion 2522 in the rolling surface 2521 is inclined so that the left end side becomes higher as shown in the figure, so that the game ball climbs up the slope, the rolling speed is attenuated, and the speed becomes 0. Then, the rolling of the rolling surface 2521 starts rightward according to the inclination of the rolling surface 2521.

Since this rolling surface 2521 has a larger inclination angle on the right side than the discharging section 2522 than on the left side, it is difficult for the game ball rolling from the left side to the right direction to climb the slope on the right side, and at the rear side by the discharging section 2522. Since it is guided to the guide surface 2524 on the left side of the ridge 2523 with a high probability, it is distributed to the left side (warp exit 2505 side) in front view by the ridge 2523. The game ball that is guided by being distributed to the guide surface 2524 on the left side with respect to the ridge portion 2523 enters the opening 2551 of the lower warp passage member 2550 through the right opening portion 2510d of the center base 2510, and the lower warp passage member. It is supplied to the stage 2506 (first stage 2506a) from the warp outlet 2505 through 2550.

In this stage 2506, since the warp outlet 2505 is arranged at the left end of the first stage 2506a when viewed from the front, the game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2506a moves to the right of the first stage 2506a. Rolling is started and the first stage 2506a is rolled in the left-right direction while there is momentum of rolling of the game ball. Then, the game ball rolling on the first stage 2506a is discharged forward from the guide portion 2506e and is supplied to the second stage 2506b on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2506a. Also in this second stage 2506b, while there is momentum of rolling of the game ball, the second stage 2506b rolls in the left-right direction and is discharged from the guide portion 2506e into the front game area 1100.

By the way, a chance entrance 2506c is opened substantially in the center of the first stage 2506a, and when a game ball rolling on the first stage 2506a enters the chance entrance 2506c, a chance exit on the lower side of the second stage 2506b. 2506d is released into the game area 1100. This chance exit 2506d is located immediately above the first starting opening 2201 as shown in FIG. 110, etc., and the game ball discharged from the chance exit 2506d is accepted into the first starting opening 2201 with a high probability.

On the other hand, when the game ball discharged rearward from the discharge portion 2522 of the distribution member 2520 is distributed to the left side of the ridge portion 2523 in front view, it is guided by the guide surface 2524 on the left side of the ridge portion 2523 to cover the left passage rear cover. 2540 to discharge slope 2542. Then, the game ball supplied to the discharge slope 2542 rolls forward in accordance with the inclination, passes through the left opening 2510e of the center base 2510, and is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 at the lower end of the left extension 2510b. R. Therefore, when the game ball entering the warp entrance 2503 is distributed to the left side, that is, the discharge opening 2508 side by the ridge portion 2523 of the distribution member 2520, it is not supplied to the stage 2506 but returned to the game area 1100 and left route 1100L. Will flow down again.

In addition, a game ball that flows down from the upper part in the game area 1100 to the left route 1100L and has not entered the warp entrance 2503 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 is formed on the lower left side of the warp entrance 2503. By the shelf portion 2510f of the center base 2510 thus formed, it is guided in the left direction when viewed from the front, and enters the entrance 2507 opened near the inner circumference of the game area 1100. Then, the game ball that has entered the entrance 2507 is guided by the guide passage 2532a of the guide passage cover 2532 onto the guide piece 2510h that forms a part of the upper portion of the distribution space recess 2510c of the center base 2510. The game ball entering the entrance 2507 and being guided by the guide passage 2532a can be visually recognized from the player side through the guide passage cover 2532.

The guide passage 2532a and the guide piece 2510h are located immediately above the left end in front view of the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520, and the game ball that has entered the entrance 2507 is distributed to the player as if it were distributed. The illusion of being guided to member 2520 can be provided. The game ball guided to the guide piece 2510h through the guide passage 2532a is guided rearward by the guide piece 2510h, and passes through the passage opening 2510g of the center base 2510 to the left passage rear cover 2540 on the rear side of the center base 2510. Be induced. Then, the game ball guided to the left passage rear cover 2540 is guided by the guide wall 2541 on the rear side of the distribution member 2520 to the discharge slope 2542 arranged below the distribution member 2520, and then discharged. It rolls forward by the slope 2542, passes through the left opening 2510e of the center base 2510, and is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 at the lower end of the left extension 2510b.

Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the left route 1100L in the game area 1100 and has not entered the warp entrance 2503, enters the entrance 2507, passes through the guide passage 2532a, etc., and is discharged from the outlet 2508 to the left root in the game area 1100. It is discharged again to 1100L.

On the other hand, on the right side of the window 2501 in the center role object 2500 as viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 146 and the like, the game ball flowing down to the right route 1100R side is the center base in the attacker passage 2509a from the peripheral wall part 2502 of the center role object 2500. It enters into the branch passage 2510k of 2510 and is sent to the branch space 2510l. In the branch space 2510l, a branch sensor 2620 is arranged immediately below the downstream end of the branch passage 2510k and is detected by the branch sensor 2620 with high probability. The branch sensor 2620 is in a non-detection state in a normal game state (a state in which the branch sensor is not valid).

The game ball sent to the branch passage 2510k of the center base 2510 is sent from the lower right corner of the branch passage 2510k in a front view to the second attacker space 2510n through the connecting passage 2510m. At the entrance of the second attacker space 2510n, a guide portion 2510p inclined so as to be lowered toward the second special winning opening 2509 is formed, and the game ball is directed to the second big winning opening 2509 by the guide portion 2510p. Run down. Then, in a normal state, the second special winning opening 2509 is closed by the second opening/closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570, and the game ball guided by the guiding portion 2510p is set to the second opening/closing member 2572. The acceptance into the special winning opening 2509 is blocked, and the front left side of the second opening/closing member 2572 in the second attacker space 2510n flows down.

At this time, in the second opening/closing member 2572, the stopper piece 2572d is in contact with the stopper portion 2571j provided on the left side of the lower right protruding portion 2571i of the unit base 2571, and rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view. Has been blocked. Therefore, the game ball from the guiding portion 2510p comes into contact with the right side of the blade portion 2572a of the second opening/closing member 2572 to exert a force to rotate the second opening/closing member 2572 in the counterclockwise direction. However, the second rotation member 2572 does not rotate in the counterclockwise direction.

The game ball that has not flowed into the second special winning opening 2509 and has flowed down the second attacker space 2510n is the inclined surface 2582a of the lower right front cover 2582 of the second starting opening unit 2580 that forms the bottom of the second attacker space 2510n. It rolls to the left in the front view, and is discharged downward from the left end of the inclined surface 2582a to the outside of the second attacker space 2510n.

Then, the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 is arranged immediately below the left end of the inclined surface 2582a in the second starting opening unit 2580, and the game balls discharged downward from the second attacker space 2510n of the attacker passage 2509a are , Will pass through the gate portion 2585a with a high probability. The game ball that cannot pass through the gate portion 2585a will flow down through either the left or right side of the gate portion 2585a. The game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a of the gate member 2585 is detected by the gate sensor 2586 and guided to the rear side, and the guide passage 2587a of the passage member 2587 arranged on the rear side causes the lower frame of the gate portion 2585a. It is guided into the shaped barrier portion 2585b and flows down the front surface of the second starting port 2587b.

In the present embodiment, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the ordinary lottery result is drawn, and the door member 2589 that closes the second starting opening 2587b according to the drawn ordinary lottery result. Open and close. Specifically, in a normal state, the plunger 2590a of the starting opening solenoid 2590 of the second starting opening unit 2580 is lowered downward by its own weight, and the lowering of the plunger 2590a causes the first link member 2591 and the second link member 2592. The door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 rises in a substantially vertical state through the to close the second starting port 2587b. That is, in the normal state, the second starting port 2587b is closed by the door member 2589, and the game ball cannot be received.

When the normal lottery result selected based on the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2586 is “miss”, the starting opening solenoid 2590 is not energized and the plunger 2590a remains in the lowered state. Therefore, when the normal lottery result is "miss", as shown in FIG. 146, the door member 2589 closes the second starting port 2587b, and the game ball flows down from the barrier portion 2585b through the gate portion 2585a. Passes through the front side of the door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 without being received by the second starting port 2587a, flows down onto the guide member 2584, and is discharged leftward in front view by the guide member 2584.

On the other hand, when the normal lottery result selected by lottery based on the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2586 is “win”, the starting opening solenoid 2590 is energized to move the plunger 2590a upward, and the first link member 2591 and the second link. The door portion 2589a of the door member 2589 is rotated via the member 2592 in the direction in which the tip end thereof moves forward, and the second starting port 2587b is opened (see FIG. 147). In this state, the game ball that has flowed down from the barrier portion 2585b through the gate portion 2585a comes into contact with the back side of the door member 2589 that has rotated forward and is guided to the second starting opening 2587b side, and the second starting opening 2587b. Will be accepted by. Then, the game ball received in the second starting opening 2587b is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2593 and then discharged downward through the discharging passage 2587c.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the ordinary lottery result is immediately drawn, and when the drawn ordinary lottery result is “hit”, the start opening solenoid 2590 is immediately displayed. Since the second starting port 2587b is energized and can be received, the gaming ball in which the "hit" is drawn is received in the second starting port 2587b with a very high probability.

Further, in the second attacker unit 2570 in the present embodiment, the second attacker solenoid 2574 is energized in accordance with the special lottery result obtained by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. Then, the plunger 2574a retracts into the second attacker solenoid 2574, and the second opening/closing member 2572 rotates clockwise in the front view via the link member 2575 (see FIG. 148). In this state, the tip of the blade portion 2572a of the second opening/closing member 2572 is separated from the upper end of the second special winning opening 2509 in the right direction when viewed from the front, and is located on the right side of the left end of the guiding portion 2510p of the center base 2510. The game ball can be received in the second big winning opening 2509. Further, in this state, the second opening/closing member 2572 is in a state in which the stopper piece 2572d is in contact with the stopper portion 2571j provided in the guiding portion 2571f of the unit base 2571, and the rotation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted. Has become.

Then, the game ball guided by the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510 passes through the second special winning opening 2509, is guided by the guide portion 2571f of the unit base 2571, is detected by the second count sensor 2578, and is received. It is discharged rearward from the downstream end of the ball passage 2571l on the rear side of the unit base 2571 through the passage 2571d from the portion 2571e. At this time, since the game ball guided from the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510 contacts the shaft portion 2752b of the blade portion 2572a of the second opening/closing member 2572, the game ball contacts the tip of the blade portion 2572a. Compared with the above, the impact of the moment related to the second opening/closing member 2572 becomes smaller, and the second opening/closing member 2572 can be made less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the second attacker unit 2570, since the lower end side of the second opening/closing member 2572 is supported rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction near the lower end of the second special winning opening 2509, the second opening/closing When the member 2572 is rotated to the open position, as shown in FIG. 148, the tip (upper end) side of the second opening/closing member 2572 rotates in the direction approaching the guiding portion 2510p. As a result, the second opening/closing member 2572 is bridged between the guide portion 2510p and the second special winning opening 2509, so that the game ball guided by the guide portion 2510p moves from the guide portion 2510p to the second position. By rolling the second opening/closing member 2572 and being received in the second big winning opening 2509, the impact acting on the second opening/closing member 2572 due to the flow of the game ball can be reduced, and the second opening/closing member 2572 is damaged. Can be difficult.

Further, when the second opening/closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 is rotated from the open position to the closed position, the tip (upper end) of the second opening/closing member 2572 is guided by the guiding portion 2510p to the flow path of the game ball. Since it rotates in a direction away from the guide portion 2510p so as to block the game ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball guided from the guide portion 2510p from being accepted into the second big winning opening 2509 at this timing. Therefore, at the time of a big hit game or the like, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of game balls from being accepted into the second special winning opening 2509, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. it can.

In the second attacker unit 2570 of this embodiment, when the second opening/closing member 2572 is in the open position, the game ball passes between the tip of the second opening/closing member 2572 and the lower passage wall 2510j of the guiding portion 2510p. Possible gaps are formed. Therefore, when the game ball is released from the inclined portion 2510q side to the second open/close member 2572 when the second open/close member 2572 is in the open position, the game ball passes between the second open/close member 2572 and the passage wall 2510j. There is.

[2-6. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 152. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the rear. Also, FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main constituent members and seen from the front, and FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main constituent members and seen from the rear. is there.

The back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150, the front side is open, and the rear wall 3010a is provided with an opening 3010b through which the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 faces and penetrates in the front-back direction. A box 3010 is provided. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is a box-shaped opening on the front side and has a substantially rectangular opening 3010b penetrating in the front-rear direction in the rear wall 3010a, and extends outward from the outer periphery of the front end and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150. And a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c. The opening 3010b of the back box 3010 is formed smaller than the outer shape of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 when viewed from the front.

Although detailed description is omitted, the rear box 3010 is provided with appropriate positions for the effect units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3500, 3600, 3700, 3800, mounting holes for mounting boards and covers, mounting bosses, and the like. Is formed on.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a panel relay board 3020 mounted on a rear surface of the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010b and at a position from the center in the left-right direction in front view to the right side, and the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010. A lamp drive board 3021 mounted on the rear surface below the opening 3010b and on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view, and a lamp drive board cover 3022 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 to cover the rear side of the lamp drive board 3021. A motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 on the right side of the opening 3010b in a front view, and a motor drive board cover 3024 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 to cover the rear side of the motor drive board 3023, A front lamp relay board 3025 attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 above the motor drive board 3023, and a front lamp relay board cover 3026 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 to cover the rear side of the front lamp relay board 3025. It has and.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back rear effect unit relay board 3027 mounted on the front side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 above the opening 3010b, and a front side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 on the right side of the opening 3010b in front view. And a rear movable movable decorative body unit relay substrate 3028 to be attached.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 along the inner circumference of the opening 3010b, and a pair of decorative frames 3040 with decorations on the front surface and the back wall 3010a of the back box 3010. The lock mechanism 3050 is attached to the rear surface on the left side of the opening 3010b in a front view and detachably supports the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged in the center of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction below the opening 3010c in the back box 3010, and is attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. Lower back left production unit 3200 and lower back right production unit 3300, which are arranged on the left and right sides of 3100 and attached to the front surface of rear wall 3010a of back box 3010, respectively, and lower front left production unit 3200 and lower front production unit 3300 front surface. On the left and right sides of the opening 3010c in the back box 3010 and attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3010a respectively, and the left and right sides of the opening 3010c in the back box 3010 and The back left production unit 3600 and the back right production unit 3700 respectively arranged on the front side of the back rear production unit 3500, and the back production arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and on the front side of the back rear production unit 3500. And a unit 3800.

The lower middle production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 has a sub display unit 3110 provided with a sub liquid crystal display device 3111, an elevating unit 3130 that moves up and down together with the sub display unit 3110, and an elevating unit 3130 and a sub display unit 3110 in a game state. And a drive unit 3150 for driving the lower back.

The lower back left effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 is arranged on the left side of the lower back left movable decoration 3210 imitating a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and on the left side of the lower back left movable decoration 3210 when viewed from the front. The back lower left outer movable decorative body 3220, the back lower left inner movable decorative body 3210, and the back lower left outer movable decorative body 3220, which imitate different characters from the back lower left movable movable decorative body 3210, are respectively set according to the game state. It is provided with a lower back left drive unit 3250 that moves up and down independently.

The back lower right production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged on the back lower right movable decorative body 3310 imitating a different character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and on the right side of the back lower right movable decorative body 3310 when viewed from the front. The back lower right outer movable decoration 3320 imitating a character different from the back lower right inner movable decoration 3310, the back lower right inner movable decoration 3310, and the back lower right outer movable decoration 3320 are respectively set according to the game state. And a lower back right drive unit 3350 that independently moves up and down.

The ball discharging unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is received in the general winning opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the first starting opening 2201 of the starting opening unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2301 of the front side unit 2300, and the rear side of the game panel 1150. Ball discharge passage member 3410 for guiding and discharging the game ball guided to, a general winning opening sensor 3421 for detecting the game balls received in the general winning openings 2101 and 2301, and a first starting opening 2201 for receiving It is provided with a first starting opening sensor 3422 that detects the game ball that has been played, and a magnetic detection sensor 3423 that can detect the magnetism near the first starting opening 2201.

The back-rear effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 imitates a predetermined item according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and extends in the left-right direction over the substantially entire width of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010, and a back-removable decorative body 3510. Movable rear-rear and rear-rear drive unit 3530, which supports the left end of the decorative body 3510 in a front view so as to be vertically movable and is attached to the front-rear left side of the opening 3010b in the front face of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and the rear-rear movable unit 3530. A rear rear right/left drive unit 3560 is provided that supports the right end of the decorative body 3510 in a front view so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front view right side of the opening 3010b in the front surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010.

The back left production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 includes a back left movable decoration unit 3610 in which a plurality of flower-like decorations are formed on the front, and a back left movable decoration 3610 in a front view back box depending on a game state. And a back left drive unit 3650 that rotates to the center side of the opening 3010b of 3010.

The back right production unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 includes a back right movable decoration body unit 3710 having a plurality of flower-like decorations formed on the front surface, and a back right movable decoration body 3710 in a front view back box depending on a game state. Rear right drive unit 3750 rotated to the center of the opening 3010b of 3010, and the rear side of the game panel 1150 which is attached to the front side of the rear right drive unit 3750 and is received by the second special winning opening 2509 and the second starting opening 2587b. It is provided with a ball discharge member 3790 that guides and discharges the game balls guided to.

The back-side effect unit 3800 of the back unit 3000 includes a back-side movable decoration unit 3810 on the front of which a plurality of flower-shaped decorations and a relief imitating a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are formed. , A back drive unit 3850 that rotates the back movable decoration unit 3810 toward the center of the opening 3010b of the back box 3010 in front view in accordance with the game state.

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this embodiment will be described. The main liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. As shown in FIGS. 114, 115, etc., the main liquid crystal display device 1900 includes fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from the left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing pieces 1902. be able to.

Specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is adapted to be inserted from the rear side into a recess formed in the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010, and two fixed portions protruding from the right side in front view are fixed. Inserting the piece 1902 into the liquid crystal fixing portion (not shown) of the back box 3010, and fixing the fixing piece 1902 protruding from the left piece in front view by the lock mechanism 3050 supported on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It can be attached to the back box 3010 with.

In addition, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 153), and the like on the rear side, as shown in FIG. 115, and a peripheral control board box. A volume 1912 extending rearward from the lower portion of 1910 is provided. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3, and the like.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of main boards 4000 is configured to include a main control board 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls a payout of game balls and the like. A group of peripheral control boards 4010 is a peripheral control section 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control section 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. , A main control I/O port 4100b as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit 4100h to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d and RAM 4100e as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first starting port sensor 3422 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting port 2201 and a second starting port sensor for detecting the game ball received in the second starting port 2587b. Detecting signals from the general winning a prize sensor 3421 for detecting the game balls received in 2593 and the award winning openings 2101 and 2301 are respectively input through the main control I/O port 4100b, the gate sensor 2586 and the general winning opening. Detection signals from the sensor 3421, the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, and the magnetic detection sensor 3423 are input via the panel relay board 3020 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I/O port 4100b. It is supposed to be done.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the start port solenoid 2590, the first opening solenoid 2590, and the first control solenoid drive circuit 4100g. The drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2107 and the second attacker solenoid 2574, and the first special symbol display is performed via the main control I/O port 4100b, the panel relay substrate 3020, and the function display substrate 1191 or the normal symbol display substrate 1191a. Device 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol memory display 1184, second special symbol memory display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol memory display 1188, game state display 1183, round display A drive signal is output to the device 1190.

In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3422, the second starting port sensor 2593, the gate sensor 2586, the branch sensor 2620, the first count sensor 2111, and the second count sensor 2578 are non-contact type electromagnetic sensors. While a proximity switch of the type is used, a contact type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3421. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b, and frequently passes through the gate portion 2585a and the branch sensor 2620, so that the first starting opening sensor 3422 and the second starting opening. The detection of the game ball by the sensor 2593 and the gate sensor 2586 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3422, the second starting port sensor 2593, the branch sensor 2620, and the gate sensor 2586. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509 are opened, and the game balls frequently enter, so the first count sensor 2111 and the second The detection of the game ball by the count sensor 2578 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 also use proximity switches having high durability and long life. On the other hand, the general winning a prize sensor 2421 does not frequently occur in the general winning a prize openings 2101 and 2301 in which the game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3421.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various kinds of information regarding games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a sends various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I/O port 4100b. (The main control board 4100 and the peripheral control section 4140 are electrically connected to each other by a harness (not shown)). When the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the RAM 4100e in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become lower than the power failure notification voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, as shown in FIG. 153, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of the game balls and the payout control section 4111 for performing various controls relating to the payout and the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 585. A firing control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720. , A tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 153, as shown in FIG. 153, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various kinds of control related to payout in the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I/O port 4111b as an I/O device, an external WDT 4111c (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally, and an award. A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU 4111a has not only its built-in ROM and RAM, but also built-in functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various kinds of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various kinds of commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port 4111b, or the main control board. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 is input via the payout control I/O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the out-of-ball switch 750 is input. The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 may be input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted through the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

Further, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first the payout control input. It is inputted to the circuit 4111e and inputted to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full in the stored game balls is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the board 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I/O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 with an error LED indicator. A signal for displaying on the 4130 is output to the error LED indicator 4130 via the payout control I/O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is issued via the payout control I/O port 4111b. Then, the data is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED indicator 4130 is a segment indicator and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on a detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotor 748 is provided at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. And the game ball are engaged with each other in the vicinity of the entrance of the payout rotating body 748 to make it difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, Indicates that there is a problem in the counting sensor 751 based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it means that “retry error” (specifically, The fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it means “full tank” (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). That the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR not connected" ( The fact that the electrical connection has been cut off in any part from the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock" (specifically, , That the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first transmitted via the frequency display board 365, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 through the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I/O port. It is received by 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c to the CR unit connection terminal board. It outputs to 874, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input into the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Firing controller]
As shown in FIG. 153, the firing control unit 4120, which performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and the ball forwarding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585, has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to firing are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b so that 100 gaming balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball-sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

From the touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or the finger touches the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and the firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's intention. The detection signal is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay substrate 192 and then the main relay terminal plate 880, and then to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, which electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506, is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main relay terminal. It is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via the plate 880.

The launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d launches a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with launch strength corresponding to the rotary position of the front of the rotary handle body 506, based on the signal from the rotary position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e supplies a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay substrate 192 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse. By the output, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 301 of the dish unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current By stopping the output of, the game ball received by the ball sending member 584 is sent to the side of the hitting ball launching device 650. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 is provided with a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 4110 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 4110 when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 153, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a main liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control section 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3111.

[3-3A. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 153, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 4010 performs peripheral sound control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. The sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to the lamp drive board 3021 or the game board. The motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port for outputting drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in FIG. Door side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3023 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, and provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. Door-side drive emission data composed of a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like, and door-side drive emission data from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the peripheral panel Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base substrate 194 via the relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, or displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is displayed on the liquid crystal display. In addition to transmitting from the control unit serial I/O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c.

Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. The speaker 821 is controlled so that music and sound effects according to various effects are played, and is provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. The speakers 130, 222, 262 and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 are controlled so that music and sound effects suitable for various effects are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

The peripheral control unit 4140 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Using WDT together, it diagnoses whether its own system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input/output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 kilo (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, movable body drive command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3021 and the motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. , A plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display command are used, and in the present embodiment, a bit rate of 250 kbps is set.

The lamp driving board 3021 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 is provided with a lighting signal or a blinking signal on the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 based on the received door frame side lighting blink command. The game board 4 is provided with a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received lighting and blinking command on the game board side, which is output to the LEDs of the respective decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. It outputs to the LED of each decorated board.

The motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. It outputs to 414, each drive motor etc. with which the game board 4 was equipped, a solenoid, etc.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 is provided. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are transmitted to the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the back box. Input may be made via a lamp drive board 3021 or a motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the lamp drive board 3021 and the motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay terminal board. From the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via 882, or from the speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the lamp drive board 3021 and the motor drive board 3023 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. , Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. that match various effects flow. In the present example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. By transmitting an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal including a lower speaker 391 described later or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the bass speaker 821. , It is possible to present more realistic sound effects (sound effects).

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 153, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 in the peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. 153, has a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that controls display of the above-described main liquid crystal display device 1900 and sub liquid crystal display device 3111, and a main liquid crystal display device 1900 and sub liquid crystal display A character ROM 4150d that stores various data of a screen displayed on the device 3111 and a character RAM 4150e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred and copied.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or Drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, and A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. Has been done.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. Drawing data is generated and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, it outputs a running signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP4150c adopts a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is held. This is a method of outputting data to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111.

The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device. This will affect the speed of drawing on 3111. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before expanding the sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. For example, when various people are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Accordingly, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a position arranged on the screen or in a vertical relationship when the sprites are overlapped with each other (hereinafter, referred to as "order of sprite superposition"), and the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. 3111.

The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, one character can be used for expression, and in the case of a comparatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six characters arranged in horizontal 2×vertical 3 can be used for expression. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, more characters can be used for expression. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 have main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel sequentially from the left to the right when viewed from the front, and crossing the main scanning. The sub-scanning is performed by repeatedly performing the main scanning in the direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 are subjected to main scanning from the front side. The pixels are sequentially output from the left to the right as viewed, to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly when the drawing data for the next line is input, the next line is drawn. Based on the drawing data of one minute, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line as main scanning from left to right when viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111.

[4. Game contents]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are changed to the game panel 1150. The game is started by being driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front surface of the game ball. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 1100 will flow down in the game area 1100 on the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. In addition, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the contact of the game balls with the obstacle nails causes the flow of the game balls. While the speed is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed.

When the game ball struck to the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side 1100L side in front view, that is, the left side in front view from the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center character 2500, The left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down between the plurality of protrusions 2512. When the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2503 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center role object 2500, the distribution member 2520 provided in the warp passage 2504 is transferred. The discharge portion 2522 that is supplied to the moving surface 2521 and that is arranged substantially in the center of the rolling surface 2521 is discharged to the ridge portion 2523 and is returned to the warp outlet 2505 side supplied to the stage 2506 or inside the game area 1100. It is distributed to one of the outlets 2508 side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are distributed to the warp exit 2505 side with high probability.

Then, the game balls distributed to the warp exit 2505 side by the distribution member 2520 are supplied from the warp exit 2505 to the stage 2506. In this stage 2506, the warp outlet 2505 supplies the left end of the first stage 2506a in the stage 2506, and after the first stage 2506a rolls in the left-right direction, it is discharged forward from the lowest position of the guide portion 2506e. Then, the game ball released from the first stage 2506a to the front is supplied to the second stage 2506b arranged on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2506a, and the second stage 2506b is rolled to the left and right direction most. From the lowered portion, the flow is discharged back into the game area 1100 above the first starting opening 2201 in the starting opening unit 2200 in the front.

When the game ball rolling on this stage 2506 enters the chance entrance 2506c opened to the rear in the left-right center of the first stage 2506a, the chance exit 2506d opened immediately above the first start opening 2201 enters the game area 1100. It is discharged and is likely to be accepted into the first starting port 2201. Then, when the game balls are received by the first starting port 2201 and detected by the first starting port sensor 3422, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are temporarily displayed as the count value of the prize ball number counter. Remembered. In addition, when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of times of special symbol fluctuation display reaches 390 times after the end of the previous jackpot gaming state, it becomes a jackpot), the count of the prize ball counter The main control board 4100 transmits a predetermined payout command to the payout control board 4110 so that the number of prize balls stored in the value is paid out, and the payout control board 4110 pays out the prize ball device 740 according to the payout command. By controlling the motor 744, the game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301.

In addition, when the game ball released from the stage 2506 into the game area 1100 does not enter the first starting port 2201 and flows down to the left side of the first starting port 2201, a front side unit 2300 arranged downstream is used. There is a possibility of winning in the general winning opening 2301, and when a game ball enters the general winning opening 2301 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3421, the main control board 4100 causes the payout control board 4110 based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 according to the payout command, and the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 is controlled to give a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls to the upper plate 301. To pay out.

Also, when the game ball released from the stage 2506 into the game area 1100 flows into the right side of the first starting opening 2201 without winning the first starting opening 2201, it is extremely rare that the general winning opening of the attacker unit 2100. There is a case to win 2101. Also, when the first big winning opening 2102 is open due to a big hit game or the like, it is possible to win the first big winning opening 2102 with a high probability.

By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2503, it is guided leftward in front view by the shelf portion 2510f of the center base 2510 and enters the entrance 2507 opened at the left end. Then, it is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 below the distribution member 2520. Then, the game ball discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2508 is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 below the center accessory 2500 by the left shelf 2302 of the front side unit 2300, and the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility of winning in the general winning opening 2301 of the front side unit 2300 arranged below. Note that the game ball released from the outlet 2508 has a lower probability than the game ball emitted from the stage 2506 to the game area 1100, but there is a possibility of winning in the first starting port 2201.

On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100 enters the right route 1100R on the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall portion 2502 of the center character 2500, the center character It passes through a narrow gap between the outer periphery on the right side of 2500 and the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and enters into the attacker passage 2509a which is opened in the inner periphery of the game area 1100 near the stop portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A.

The game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2509a passes through the branch passage 2510k, the branch space 2510l, the communication passage 2510m, and the second attacker space 2510n, and from the downstream end of the second attacker space 2510n to the gate portion of the second starting opening unit 2580. It is discharged just above 2585a. The game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2509a by right-handing has a very high probability of winning in the second special winning opening 2509 when the second special winning opening 2509 is open due to a big hit game or the like.

The game ball released immediately above the gate portion 2585a enters the gate portion 2585a with an extremely high probability, is detected by the gate sensor 2586, and then passes through the front side of the second special winning opening 2587b into the game area 1100. Is released.

At this time, when the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, an ordinary random number as an ordinary lottery result is generated in the main control board 4100 based on the detection signal. Based on this normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is displayed in a variable manner (for example, the normal symbol display device 1189 consisting of two red and green LEDs alternately emits light) for a predetermined time ( For example, between 0.1 seconds and 1 second) a normal symbol based on an ordinary random number (ordinary lottery result) extracted after a lapse of time is displayed as a stop (one of the two LEDs of the ordinary symbol display device 1189 emits light). To be done. In the present embodiment, similar variable display is also performed on the normal symbol display board 1191a provided in the second starting opening unit 2580. This normal symbol variation display is performed based on a normal symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

Specifically, if the ordinary random number that is drawn is a “normal hit” random number, it is stopped and displayed with an ordinary symbol that suggests a hit (ordinary symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the ordinary random number that is drawn is an “ordinary lost” random number. In the case of, a stop display is displayed with a normal symbol that suggests a loss (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red). Then, when the ordinary pattern indicating "ordinary hit" is stopped and displayed, the door member 2589 that closes the second starting opening 2587b rotates in the opening direction for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds to 3 seconds). Then, the game ball can be won in the second starting opening 2587b.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to be an extremely short time as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the door member 2589 causes the starting opening solenoid 2590 at the timing of whether or not the gaming ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a and has been selected for "normal hit" reaches the front side of the door member 2589 that closes the second starting opening 2587b. By this, it becomes possible to rotate and receive in the second starting port 2587b, and when "normal hit" is drawn, it is received in the second starting port 2587b with a very high probability.

Then, when the game ball is passed to the second starting opening 2587b by passing through the gate portion 2585a and selecting "normal hit", it is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2593, and based on the detection signal of the second starting opening sensor 2593. Then, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are temporarily stored in the count value of the prize ball number counter, as in the case where the first starting opening sensor 3422 is detected. Then, when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of times of special symbol fluctuation display reaches 390 times after the end of the previous jackpot gaming state, it becomes a jackpot), the count of the prize ball number counter The main control board 4100 transmits a predetermined payout command to the payout control board 4110 so that the number of prize balls stored in the value is paid out, and the payout control board 4110 pays out the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command. By controlling the motor 744, the game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301. In addition, as described above, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out for each entry of the game ball into each winning opening or starting opening without storing the payout.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball carries out a driving operation (so-called right-handed driving) passing through the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game passes through the gate portion 2585a with an extremely high probability and also passes through the gate portion 2585a. If the ball is drawn "normal hit", it will be accepted to the second starting port 2587b with a very high probability, so even a beginner or a player unfamiliar with the game can easily win the second starting port 2587b, and entertain the player. You can do it.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the player can easily win the game ball to the second starting opening 2587b by hitting the right side. When the number of game balls to be paid out increases, the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed becomes heavy, and there is a risk that the pachinko machine 1 will be hesitant to be installed. However, in the pachinko machine 1, if the number of game balls to be paid out by winning the game balls to the second starting opening 2587b is changed from, for example, 3 to 1, a special lottery for winning the second starting opening 2587b will be performed. The result lottery can reduce the burden on the game hall side while increasing the interest of the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed without any problem.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display 1189 in a variable display, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2586, the changing normal symbol is stopped and generated/extracted first. Until the result of the ordinary random number is determined, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary pattern variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2586 is temporarily stored, its display is suspended, and stored. The number of ordinary random numbers (also called the number of reservations) is normally displayed on the symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is made up of four LEDs, and the number of memories can be suggested by the number of each LED that is turned on, and in this example, up to four can be stored and displayed. If the number of stored memory exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2126 is discarded.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a and the "normal loss" is drawn, the door member 2589 that closes the second starting opening 2587b maintains the state in which the second starting opening 2587b remains closed. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2585a flows down on the front surface of the door member 2589 that closes the second starting opening 2587b, and the guide member 2584 causes the game at the diagonally upper right of the first major winning opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100. Emitted into region 1100. In addition, the game ball discharged from the guide member 2584 into the game area 1100 has a high probability of winning in the first big winning opening 2102 when the first big winning opening 2102 is in an open state due to a big hit game or the like. Therefore, in the case of a big hit game in which the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509 can be accepted, the game ball is easily hit by hitting right so that the game ball flows down the right route 1100R. It is possible to win a prize in the one big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509. Furthermore, when the second attacker unit 2570 controls the opening of the movable piece 2578b for a long time when the second special winning opening 2509 is opened, the specific count sensor 2578a can easily detect the game ball by right-handing. You can get V prize.

By the way, in the main control board 4100 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls are won in the first starting ports 2201 and 201a and the second starting port 2587b, and the first starting port sensor 3422 and the second starting port sensor 2593. When it is detected, the first start ports 2201 and 2011a generate and extract a predetermined first special random number, and the second start port 2587b generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number. Then, in the first special symbol display 1185 of the function display unit 1180, based on the first special random number extracted in the first starting port 2201,201a, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol) is started, The special symbol corresponding to the first special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result (first special lottery result). In the second special symbol display device 1186 of the function display unit 1180, the variable display of the special symbol (second special symbol) is started based on the second special random number extracted by the second starting opening 2578b, and the first special symbol is displayed. The special symbol corresponding to the two special random numbers is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result (second special lottery result). In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be simultaneously executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is more than the variable display of the first special symbol. Is also prioritized to be executed (priority change of the second special symbol). If such a priority change is made, even if there is a change hold regarding the first special symbol, those change starts until all the change displays of the second special symbol are completed (the change hold of the second special symbol is It will not be executed).

In these first special symbol display 1185 and second special symbol display 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode suggesting a "big hit", the opening/closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second attacker unit 2570 A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) in which the second opening/closing member 2572 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern occurs, and during that time, a game ball is won in the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509. , You can get more game balls. When one game ball wins the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301.

Incidentally, also in the first starting port 2201,201a, and the second starting port 2587b, similarly to the variable display of the normal symbol by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2585a, the first special symbol display device 1185 and the second special symbol When the special symbol is variably displayed on the display device 1186, or when the special symbol cannot be variably displayed, such as during a big hit game as a special advantageous gaming state, the game ball wins the starting openings 2201, 201a and the second starting opening 2587b. Then, when detected by the first starting port sensor 3422 and the second starting port sensor 2593, detection from the first starting port sensor 3422 and the second starting port sensor 2593 until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible. The first special random number and the second special random number extracted on the basis of the signal are temporarily stored and the display is put on hold, and the number of the stored special random numbers is displayed as the first special symbol memory display. It is displayed on the device 1184 and the second special symbol memory display device 1187.

Each of the first special symbol memory display device 1184 and the second special symbol memory display device 1187 is composed of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by a combination of the light emitting states of the LEDs that are turned off, turned on, and blinked. In this example, up to four of each can be stored and displayed. If the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded.

Here, since the priority change of the second special symbol is performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (held), the second special symbol storage display device 1187. The variation of the second special symbol that is held in priority is started, and after the digestion of all the stored second special random numbers is finished, the first special symbol that is held in the first special symbol storage display 1184. The fluctuation of the design is started.

Further, in the main control board 4100, the special random numbers of the first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting port sensor 3422 and the second starting port sensor 2593 are set to predetermined predetermined random numbers. By collating with a determination table (also referred to as a big hit determination table), it is determined whether the special random number is “miss” or “big hit”. In the main control board 4100, the symbol random number of the first symbol random number and the second symbol random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting port sensor 3422 and the second starting port sensor 2593 is a predetermined random number. By collating with a determination table (also referred to as a symbol determination table), the type of “big hit” (corresponding to “specification 1” to “specification 3” in FIG. 176B described later) is determined. In addition to the number of rounds in the big hit game, the type of opening of the V zone (short open or long open), the presence or absence of probability fluctuation after the big hit, and the time saving period etc. Can be associated.

When the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 sets the open/close member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second open/close member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 to the open state. After that, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed, or a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls satisfy either of the conditions for winning the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509. Then, the opening/closing pattern for closing the opening/closing member 2104 and the second opening/closing member 2572 (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, in the case of "16R big hit", 16 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. The number of rounds in which the second special winning opening 2509 is opened is defined in advance. For example, in the case of a 16R big hit, the second special winning opening 2509 is opened and closed in the 13th round, while in other rounds, Control for opening and closing the first special winning opening 2102 is performed. After the predetermined number of rounds, for the “big hit”, the big hit judgment table may be replaced with a big hit judgment table or the like at the time of high probability according to the extracted symbol random number.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the extracted first special random number or the second special random number is “specific big hit”, the main control board 4100, the first special symbol display 1185 of the function display unit 1180 and On the second special symbol display device 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests "specific jackpot", the detection signal of the game ball from the branch sensor 2620 can be accepted (branch sensor valid state), The opening/closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second opening/closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 suspends the occurrence of the special advantageous game state in which the opening/closing operation is performed in a predetermined pattern. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode suggesting "specific big hit" on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 makes a big hit ("specific big hit". )) is displayed, and an image prompting the player to perform a driving operation (right-handed) aiming at the branch sensor 2620 is displayed. After that, when the game ball right-handed by the player passes through the branch sensor 2620 in the branch space 2510l in the attacker passage 2509a and is detected, the opening/closing member 2104 and the second opening/closing member 2572 open/close in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state is generated, and a "specific jackpot" game of the number of rounds based on the first special random number and the second special random number is played.

In addition, the game balls hit into the game area 1100 are any of the general winning openings 2101 and 2301, the first starting opening 2201, the second starting opening 2587b, the first big winning opening 2102, and the second big winning opening 2509. Also, if no prize is won, the game area 1100 is provided at the lower end of the center in the left-right direction and is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 from the outlet 1151. In addition, regardless of which of the general winning openings 2101 and 2301, the first starting opening 2201, the second starting opening 2587b, the first big winning opening 2102, and the second big winning opening 2509, the winning game is won. The balls are discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being returned to the game area 1100.

The variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is designed to be directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 153). The variable display of symbols (decorative symbols) on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is performed by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. Controlled. As a result, since the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like control the variable display of the symbols on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like, which the player pays particular attention to, the result relating to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 or For one command, it is possible to prepare a plurality of variation patterns of symbols in advance and increase the variation patterns of symbols in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. Also, the "big hit game effect image" and the like displayed during the "big hit" game are controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. As a result, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image to be displayed without increasing the load of the arithmetic processing in the main control board 4100, and to make the pachinko machine 1 more entertaining to the player and not getting bored. Has become. Some of the characteristic displays in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment among the variable display and effect display of the symbols performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 will be described in detail in [9] and the like below.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in an advantageous state (for example, a time saving state), a right-handed hit is performed to promote the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 2587b. A part of the game ball, which was hit to the right with the aim of entering the starting opening 2587b but was not accepted by the second starting opening 2587b and was released to the first big winning opening 2102 side by the guiding member 2584, is the first starting opening. In order to be accepted by 2201a, a variation of the first special symbol is performed to some extent (although it is less than the number of variations of the second special symbol). That is, the first starting opening 2201a is arranged on the flow path of the game ball that can enter the second starting opening 2587b (corresponding to the flow path of the game ball when right-handed), so that the player can Even if the player does not want to enter the game ball into the starting opening 2201a, regardless of the intention of the player, at least a part of the game ball shot toward the second starting opening 2587b is the first. It can be received in the starting port 2201a. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is difficult to adjust which of the first starting opening 2201a and the second starting opening 2587b the game ball is received by the operation of the player. There is. However, it is not a disadvantage for the player that the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2201a regardless of the intention of the player, and the game ball is originally an out ball without being received in the second starting opening 2587. Is received in the first starting opening 2201a, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3 balls) are paid out, so that an additional benefit is given to the player.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2201a is not limited to the advantageous state. FIG. 188 is a schematic diagram for explaining the movement of the game ball in the vicinity of the first start opening and the first special winning opening. For example, in the big hit game before being controlled to the advantageous state, the player is urged to hit the right side so as to enter the game ball into the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509. At this time, As shown in FIG. 188, a part of the game ball that has been right-handed, passed through the gate portion 2585a, and discharged toward the first special winning opening 2102 by the guide member 2584 is received in the first starting opening 2201a. As described above, in the first starting opening 2201a, the game balls released toward the first big winning opening 2102 by the guide member 2584 are first at a predetermined winning ratio (for example, about 1/20 to 1/5). Since it is arranged in a position to enter the starting opening 2201a, not only in the advantageous state, but also during the big hit game, the game balls released to the first big winning opening 2102 side are first started at a predetermined entrance ratio. Accepted in mouth 2201a. And, even if the game ball is received in the starting opening (here, the first starting opening 2201a) during the big hit game, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, so that the incoming ball is not reached unless the upper limit of the reserved number is reached. The special random number (first special random number) selected based on is temporarily stored and its display is suspended. Then, since the first special random number that has been held will start its variation in the advantageous state that is controlled after the end of the big hit game, at the start of the advantageous state, the first special symbol is almost certainly held. The situation can be. In such a pachinko machine 1, which of the first start opening 2201a and the first special winning opening 2102 (or the second special winning opening 2509) the game ball is accepted can be adjusted by the operation of the player. Although it is difficult to construct, when a game ball that can enter the first big winning opening 2102 during the big hit game enters the first starting opening 2201a, a prize ball corresponding to the winning (winning) Since the payout (for example, 3 pieces) is made, the game balls held by the player are increased. That is, even if a game ball that should enter the first big winning opening 2102 is accepted by the first starting opening 2201a, it does not necessarily cause a disadvantage to the player, and conversely, the number of game balls increases. Special benefits are granted.

In addition to the control of the effect image, the peripheral control unit 4140 appropriately drives the drive motors and drive solenoids provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, the decorative board, and the like based on the command related to the lottery result. The movable effect and the light-emitting effect can be performed, and the player can be entertained by the movable effect and the light-emitting effect.

[5. Characteristic effect of the 2nd prize hole]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the second special winning opening 2509 arranged in the attacker passage 2509a in the center accessory 2500, a privilege such as a payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given. Therefore, according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 (for example, big hit game, etc.), the game ball is received by the second opening/closing member 2572 to the second special winning opening 2509. When the game ball is opened, the player tries to accept the game ball into the second special winning opening 2509 and performs a driving operation (right hitting in the present embodiment) such that the game ball enters the attacker passage 2509a. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player with the game ball driving operation. When the hit game ball enters the attacker passage 2509a and is guided by the guide portion 2510p, the guide portion 2510p guides the game ball toward the second big winning opening 2509, so that the game ball is extremely high. There is a probability that the game can be accepted into the second big winning opening 2509, and by accepting the game ball, a privilege such as payout of the game ball is given to entertain the player. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to receive the game ball into the variable second special winning opening 2509 that is opened and closed by the second opening/closing member 2572, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating entertaining of the player.

Further, when the second special winning opening 2509 in the attacker flow path 2509a is in the open state, it is possible to accept the game ball into the second special winning opening 2509 with a very high probability only by entering the game ball into the attacker passage 2509a. Even an inexperienced player such as a beginner can easily receive the game ball into the second winning hole 2509, and it is possible to reduce the feeling that the driving operation of the game ball is difficult, and entertain the game. It is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

Furthermore, since no obstacle nail is arranged on the attacker passage 2509a provided with the second special winning opening 2509 which is opened and closed by the second opening/closing member 2572, the flow (route) of the game balls in the attacker passage 2509a is stabilized. By doing so, the game ball that has entered the attacker passage 2509a can surely reach the guide portion 2510p, and the guide portion 2510p guides the game ball toward the second special winning opening 2509 to open the second big prize. It can be accepted by mouth 2509.

As described above in [2-5], the second special winning opening 2509 is provided with a specific area 2509b in which whether or not a game ball can enter is adjusted by moving the movable piece 2578b. The specific count sensor 2578a detects the passage of the game ball received in the second special winning opening 2509 that has been opened while the "long-time V opening control (V long opening)" of 2578b is being performed. The player can easily enter the specific area 2509b (V prize). In other words, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, "a specific area is opened for a long time (V long opening)", as described above regarding the easy winning of the game ball in the second big winning opening 2509. It is possible to easily win the game ball to the specific area 2509b during the big hit game associated with. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a special advantageous privilege that the game ball is V-winned to be controlled to a gaming state advantageous to the player (specifically, a high probability state) after the big hit game is given. Granted. Therefore, when the player wins the big hit (big hit of the V long open) in which the V open control is performed for a long time, it becomes possible to easily make the V win by only making a right-handed hit, and the V win is missed. It is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

Further, since the game balls that have entered the attacker passage 2509a and have not been received in the second special winning opening 2509 are released from the attacker passage 2509a into the game area 1100 again, the released downstream in the game area 1000 is released. There is a possibility that the gate portion 2586a provided on the side, the second starting opening 2587b, the general winning opening 2101, the first winning opening 2102, etc. can be accepted, and the game ball cannot be accepted into the second winning opening 2509. Even if you are disappointed with this, you can make a sense of expectation for accepting the game ball to the second start opening 2587b on the downstream side discharged from the attacker passage 2509a, and suppress the decline in interest in the game. can do.

In addition, since the game ball is guided toward the second special winning opening 2509 by the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510, the game ball guided from the guide portion 2510p is the first when the second special winning opening 2509 is in the open state. It becomes difficult to contact the second opening/closing member 2572, and it is possible to reduce the damage of the second opening/closing member 2572 due to the impact of the game ball contacting, and the player is interrupted by the damage of the second opening/closing member 2572. It is possible to prevent the annoyance from being reduced and the interest being lowered. Therefore, when a big hit game or the like in which the second special winning opening 2509 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, more game balls than usual are hit aiming at the second special winning opening 2509, and thus more games than usual. Although the ball comes into contact with the second opening/closing member 2572, as described above, the guiding part 2510p makes it difficult for the game ball to come into contact with the second opening/closing member 2572 in the open position, so many game balls are driven in. Even if the second opening/closing member 2572 is less likely to be damaged, the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage of the second opening/closing member 2572, and the game can be continuously enjoyed.

Furthermore, since the guide portion 2510p of the center base 2510 is inclined so that the extension line passes through the second special winning opening 2509 that opens to the right in the front view, the game ball is guided to the player to the guide portion 2510p. It is possible to recognize at a glance that it will be accepted into the second big winning opening 2509 when guided, and when the second big winning opening 2509 is in the open state, let the game ball enter the second big winning opening 2509. It can be recognized that the pachinko machine 1 is easy. Therefore, when the second special winning opening 2509 is in the open state, a driving operation aimed at the attacker channel 2509a (right) so that the game ball is guided to the player by the guide portion 2510p in the attacker channel 2509a. Can be positively performed, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining operation of the game ball and reduce the interest. In addition, as described above, it is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the game ball is surely accepted into the second special winning opening 2509 when the game ball is guided to the guiding portion 2510p, so that the pachinko machine for playing the game It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game on the present pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to easily select the present pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

In addition, since the guide portion 2510p is inclined so that the extension line passes through the second special winning opening 2509 that opens to the right in the front view, the game ball guided by the guide portion 2510p is moved to the second open state. It is possible to directly accept the second big winning opening 2509 without contacting the opening/closing member 2572, and it is possible to reduce the contact of the game ball with the second opening/closing member 2572 in the open state as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the second opening/closing member 2572 from being damaged by fatigue. On the other hand, when the second special winning opening 2509 is closed, the second opening/closing member 2572 rises substantially vertically, so that the game ball guided by the guiding portion 2510p is against the second opening/closing member 2572. Since the contact is made from the lateral direction, and the impact acting on the second opening/closing member 2572 is smaller than that in the case of making contact from the upper direction, the accumulation of fatigue is reduced and the second opening/closing member 2572 is prevented from being damaged. can do. From these, by preventing the second opening/closing member 2572 from being damaged, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage of the second opening/closing member 2572, so that the player is irritated by the interruption of the game. It is possible to avoid having to remember and reduce the interest, and to continue to enjoy the game.

Further, the second opening/closing member 2572 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2509 is made to rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and when opening and closing the second special winning opening 2509, the second opening/closing member 2572. Regardless of whether the second opening/closing member 2572 is rotated to the open position or the closed position, the outer shape of the second opening/closing member 2572 that is seen from the player does not change and only the direction thereof changes. This makes it easier to understand and makes it easier for the player to notice the opening and closing of the second special winning opening 2509. By avoiding noticing the opening and closing of the second special winning opening 2509, the player is prevented from feeling lost and the game is played. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest and to promptly drive a game ball aiming at the second special winning opening 2509 to the opened second big winning opening 2509, It is possible to suppress the entertaining of the player and the decrease in interest.

Further, since the lower end side of the second opening/closing member 2572 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction near the lower end of the second special winning opening 2509, the second opening/closing member 2572 is rotated to the open position. When it is moved, the tip (upper end) side of the second opening/closing member 2572 will turn in a direction of approaching the guide portion 2510p. As a result, the second opening/closing member 2572 is bridged between the guide portion 2510p and the second special winning opening 2509, so that the game ball guided by the guide portion 2510p moves from the guide portion 2510p to the second position. The second opening/closing member 2572 is rolled to be received in the second special winning opening 2509, and when the game ball is delivered from the guide portion 2510p to the second opening/closing member 2572, the game ball is flowed to the second opening/closing member 2572. The impact that acts can be reduced, and the second opening/closing member 2572 can be made less likely to be damaged. When the second opening/closing member 2572 rotates from the open position to the closed position, the leading end (upper end) of the second opening/closing member 2572 blocks the flow path of the game ball guided by the guiding portion 2510p. Since it rotates in a direction away from 2510p, it is possible to prevent the game ball guided from the guide portion 2510p from being received in the second special winning opening 2509 at this timing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of game balls from being received in the second special winning opening 2509, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, since the guide portion 2510p guides the game ball to flow down toward the lower end of the second special winning opening 2509, when the second big winning opening 2509 is in the open state, the game ball is surely delivered from the guiding portion 2510p. Can be received in the second big winning opening 2509, it is possible to reduce the contact of the game ball to the open second opening/closing member 2572 as much as possible, and the second opening/closing member 2572 is damaged by fatigue. Can be prevented. On the other hand, when the second special winning opening 2509 is in the closed state, the game ball guided from the guiding portion 2510p comes into contact with the vicinity of the lower end of the second opening/closing member 2572 which is rotatably supported. The lower end side of the opening/closing member 2572 is in a state of excellent impact resistance due to the contact of the game ball, and the second opening/closing member 2572 can be made less likely to be damaged. Therefore, by preventing the second opening/closing member 2572 from being damaged, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage of the second opening/closing member 2572, so that the player feels frustrated by the interruption of the game and is entertaining. It is possible to avoid lowering, and to continue to enjoy the game.

Moreover, all the game balls circulating in the attacker passage 2509a are guided toward the second special winning opening 2509 by the guiding portion 2510p, and the game is performed when the second special winning opening 2509 is in the open state by the second opening/closing member 2572. When the balls enter the attacker passage 2509a, all the game balls are guided toward the second special winning opening 2509 by the guiding portion 2510p, so that more game balls are accepted into the second special winning opening 2509. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the entertaining of the player and the decrease in interest. In addition, when the second special winning opening 2509 is opened, the game ball can be accepted into the second special winning opening 2509 simply by entering the game ball into the attacker passage 2509a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from getting tired of the game and to reduce the interest in the game. Furthermore, even in the case of a jackpot that can win a specific area 2509b in the second special winning opening 2509, it can be easily received in the specific area 2509b by only entering the game ball into the attacker passage 2509a. In such a big hit, it is possible to concentrate on the driving operation of the game ball aiming at the attacker passage 2509a, and it is possible to prevent the user from getting tired and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, a game ball that has been struck harder than a predetermined amount into the game area 1100 enters the attacker passage 2509a, and the game ball easily enters the attacker passage 2509a by a simple driving operation (right hitting). Since it can be done, when the second big winning opening 2509 in the attacker passage 2509a is in an open state according to the game state, even an inexperienced player such as a beginner can easily enter the game ball into the attacker passage 2509a, The game ball can be accepted with a high probability into the variable second special winning opening 2509 that is opened and closed by the second opening/closing member 2572, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and from having less interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the entrance to which the privilege is given, directly above the first starting opening 2201 in which there is a possibility that a special advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by receiving a game ball may occur. A stage 2506 is arranged upstream of the stage 2506, and when the game ball is discharged from the stage 2506, it is possible to let the player recognize that the game ball is accepted into the first starting opening 2201 and the stage 2506 is provided. A warp entrance 2503 into which a game ball can enter is opened on the outer periphery of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and when the game ball is entered into the warp entrance 2503, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2506 to the player. On the other hand, since it can be recognized at a glance, it is possible to allow the player to drive the game ball aiming at the warp entrance 2503 so that the game ball is supplied to the stage 2506. It is possible to entertain the game ball driving operation. Then, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 enters the warp entrance 2503, it circulates to the distribution member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 and is supplied to the stage 2506 by the distribution member 2520. Or, since the game ball is distributed to either the discharge port 2508 side returned to the game area 1100, the game ball does not necessarily be supplied to the stage 2506 just because the game ball enters the warp entrance 2503. The player can be attracted to the distribution member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 where the player's interest can be visually recognized, and the movement of the game ball supplied to the stage 2506 is enjoyed to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. You can

In addition, the game balls that have entered from the warp entrance 2503 by the distribution member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 are distributed to either the warp exit 2505 side that supplies the stage 2506 or the discharge opening 2508 side that returns to the game area 1100. Since the distribution member 2520 distributes the game ball to the warp exit 2505 side (stage 2506 side), the player can be excited and excited, and the player can move the game ball. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the game balls distributed to the warp exit 2505 side by the distribution member 2520 are supplied to the stage 2506 from the warp exit 2505, they roll on the stage 2506 like a conventional pachinko machine equipped with the stage 2506. Besides being able to entertain the movement of the game ball, it is possible to excite the player depending on whether or not the game ball is released from the portion of the stage 2506 that is highly likely to be received by the first starting opening 2201. With the distribution member 2520 and the stage 2506, it is possible to entertain the player in a double manner, and it is possible to entertain a game that has not been found in conventional pachinko machines.

Further, when the game ball released from the stage 2506 is received in the first starting opening 2201, a game ball is paid out and a special advantageous game state is generated. A special lottery result is drawn and a special advantageous game state can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel good and further to hit the game ball into the game area 1100, which can entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Furthermore, the game ball supplied to the distribution member 2520 in the warp passage 2504 reciprocally rolls in the left-right direction by the rolling surface 2521 that extends in the left-right direction and is curved so that both ends become high, and then, from the discharge portion 2522. Since it is discharged and is distributed to either the warp exit 2505 side or the discharge opening 2508 side by the ridge portion 2523, it is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball reciprocally rolling in the left and right direction, It is possible to confuse whether the game ball is distributed to the warp exit 2505 side or the discharge port 2508 side by reciprocally rolling in the left-right direction, so that the player is throbbing with respect to the distribution of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of distribution to the warp exit 2505 side (stage 2506 side) and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the game ball entering from the warp entrance 2503 is supplied to one end side in the horizontal direction of the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520, the game ball is surely reciprocally rolled in the horizontal direction on the rolling surface 2521. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from enjoying the movement of the game ball and lowering the interest. Further, since the game ball reciprocally rolls in the left-right direction on the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520, it is possible to lengthen the time from the supply of the game ball to the distribution member 2520 until the distribution thereof. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize how the game balls are distributed, to enjoy the movement of the game balls in the warp passage 2504, and to easily see where the game balls are distributed. The player can be excited and excited, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, in the distribution member 2520, since the probability that the game ball discharged from the discharge portion 2522 of the rolling surface 2521 is distributed to the warp exit 2505 side by the ridge portion 2523 is high, the game entered the warp entrance 2503. It is possible to reduce the number of times the player is discouraged by the balls being distributed to the outlet 2508 side and returned to the game area 1100, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. At the same time, the game balls are occasionally distributed to the discharge port 2508 side, which can increase the excitement for the distribution of the game balls by the distribution member 2520 and prevent the player from getting tired and lessening the interest. You can

Further, when the game ball hit aiming at the warp entrance 2503 passes between the warp entrance 2503 and the inner circumference of the game area 1100 without entering the warp entrance 2503, it is guided by the shelf portion 2510f of the center accessory 2500. Then, the game ball enters the entrance 2507 and is guided from the entrance 2507 to the upper side on the right end side of the rolling surface 2521 of the distribution member 2520 through the guide passage 2532a, so that the game ball is distributed to the player. It can be made to appear that the member 2520 (rolling surface 2521) is supplied and may be distributed to the stage 2506 side. Therefore, even if the player is disappointed that the driven game ball has not entered the warp entrance 2503, it can feel like being rescued by entering the entrance 2507 on the downstream side. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 154(A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 154(A), the main control board 4100 according to the present embodiment first stores various registers and RAM as the processing of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initializes the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 4100a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined that the data is stored, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed to save information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the recovery process.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random number, which is the number to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol In the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the variable random number used in the lottery process for the predetermined time required for the variable display control (variation time), the variable display of the special symbol. Reach (the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the same pattern and the middle decorative pattern is not yet stopped, or the left, middle and right decorative patterns are all changed in synchronization so that they are the same pattern. Reach random number used for lottery process of whether to display) or not, random number used for lottery process to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number (the first It is provided with a random number counter that holds random numbers such as one design random number, second design random number) and random numbers (ordinary random numbers) that are used in the lottery process for winning or losing when the door member 2589 operates.

In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first winning opening 2201 is started and won, the second winning opening 2587b is won. Even if the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, the reach effect execution rate can be set by acquiring the reach random number from a counter with a different range of random numbers. You may make it different, the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number, and the second special symbol, different from the first reach determination table. By providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be different.

In the processing of this step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only random numbers (fluctuating random numbers) among these random numbers that are not related to winning or losing are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this manner, basically only the process of step S2 is repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms.

FIG. 154(B) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

As shown in FIG. 154(B), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, the gate sensor 2586, the first starting opening sensor 3422, the second starting opening sensor 2593, the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, the general winning opening sensor 3421, etc. Detection signals from various switches are input. Then, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-described random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols and the ordinary symbols is stopped are updated and the random number counter Counter operation is performed.

Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. To execute. Although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the first special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a). Based on the two special symbol process flag), the corresponding process will be selectively executed.

Then, next, the main control MPU 4100a of the same main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for a win or loss which is an operation trigger of the door member 2589 as a process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the driving frequency of the door member 2589 is higher within a predetermined period after the end of a specific jackpot gaming state (jackings of specific 1 to specific 3 described later). Is configured to execute the lottery process (so-called time saving state). The number of continuation of the time saving state executed along with the big hit depends on the high/low state (high probability/low probability) of the big hit winning probability of the first and second special lottery when the big hit is won. In the state where the low-probability table is used (low-probability state), when the big hits of specific 1 to specific 3 are won, a 100-time saving state is given after the big hit, and a high-probability table higher than usual is used ( In the high probability state), if the special jackpots 1 to 3 are won, it is assumed that 165 time saving states are given after the jackpot. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area (V zone) within the second special winning opening 2509 during the big hit game of specific 1 to specific 3 (V winning), In order to control the game state after the big hit to a high probability state and to make it possible to adjust the V prize of the game ball during the big hit, in a specific round, the second big winning opening 2509 (or second Different opening/closing control is performed on the opening/closing member 2572) depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, when the big hit by the specific 1 or the specific 3 is performed, the V winning is realized almost certainly by performing the above-mentioned "V long open", while the "V short opening" is performed at the time of the big hit by the specific 2. As a result, the possibility of V winning is extremely low (see, for example, FIG. 176). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased only within a predetermined period which is controlled in the time saving state, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is shortened. When the lottery result is a win, such a time saving state is realized by extending the opening time of the door member 2589.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command similarly set in the predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 outputs information such as hit information (16R big hit, 12R big hit, 4R big hit) or the like, which is supplied to the hole management computer, as the next processing of step S18. Perform processing.

Then, next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 responds to the signals of the first count sensor 2111, the second count sensor 2578, etc. when the detection signals are in the ON state as the processing of step S19. The payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that the prize balls are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 and pays out a prize ball to the player. On the other hand, when the detection signals of the first starting port sensor 3422 and the second starting port sensor 2593 are turned on, the prize balls corresponding to these signals are temporarily stored in the count value of the prize ball number counter, and a predetermined value is stored. When the payout condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of times the variable display of special symbols reaches 390 times after the end of the previous big hit game state, it becomes a big hit), it is stored in the count value of the prize ball number counter. The payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that the number of prize balls is paid out. That is, even if the detection signals of the first starting opening sensor 3422 and the second starting opening sensor 2593 are turned on, the player does not immediately pay the prize ball, and the predetermined payout condition is satisfied. Until now, prize balls are not paid out.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next executes a storage process of checking the increase/decrease in the number of stored memories as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for allowing the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is ended when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). Becomes

By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process process (step S14).

Now, assuming that the random numbers provided for the various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 155, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first
On condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2593 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2587b) (step S31), the second special random number of the second special symbol is output from the random number counter. The second starting opening passing process such as acquiring and storing this in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the first starting port sensor 3422 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting port 2201) (step S33), the first special random number of the first special symbol is the random number. The first starting opening passage processing such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, it is determined whether or not the branch sensor valid flag indicating that the branch sensor valid state is controlled is set (step S35). If the branch sensor valid flag is set, the branch sensor valid state is determined. A branch sensor passage process (step S40) for monitoring whether or not the game ball passes through the sensor 2620 is executed. In this example, by the passage process is performed by the branch sensor, when it is determined to be a big hit related to the first special symbol (specific 1, big hit of 2), first in the first special symbol display 1185 Even after displaying the special symbol stop symbol, the big hit execution flag is not set and the big hit control process (step S41) is not executed until the game ball passes through the branch sensor 2620. You may do it. Similarly, if it is determined to be a big hit related to the second special symbol (specific big hit), even after displaying the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol indicator 1186, the above The big hit execution flag may not be set until the game ball passes the branch sensor 2620, and the big hit control process (step S41) may not be executed. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to the configuration including the branch sensor 2620, and when the branch sensor 2620 is not provided, the pachinko machine 1 is associated with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When it is determined to be a big hit, after the big hit stop symbol has stopped on the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186, the big hit execution flag is set, and the big hit control process (step S41) is executed. You can do it.

On the other hand, if the branch sensor valid flag is not set, the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled, or the payout appearance (the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter is given to the player). It is determined whether or not any of the paying appearance executing flags indicating that the (effect to be notified to be paid out) is being executed (step S36), and the big hit executing flag or the paying appearance executing flag is set. If any of the is set, after performing the big hit control process (step S41) for controlling the big hit game state based on the big hit running flag being set, at the end of the big hit game state, If the big hit game state is a big hit game state based on the big hit after the variation display number of special symbols reaches 390 times after the end of the previous big hit game state, the count value of the prize ball number counter The payout of the number of prize balls in accordance with (the payout execution flag is set), the payout appearance executing flag is set, and the payout appearance executing flag is being executed based on the fact that the payout appearance executing flag is set. A pay appearance processing (step S42) for monitoring whether or not to execute is executed.

In the jackpot control process (step S41), the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is "16V V long open jackpot (specific 1)" Or “16R V long open big hit (specific 3)”, the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509 is all as the big 1 or big 3 gaming state. The game is opened for 16 rounds (for example, the first special winning opening 2102 is opened in the 1st to 12th and the 14th to 16th rounds, and the second special winning opening 2509 is opened in the 13th round). Here, in at least one round of the specific rounds in which the second special winning opening 2509 is opened, the specific area 2509b is opened for a long time (“V long opening” described in [2-5]). As a result, the jackpot game that can surely realize the entry of the game ball (V winning) into the specific area 2509b is controlled. In addition, in the big hit control process (step S41), the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is "16R (actual 15R) V short opening big hit" When it becomes a mode that suggests "(Specific 2)", the first special winning opening 2102 or the second special winning opening 2509 is opened for all 16 rounds as the special winning jackpot gaming state. At this time, in a specific round in which the second special winning opening 2509 is opened (for example, the 13th round), the specific area 2509b is opened for a short time (“V short open” described in [2-5]). Thereby, the big hit game in which the entry of the game ball into the specific area 2509b (V winning) is not allowed is controlled. Furthermore, in such a specific 2 jackpot game, the specific round is a round that is hard to expect for paying out the award balls, as described above, although the special winning opening is open. The total number of rounds is reduced by 1 round to 15 rounds (actually 15R). Therefore, as a matter of course, the total number of the prize balls that can be paid out to the player by the specific 2 big hit game tends to be smaller than that in the specific 1 big hit game.

In the big hit control process (step S41), after performing the opening control of the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509, each process of setting the high probability flag, the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. .. The high-probability flag is a flag that indicates a high-probability state, and is set based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area 2509b in the second big winning opening 2509 (V winning) during the big hit game, When the specified period of the time saving state controlled after the jackpot has passed, or when the next jackpot is won within the specified period, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 164 described later or the first shown in FIG. 173 It is reset by two special symbol stop processing.

In addition, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is in a time saving state, and is based on a big hit (specific big hit of 1 to 3) that is controlled to a time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) after the big hit gaming state is over. It is set when ending the jackpot gaming state. Then, the time saving flag is the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time saving flag is "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 164 described below or the second special symbol shown in FIG. 173. It is reset by the symbol stop process.

Further, the time saving counter is a counter showing the remaining number of times of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuation of the time saving state, and, for example, a big hit of specific 1-3 is won. Depending on the lottery state (high-probability state/low-probability state) of the special lottery at the time, 165 times if you win the jackpot in the high-probability state, 100 times if you win the jackpot in the low-probability state, 100 times in the hour/hour counter. Set. Then, the hour/hour counter counts down each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but it becomes the next big hit before the counter value becomes "0". Sometimes, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 164 described later or the second special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 173 (counter value is returned to “0”). In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to determining the number of time saving according to the lottery state of the special lottery when the big hit is won, for example, the big hit of the specific 1 and the specific 2 (that is, the first symbol random number) If you win the jackpot based on (), the number of working hours is 100 times, and if you win the specific 3 jackpot (that is, the jackpot based on the second symbol random number), the number of working hours is 165. Etc.

If neither the big hit executing flag nor the paying cast execution executing flag is set, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. The first special symbol process process (step S38), or the second special symbol process process (step S39) including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol process process (step S39) is configured to be executed with priority over the first special symbol process process (step S38), While the second special symbol process process is being performed, the first special symbol process process is not executed (priority change of the second special symbol).

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S34).

Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3422 is in the on state and the game ball enters the first starting port 2201 as shown in FIG. 156. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S41, if it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps to newly hold the variable display control of the first special symbol, The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S44, the random numbers thus obtained are stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter. To store.

However, in the processing of step S41, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S42 to S44, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage processing (step S32).

Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2593 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the second starting port 2587b, as shown in FIG. 157. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value of the second special pending number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S51, if it is determined that the number of holding of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol to the holding state, the following steps The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S54, each random number thus obtained is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter. To store.

However, in the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of holding the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S38 of FIG. 155). The first special symbol process process (corresponding to steps S80a to S84a shown in FIG. 158) executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process. It is the same program module as (corresponding to step S80b to step S84b shown in FIG. 167) and only the random number and the table used for the determination are different, so here, the first executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing. Only the special symbol process processing will be described. In the first special symbol process process, depending on the first special symbol process flag described above, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU4100a is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special random number selection process or the like for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S80a)
2. Based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol, the determination process of the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81a) )
3. A lottery on the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185 based on the variation random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. First fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S82a) in which processing and the like are performed
4. First special symbol variation process of waiting until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped (step S83a)
5. As the mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1185. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84a)

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80a) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 154).

159 to 166 show the detailed procedure of each process (steps S80a to S84a) in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 158. More specifically, the detailed procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80a), FIGS. 159 to 160 (however, FIG. 160 is the first special symbol big hit determination process included in the first special symbol normal process) The detailed procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81a) is shown in FIG. 161. The detailed procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82a) is shown in FIG. 162, and the detailed procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83a) is shown in FIG. 163. Further, the detailed procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84a), FIGS. 164 to 166 (however, FIG. 165 is the first big hit game start process included in the first special symbol stop process, FIG. 166 is the first) It is shown in detail about the jackpot game process). Each procedure will be described below with reference to FIGS. 159 to 166 in order.

Further, as a program module similar to the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 158, the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 167 has been described. As for each process in this second special symbol process process, like each process in the first special symbol process process, detailed steps are shown in FIGS. 168 to 175, but each of these steps is shown in FIG. 159 to Since the same program processing is performed except that the procedure shown in 166 is different from the random number used in the determination, the table, etc., the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, as a step number indicating each procedure, a subscript "a" is attached to a procedure relating to the first special symbol, and a subscript "b" is attached to a similar procedure relating to the second special symbol, thereby indicating the same number of steps. It is clarified that the procedure is the same procedure (for example, step S101a and step S101b are the same procedure except that there is a difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol).

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80a).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 159, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, step S101a As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value by the first special suspended number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S102a, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU4100a. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) is read from the same RAM. .. Then, as the processing of steps S103a and S104a, while counting down the first special reserved number counter, the first stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU4100a The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). become.

Then, after that, as the process of step S105a, a big hit determination process (first special symbol big hit determination process) that is a lottery process for the winning of the big hit is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. .. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81a) (step S106a), this process ends.

160 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol big hit determination process (step S105a).

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, if the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S111a), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 176(A). Select the big hit determination table (step S112a), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S111a), select the big hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 176(A) (step S113a), select The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102a of the first special symbol normal process (step S114a).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 176(A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and the gaming state is at a low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)). The low-probability big-hit determination table to be used, and the high-probability big-hit determination table to be used when the game state is a high-probability time (high-probability non-short-time state, high-probability short-time state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, the three types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and the 1194 types of first special random numbers indicate the above-mentioned deviance determination. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values. Incidentally, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, it is compared with the first special random number. Similarly to the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for, three types of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and 1194 types of second special random numbers are out of the above range. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that.

Further, in the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability, 11 kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability coincide with the big hit judgment value, The above-mentioned first special random numbers are associated with each other so that 1186 kinds of first special random numbers coincide with the deviation determination value. When such a jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 176(A) is used, the probability that the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is selected (big hit probability) is 4 times less than the low probability at the high probability. Can be raised to According to FIG. 176(A), the jackpot probability in the low-probability state is 3/11197 (=1/399), and the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is 11/11197 (≈1/109). Incidentally, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, it is compared with the first special random number. 11 kinds of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the big probability determination table at the time of low probability are also used for the big hit determination table at the time of high probability. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that they match the jackpot determination value indicating that they have won, and that the 1186 second special random numbers match the deviation determination values that indicate that they are the above deviations.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines as a big hit as a result of the comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S115a). ), the big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set and the process is ended (step S116a), and the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process first special read in step S102a When it is determined that the result is out of alignment as a result of comparison with the random number, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117a).

The reach determination table is stored in, for example, the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and the reach determination table for the time saving and the gaming state used when the game state is the time saving (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) And a reach determination table for non-time saving, which is used in the case of (high probability non-time saving state, low probability non-time saving state). Then, in the reach determination table for time saving, for example, all the reach random numbers of 239 types do not match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, and the reach random number is set to match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Are associated with each other. As described above, in the case of time saving, when it is determined to be out of reach, it is not determined to be out of reach, so that a reach flag described below is not set and the reach effect is not executed. For this reason, when the reach is formed in a short time and the reach effect is executed, it can be recognized that a big hit will be given at that time, and the reach effect can be enjoyed with peace of mind. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not necessary to set so that the reach effect is not always executed when it is determined that there is a deviation during the time saving as described above. For example, in the reach determination table during the time saving. It is also possible to match a reach determination value indicating that several types (for example, 6 types) of reach random numbers reach. In such a case, it cannot be recognized as a big hit when the reach effect is generated in a short time, but by setting the reach random number to be the reach to be smaller than the normal time (for example, 12 types), when the reach effect is generated, It is possible to increase the expectation for a big hit compared to the normal time.

In addition, in the reach determination table for non-time saving, for example, 12 types of reach random numbers are matched with reach determination values indicating reach, and for example, 227 types of reach random numbers are matched with reach determination values indicating not reaching. The reach random numbers are associated with each other. As described above, unlike the case of the time saving, the reach determination value indicating the reach is provided in the non-time saving time. Therefore, even if a reach is formed during non-time saving and the reach effect is executed, it is not possible to recognize whether or not it is a big hit until all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102a (step S117a). Is set to reach, and the process ends (step S119a).

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81a).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 161, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105a) is determined. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S121a).

Main control MPU4100a, if the big hit flag is set in step S121a, by comparing the first symbol random number read in step S102a of the first special symbol normal processing and the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 176(B) (Step S122a), the type of big hit is determined, the mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of big hit (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S123a). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121a, it is determined to be a deviating symbol as the mode when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped (step S124a).

As shown in FIG. 176(B), the symbol determination table stores the symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) associated with each determination result (each big hit of the specific 1 to the specific 3). Has been done. In the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, the jackpot type is determined by identifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
The first big winning opening 2102 is in the 1st to 12th and the 14th to 16th rounds, and the second big winning opening 2509 is in the 13th round (for example, 28.5 seconds or until the 8th winning count). By being controlled to the open state, the game ball can be (easily) entered into the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509, and is controlled to a 16R big hit game state, and the 13th round is the second As a round in which the special winning opening 2509 is opened, in particular, a “long-time V opening control (V long "Open") to control the big hitting game state where the game balls can enter the specific area 2509b (easy V winning), and after the completion of the 16R big hitting gaming state with V winning, the high probability time saving state (the number of times saving is low). It is controlled to 100 times at the probability and 165 times at the high probability), and 16R of the specific 1 to be won by the first special lottery drawn based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 2201. In the big wins 2.1-12, 14th-16th rounds, the first special winning opening 2102 is controlled to be in an open state for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds or until 8 prizes are counted), and the 13th round second. By controlling the special winning opening 2509 to be in an open state for a short time, it is possible to control all 16R jackpot gaming states in which game balls can enter the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509,
Particularly, in the 13th round, not only is the opening period of the second opening/closing member 2572 short, but the state in which the second opening/closing member 2572 is open and the period in which the movable piece 2578b is in the operating position do not overlap are maintained. By performing "V open control for a short time (V short open)", the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state in which the game ball cannot enter the specific area 2509b (V winning is difficult), and 16R (effectively 15R) ) After the jackpot gaming state is over, it is controlled to a low probability time saving state (the number of time saving is 100 times when the probability is low, 165 times when the probability is high), and the game ball enters the first starting opening 2201. Specific 2R 15R (actual 16R) jackpot to be won by the first special lottery drawn based on 3.1 to 12, 14th to 16th rounds are the first big winning opening 2102, and the 13th round is the second big winning. By controlling the mouth 2509 in an open state for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds or until the time when eight prizes are counted), a game ball can enter the first big prize hole 2102 and the second big prize hole 2509. (Easy) Control to the 16R big hit game state, and the 13th round is a round that opens the second big winning opening 2509, in particular, the open state of the second opening/closing member 2572 and the operating position of the movable piece 2578b. By performing "long-time V opening control (V long opening)" that forms overlapping periods for a long time, the game ball can be entered into the specific area 2509b (V winning is easy). After finishing the V-winning 16R jackpot game state, it is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state (the time-saving number is 100 times when the probability is low, 165 times when the probability is high), and the game to the second start opening 2587b. It is decided to be one of the three types of jackpots, which is the special 3R jackpot to be won by the second special lottery that is drawn based on the entry of the ball.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set to be different as compared with the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is made different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176(B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the determination value is distributed only for the 16R jackpot of the specific 1 or the 16R jackpot of the specific 2 (actual 15R) jackpot. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set only for the 16R jackpot of the specific 3.

In the present example, only in the case of the special 2 big hit, "short-time opening of specific area (V short open)" is set as opening control of the specific area 2509b when the second special winning opening 2509 is opened, and other than that. In the case of a big hit (specific 1 or big hit of specific 3), “long open of specific area (V long open)” is set as opening control of the specific area 2509b when the second special winning opening 2509 is opened. While a big hit associated with "short-time opening of a specific area" cannot be expected to enter a game ball into the specific area 2509b (V prize), a big hit associated with "long opening of a specific area" is specific. As described above, the game ball is surely entered into the area 2509b (V prize), and the V prize cannot be expected only in the case of the special 2 big hit, and the gaming state after the big hit is a low probability state. "Unfavorable jackpot game state (unfavorable jackpot)" is controlled, while in other jackpots the game ball is V winning and the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a high probability state "Advantageous jackpot gaming state (advantageous jackpot) )” is controlled. Therefore, in this example, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, at the time of a big hit, it is sorted into a big hit associated with either "a short time opening of a specific area" or "a long time opening of a specific area". On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, at the time of a big hit, there is a feature that it is always distributed to the big hit associated with "long opening of a specific area". Referring to FIG. 176(B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the specific probability of being distributed to the disadvantage jackpot of “short-time opening of specific region” is 100/200 (=50%). ..

Although details will be described later, in the non-time saving state, the door member 2589 is not driven even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2587b does not occur, and by hitting left, only the winning of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 2201 occurs, and the second special. Except when there is a reserved ball of the symbol, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is executed, and a big hit (a big hit of the specific 1 or the specific 2) related to the first special symbol occurs. become. On the other hand, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state), the door member 2589 is driven by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2301. Therefore, in the time saving state, by hitting the right, the game ball easily wins in the second starting opening 2587b, and it is possible to expect the occurrence of a big hit (a big hit of the specific 3) related to the second special symbol. Even in the time saving state, the second special symbol is variably displayed with priority over the first special symbol.

Further, when the type of big hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of big hit is determined as the mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. In the stop process of the second special symbol based on the second special lottery (second special symbol stop symbol setting process), similarly, the stop symbol according to the type of big hit is determined as the mode when the second special symbol is stopped. However, in the case of the above example, the type of big hit by the second special symbol is only one kind of specific 3, so in the substantial process of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol according to the type of big hit Instead of deciding, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit may be selected.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this manner, as a process of step S125a, these lottery results (type of jackpot, reach loss, or loss are instructed (a mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that (the instruction may be given)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. After that, as the process of step S126a, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82a), this process is ended. The peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns based on the received determination result notification command and the variable pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern → the medium decorative pattern. Thus, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is display-controlled. Note that the order of stop display of each decorative pattern is not limited to the above order, and when a specific variation pattern command is selected, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed at the same time. Alternatively, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 may be display-controlled.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU4140a, as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped (stop symbol), from among the jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command. In the case where the specific 1 big hit is specified, it is determined as the specific 1 big hit symbol (for example, a combination of the same symbols by the odd symbols among the symbols of "1" to "9"), and the specific 2 big hit is specified. In this case, it is determined to be the specific 2 big hit symbols (for example, a combination of the same symbols in the symbols of “1” to “9”), and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses (reach effect) At the end of), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of the same decorative symbols as the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 has stopped variably, the player is the jackpot of the specific 1 and the specific 2 from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It is possible to judge whether or not to control to the high-probability time-saving state after each jackpot gaming state. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in at least part of the case where the specific 1 big hit is won, as the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900, not the specific 1 big hit pattern but the specific 2 big hit pattern is stopped and displayed. In such a case, in such a case, at the start of the big hit, while displaying whether or not the particular 2 big hits are present, an effect of teaching that the particular 1 big hit has been won during the big hit game is performed. By this, it is possible to realize an effect that promotes to a more advantageous jackpot (from specific 2 to specific 1) and entertain the player.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing (stop symbol), the specific 3 of the jackpots related to the second special symbol from the received determination result notification command. When a big hit is specified, it is determined to be a specific 3 big hit symbol (a combination of the same symbols by any of the symbols "1" to "9"), and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses (reach At the end of the effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. In this way, when the combination of the same decorative symbols as the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 has stopped variably, the player determines from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that the jackpot is the specific 3 jackpot, and specifies. It can be expected to be controlled to a high probability time saving state after the end of the big hit game state of 3.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a specifies the reach deviation from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decoration symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped, the deviation occurs with the reach. Determining the design (combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative patterns are the same), and if the flare is specified, the flare pattern without reach (the combination of the decorative patterns that are not the same. The symbols are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82a).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, as shown in FIG. 1 special symbol big hit determination processing (see step S116a) is set (step S141a), if the big hit flag is set, the big hit determined in step S123a of the first special symbol stop design setting processing A variation pattern table at the time of a big hit is selected according to the type and the current game state (step S142a). If the big hit flag is not set in step S141a, the main control MPU 4100a confirms whether or not the reach flag (see step S119a of the first special symbol big hit determination process) is set (step S143a), and the reach flag. If is set, the variation pattern table at the time of reach losing according to the current game state is selected (step S144a), and when neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal deviation (reach In the case where the effect is not performed, the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the loss is selected (step S145a). Here, FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern table (variation pattern selection table), and FIG. 177(A) shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of the big hit selected in step S142a. FIG. 177(B) shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of reach loss selected in step S144a.

Next, in step S146a, the main control MPU 4100a compares the variation pattern table selected in step S142a with the variation random number read in step S102a of the first special symbol normal process, thereby allocating the variation pattern table. Based on, the change patterns to be executed (for example, change patterns 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 177) are determined. Then, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation pattern command that notifies the peripheral control board 4010 that the determined variation pattern is started, and starts the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1185. Yes (step S147a). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S148a). As a result, the effect control is performed on the first special symbol display device 1185, the main liquid crystal display device 1900, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

Then, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as the process of step S149a, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83). At the time of updating, this process ends.

Although the series of processes described above is the first variation pattern setting process, in the following, the variation pattern table used in the first variation pattern setting process, the lottery effect allocation associated with the selection of the variation pattern, etc. (see FIG. 171). The same applies to a variation pattern table and the like used in the second variation pattern setting process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 176(B). The features of the big hit in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation patterns set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored so as to be associated with each other. For example, referring to the variation pattern selection table at the time of big hit shown in FIG. 177(A), variation pattern 1 with variation time of 10 seconds, variation pattern 2 with variation time of 60 seconds, and 120 seconds It can be seen that the fluctuation pattern 3 in which the fluctuation time is set is stored. Then, the main control MPU4100a, the variation pattern table of the plurality of types according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and step S102a of the first special symbol normal processing (or FIG. 168 By comparing with the variable random number read in step S102b) of the second special symbol normal processing described later while referring to, by obtaining the variable time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the special symbol The variation pattern of (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

Also, regarding the variation pattern table at the time of reach (reach loss) of this example, similarly to the variation pattern table at the time of a big hit, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on the second symbol random number) and are stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a. In the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is the variation random number. Are stored in association with each other. For example, referring to the variation pattern selection table at the time of reach loss shown in FIG. 177(B), variation pattern 4 with a variation time of 10 seconds, variation pattern 5 with a variation time of 60 seconds, and 120 seconds It can be seen that the fluctuation pattern 6 in which the fluctuation time is set is stored.

Based on the variation time and distribution of each variation pattern shown in FIGS. 177(A) and (B), the average variation time of variation patterns 1 to 3 that can be selected at the time of a big hit is “93.5 seconds”. On the other hand, the average variation time of variation patterns 4 to 6 that can be selected at the time of reach loss is “13.6 seconds”. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the variation pattern of the longer variation time is set to be easier to select in the big hit time than in the reach loss time. It is set to be high.

Further, in this example, in step S146a, when the variation pattern to be executed is determined by referring to the variation pattern table at the time of big hit or the variation pattern table at the time of reach loss, the reach effect at the time of variation display of the decorative pattern in the variation is determined. Since (also referred to as “lottery effect” or “winning effect”) is executed, the type type of the reach effect is determined based on the determined variation pattern. In the present example, the description will be continued on the assumption that the main control MPU 4100a performs the process for determining the type of the reach production (lottery production). May be performed.

Here, the determination of the reach effect (lottery effect) based on the variation pattern will be described with a specific example. FIG. 178 is an example of a lottery effect distribution table for distributing reach effects (lottery effects) based on the variation pattern.

In FIG. 178, the reach type to be executed is divided for each variation pattern (variation patterns 1 to 6) selected from the variation pattern selection table. Specifically, variation patterns 1 and 4 are associated with "normal reach", variation patterns 2 and 5 are associated with "medium boss battle reach", and variation patterns 3 and 6 are associated with "last boss battle". Reach". Since different fluctuation times (10 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds) are set for each fluctuation pattern, it is preferable to associate different reach types with each fluctuation pattern in this way. Here, "medium boss battle reach" and "rath boss battle reach" are super reach productions in which the degree of expectation (reliability) for a big hit is set higher than that of "normal reach". For example, enemy characters (medium boss, last boss) It is a battle reach production in which the battle production with is displayed. Among the super reach productions, “Rath Boss Battle Reach” is set to have a higher expectation for a big hit than “Medium Boss Battle Reach”.

Then, each variation pattern is distributed to one of the production numbers according to the distribution in the corresponding reach type, and the reach production (lottery production) is performed with the production content (content of the lottery production) corresponding to the distributed production number. To be executed. According to the lottery effect distribution table of FIG. 178, in the case of the normal reach of the fluctuation patterns 1 and 4, it is distributed to “normal stop”, “high speed bite stop stop”, and “slow stop” according to the stop mode of the decorative symbol. .. Further, in the case of the medium boss battle reach or the last boss battle reach of the variation patterns 2, 3, 5, and 6, depending on the combination of the type of the enemy character in the battle reach and the type of the weapon used by the ally, “medium boss+weak” It is sorted as "weapon", "medium boss + medium weapon", "last boss + strong weapon".

FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining the degree of expectation for each lottery effect. FIG. 179 shows the degree of expectation for the big hit for each “content of lottery effect” in FIG. 178. Referring to FIG. 179, as described above, it can be seen that the “medium boss battle reach” has a higher expectation for a jackpot than the “normal reach” and further the “last boss battle reach”. Also, looking at the contents of the lottery production of "Medium Boss Battle Reach" and "Las Boss Battle Reach" that are classified as Super Reach, "Medium Weapons" and "Strong Weapons" win even more than "Weak Weapons" You can see that the expectations are high.

The lottery effect distribution table of FIG. 178 shows that the variation patterns 2, 3, 5, and 6 are targets of “prefetch occurrence”. When "prefetch generation" is performed, a predetermined preceding determination process (prefetch determination) is performed, and a predetermined effect (prefetch effect) is executed based on the result of the determination process (prefetch result).

A specific flow of "prefetching" in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described as an example. First, the main control MPU 4100a uses various random numbers based on the various random numbers (step S44 in FIG. 156, step S54 in FIG. 157) stored in the first starting port passing process or the second starting port passing process. Prior to the “lottery of lottery” (for example, jackpot lottery, probability variation lottery, and determination of variable display pattern), advance determination processing (prefetch determination) for determining the lottery result of the lottery in advance is performed. The precedence determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S44 and S54 and the precedence determination table, and the precedence determination table is the same table as the table used for the “predetermined lottery” using the random numbers. Is. In the advance determination process, the random number and the advance determination table are compared to determine the lottery result (the result of the big hit, the type of the big hit, the variation display pattern, etc.) when the lottery is performed using the random number. To be done.

Then, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a command indicating the determination result (prefetch result) of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140. As a result, the peripheral control unit 4140 that has received the command can obtain the determination result (pre-reading result) of the lottery result of the lottery before the "predetermined lottery" is executed. It is possible to display an effect that reflects the executed command before the execution of the "predetermined lottery". Such an effect is called a look-ahead effect, and, for example, in the case where it is determined in advance that a big hit will occur in a "predetermined lottery", in a change (preliminary change) that is executed before the change that becomes the big hit. , A precursor effect that may suggest the big hit can be displayed as a look-ahead effect. When the "medium boss reach" or "last boss reach" shown in FIG. 178 is performed, such "prefetching" is performed, and the prefetching effect is displayed in the pre-variation before the variation display of the variation. Above, the manifestation of super-reach is performed in the fluctuation. However, the execution of the prefetching or the prefetching effect may be performed only in the state where the special random number is stored (the state in which there is the pending variation) in addition to the variation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the reach effect without the look-ahead, but the reach effect with the look-ahead has a higher expectation for a big hit than the reach effect without the look-ahead. It is preferably set. For example, when "Medium Boss Battle Reach" or "Rath Boss Battle Reach" is selected, according to FIG. 178, it is always "pre-read occurrence". “Battle reach” may be additionally set with a production expectation level lower than that of each reach production with prefetching. Specifically, for example, the lottery effect selected when the variation pattern 3 is the one in FIG. It is possible to set options for reach production (lottery production) that does not involve pre-reading by adding a rasbosu battle reach (production number 7a to 9a) that is not performed. And, the production expectation of the lottery production corresponding to each of the production numbers 7a to 9a is set to be lower than the production expectation of the lottery production corresponding to each of the production numbers 7 to 9 (see FIG. 179). Thus, the expectation for a big hit can be made higher when the reach effect accompanied by look-ahead is selected.

The preceding determination table is the same as the table used for the "predetermined lottery", but at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table is the content of the table used for the "predetermined lottery". May be different from. In addition, a specific example of the prefetching effect will be described in detail in [9] below.

Next, the features of the big hit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, 50% of the big hits (first special big hits) by the first special lottery are “unfavorable big hits” associated with “short-time opening of specific area” (specification 1 The big hit) and the remaining 50% are "advantageous big hits" associated with "opening a specific area for a long time" (specific 2 big hits), while the big hits by the second special lottery (second special big hit) , 100% is an "advantageous big hit" associated with "long opening a specific area" (specific 3 big hits). Therefore, the second special big hit is more important than the first special big hit in terms of the type of big hit. Also has an advantage.

Summarizing the advantages of such a second special jackpot, in the case of the second special jackpot (specifically, a specific 3 jackpot), V winning is surely performed in the jackpot gaming state, and After the end, the high probability time saving state is controlled again. In particular, when the second special jackpot is won in the high-probability time-saving state, the number of time-savings after the jackpot is set to be large (in the example shown in FIG. 176, the number of time-savings is high. It is 165 times when winning, more than 100 when winning in a low probability state), and after that there is high expectation that we can win the second special jackpot again, so it is possible to maintain a high so-called continuation rate Has become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special jackpot has a stronger advantage than the first special jackpot, so it can be said that the time saving state in which the game is advanced by right-handing is an advantageous game state for the player. , On the other hand, since the first starting opening 2201a is provided on the path through which the game ball can flow down when the player hits the ball to the right (see, for example, FIG. 188), the right hit is performed during the big hit game and in an advantageous state. Whether or not the player intends, at least a part of the right-handed game ball is received in the first starting opening 2201a, so that even if only the second starting opening 2587b is aimed at, the first starting opening 2201a It is configured so that it is difficult to avoid accepting game balls into.

In such a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a malicious player intends to enter a game ball only in the second starting opening 2587b by an illegal game or the like and aim for only a big hit in the second special lottery. Even if only the second starting opening 2587b is aimed at, it is possible to avoid the possibility that a part of the game ball (spilled ball) that was not received in the second starting opening 2587b is received in the first starting opening 2201b. difficult. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bonus game is always passed through before being controlled to the advantageous state, and in the jackpot game, the privilege is given (the prize ball is paid out to the special winning opening) by right-handing. In this jackpot game, the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2585a and is discharged by the guide member 2584 to the side of the first winning hole 2102 of the attacker unit 2100, and then the first winning hole 2102 in the open state. However, since the first starting opening 2201b is arranged in front of the first special winning opening 2102, a part of the game ball heading toward the first special winning opening 2102 is part of the first starting opening 2201b. It is impossible for the player to operate or adjust that the data is accepted by the player. Then, by accepting the game ball in the first starting opening 2201b during the big hit game, the first special symbol is changed in the advantageous state thereafter. It is difficult to prevent memory (suspension of fluctuation) from being performed. Here, the priority change of the second special symbol is performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, and therefore, while the time saving state continues, only the change display of the second special symbol by the second special lottery Can be executed. However, there is a limit to the period in which the time saving state is controlled (specifically, the time saving state ends if the next big hit cannot be won even after the specified number of times of 100 times or 165 times has passed). Therefore, after the end of the time saving state in which it becomes difficult to insert the game ball into the second starting opening 2587b, the variable display of the first special symbol will be performed based on the first special random number stored and stored. .. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to aim only at the second special lottery, prevent an illegal game of the player, and promote a proper game to enjoy the original game playability of the game machine.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83a).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 163, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, step S171a As the process, the change timer for which the change time is set according to the change pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82a) for the change pattern is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S172a), the process proceeds to step S173a. That is, in the process of this step S173a, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84a), this process is ended.

FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84a).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 164, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, first, step S181a As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device 1185, and the first special symbol on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design of the design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182a).

Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the time saving flag is set and the counter value of the time saving counter for setting the number of times of the time saving state is "0". (Step S183a). Then, if this counter value is not "0", after the time saving counter is counted down (step S184a), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short time counter is "0" (step S185a). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset (step S186a). In addition, when it is determined that the count value of the hour/hour counter is “0” in the processing of step S183a or when it is determined that the hour/hour counter is not “0” in the processing of step S185a. At that time, the process proceeds to step S187a.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 counts up the counter value of the fluctuation number counter in which the fluctuation display frequency of the special symbol after the end of the previous big hit game state is counted as the process of step S187a. The variation counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the special symbols have been changed and displayed since the end of the big hit game state, and after the end of the big hit game state, each time the change display of the special symbols is executed, the count is incremented in step S187a. However, regardless of whether or not the counter value has reached "390" (the number of times the special symbol has been changed and displayed is 390), when the next big hit occurs, the payout appearance execution process shown in FIG. 186, which will be described later, resets. (The counter value is reset to "0").

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 confirms whether or not the flag indicating the big hit by the first special symbol is set (step S188a). If the big hit flag by the first special symbol is set (YES in step S188a), in order to avoid the big hits due to the second special symbol from occurring in duplicate, the game on the second special symbol side is temporarily performed. The "temporary stop flag of the second special symbol" indicating that it is in a state to be stopped is turned on (step S189a). Then, the pre-processing for starting the big hit game (first big hit game) by the first special symbol is executed (step S190a), and then the first big hit game processing is executed (step S191a). The detailed procedure of step S190a will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, and the detailed procedure of step S191a will be described later with reference to FIG. If the process of step S191a is completed or the flag indicating the big hit by the first special symbol is not set in step S188a, the process proceeds to step S192a, and the first special symbol process flag is set to the initial value. Updating is performed so that the process shifts to a certain first special symbol normal process, and the series of processes shown in FIG. 164 ends.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first big hit game start processing (step S190a).

As shown in FIG. 165, in the first big hit game start process, the main control MPU 4100a first sets a timer (first big hit start interval timer) for measuring the pre-start interval of the big hit game as the process of step S201a. It is determined whether or not it is in the completed state. As a result, if the first big hit start interval timer is not set yet, the condition device is operated as the process of step S202a, and the time saving function is operated as the processes of step S203a and step S204a. If there is (YES in step S203a), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparations have been completed, in order to start the pre-start interval of the big hit game, as the processing of steps S205a and S206a, the first big hit start interval timer is set and the first big hit interval start command is set. , This process is once ended.

The first big hit interval start command set in the process of step S206a is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the interval before the start of the big hit game appears through the control of the peripheral control unit 4140.

That is, after the first jackpot start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first jackpot start interval timer has been set in the processing of step S201a each time the interrupt processing is performed, In the process of the next step S207a, it is determined whether or not the first big hit start interval timer is 0, that is, whether the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has elapsed. .. In the process of step S207a, as long as it is determined that the first big hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S207a). Every time the first big hit game start process is performed, the first big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S209a.

Then, as a result of such processing, it is determined in the processing of step S811a that the first big hit start interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has elapsed. At this time, in order to execute the big hit game, the process is updated to the first big hit game process (step S208a), and the series of processes shown in FIG. 165 ends.

Regarding the first big hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the kind of big hit symbol (the type determined by the first symbol random number).

FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first big hit game process (step S191a).

As shown in FIG. 166, in the first big-hit game process, the main control MPU 4100a first indicates that the process for executing the big-hit game is already in progress as the process of step S211a. It is determined whether or not the big hit game execution flag is on. Then, as a result, if the first big hit game execution flag is not in the ON state, in order to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509, the process of step S212a As, the opening mode (the number of rounds, the opening time of each round, the maximum number of winnings in each round) is set according to the type of jackpot.

For example, in the case of a specific 1 16R big hit, "16 times" is set as the number of rounds. As a more detailed set content, the number of rounds that the first big winning opening 2102 opens is 1 to 12, 14 to 16 rounds "15 times", and the number of the second big winning opening 2509 opens is 13 rounds and "1 round". Is set. Further, as the opening time of each round, for example, "28.5 seconds" is uniformly set, and as the maximum winning number of each round, for example, "8" is uniformly set. In addition to this, for example, in the opening round of the second special winning opening 2509 of the 13th round, it may be additionally set that the control of the V long opening is performed. Further, a plurality of types of jackpots may be prepared, or the opening time and the maximum number of winnings in each round may be different.

After the execution mode of the big hit game is set in this way, as the processing of step S213a and step S214a, the first big hit game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress is turned on. This process is once ended when the first big hit start command is set while the operation is performed.

That is, after the first big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, each time the interrupt processing is performed, the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress in the processing of step S211a. The determination is made, and it is determined whether or not the set number of rounds has been exhausted in the processing of the next step S215a. Then, in the process of step S215a, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been exhausted yet, that is, it is in the middle stage of the control for executing the jackpot game (NO in step S215a). Every time the first big hit game process is performed, as the process of step S216a, the control according to the set opening pattern is executed. As a result, every time the interrupt process is performed (for example, every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) of opening and closing the opening/closing member of each special winning opening is updated (managed) through the process of step S216a. As a result, a big hit game in which the big winning opening (first big winning opening 2102 or second big winning opening 2509) is opened and closed with an opening pattern according to the kind of big hit comes to be realized.

Then, in the process of the above step S215a, when it is determined that the set number of rounds has been exhausted, that is, the control for executing the jackpot game is all completed, while such control is being performed. (YES in step S215a), each process (step S217a, step S218a, step S225a, step S226a, step S227a, etc.) for generating a big hit game end interval is performed.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (first big hit end interval timer) for measuring the end interval of the big hit game is set (step S217a). As a result, when the first big hit end interval timer is not set yet, the first big hit end interval timer is set and the first big hit end interval timer is set as the processing of steps S226a and S227a to start the end interval of the big hit game. When the one-big hit interval end command is set, this process is temporarily ended.

The first big hit interval end command set in the process of step S227a is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the big hit game ending interval appears through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

That is, after the first big hit end interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer has been set in the process of step S217a every time the interrupt process is performed, and In the process of step S218a, it is determined whether or not the first big hit end interval timer is 0, that is, whether the time set as the end interval of the big hit game has elapsed. Then, in the process of step S218a, as long as it is determined that the first jackpot end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S218a). Every time the first big hit game process is performed, the first big hit end interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S225a.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S218a, when it is determined that the first big hit end interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the end interval of the big hit game has passed, , Each processing (step S219a-step S224a) for ending the said big hit game will be performed.

That is, the main control MPU4100a first, as the process of step S219a, operates the first jackpot game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the jackpot game is already in progress. Then, if the result of the first special symbol lottery satisfies the condition for operating the time saving function (YES in step S220a), the time saving function is activated to control the shift to the time saving game state ( Step S221a).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, in consideration of the possibility that the big hit game will occur in duplicate on the second special symbol side, the game on the second special symbol side should be temporarily stopped. The above-mentioned temporary stop flag that indicates the state is turned off (step S222a). Then, after this, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S223a), the process is updated to the first special symbol normal process (step S224a), and the series of processes shown in FIG. 166 ends.

According to such a big hit game process, until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds in the process of step S215a, the corresponding big winning opening (first big winning opening 2102 or second big winning opening) 2509) is repeatedly opened in an opening mode (step S216a) according to the type of big hit, and eventually a prize ball according to the type of big hit can be obtained by the player.

The first jackpot start command set in step S214a of FIG. 166 is one of the commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010, and the jackpot start command is individually set according to the type of jackpot. It is prepared. The effect corresponding to the type of big hit instructed by such a big hit start command is executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the lamps/LEDs, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like.

The detailed procedure of each process (steps S80a to S84a) in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 158 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 159 to 166. Similar to the first special symbol process processing for such a first special symbol, there is a second special symbol process processing for the second special symbol, as described above.

FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol process process (step S39 of FIG. 155). A detailed description is omitted because it is almost the same as the first special symbol process process, but in FIG. 167, a second special symbol normal process (step S80b), a second special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81b), a second The variation pattern setting process (step S82b), the second special symbol variation process (step S83b), and the second special symbol stop process (step S84b) are shown.

The detailed procedure of each of these processes is shown in FIGS. 168 to 175. Since these processes are almost the same as those in FIGS. 159 to 166 which have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted. If only the correspondence is shown, in FIG. 168, the detailed procedure of the second special symbol normal process (step S80b) is shown, and in FIG. 169, the detailed procedure of the second special symbol jackpot determination process is shown. .. Further, in FIG. 170, the detailed procedure of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81b) is shown, and in FIG. 171, the detailed procedure of the second variation pattern setting process (step S82b) is shown. Then, the detailed procedure of the second special symbol variation process (step S83b) is shown. Further, in FIG. 173, the detailed procedure of the second special symbol stop processing (step S84b) is shown, and in FIG. 174, the detailed procedure of the second jackpot game start processing of the second special symbol stop processing is shown. In FIG. 175, the detailed procedure of the second jackpot game process of the second special symbol stop process is shown.

Also, FIG. 176 is a diagram for explaining various tables used in the jackpot determination and the symbol determination, as described above in relation to the description of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 161). 176(A) shows an example of a big hit determination table, and FIG. 176(B) shows an example of a symbol determination table.

Also, FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern table (variation pattern selection table), FIG. 177(A) shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 177(B) shows a reach loss case. 2 shows an example of the variation pattern selection table of FIG. FIG. 178 is a diagram for explaining distribution of reach effects (lottery effects) selected based on the variation pattern, and shows an example of a lottery effect allocation table. FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining the degree of expectation for each lottery effect. Although FIGS. 177 to 179 have been described above in connection with the description of the first variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 162), specific effect contents will be described later in detail.

FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining a control example of the second special winning opening or the like that can adjust the avoidance of V winnings, but this is a description regarding the second attacker unit 2570 (see FIGS. 146 to 148). ) Is as described above.

FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process processing (step S15).

Now, in the processing of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2586 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2585a, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100, as the processing of step S802, first acquires a normal random number of the ordinary symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area of the RAM to execute a gate passage process. To do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and a normal lottery process is performed on the basis of the read out normal random number such as a lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the above normal symbols is stopped (step S803)
2. Normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) in which lottery processing or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 1189 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 is stopped (step S805)
4. Change display of the normal symbol so that the mode of change control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the change control of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 Ordinary symbol stop processing to stop the (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", the door member 2589 rotates to receive the game ball into the second starting opening 2587b. Normal electric accessory release process (step S807) that executes a process for controlling

The normal symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 154).

FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S802).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2586 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2585a, as shown in FIG. As the processing of step S811, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of normally held symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the processing of this step S811, when it is determined that the number of holding of the above-mentioned normal symbol is not the maximum value thereof, in order to newly hold the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbol, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, in step S813, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S814, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

However, in the processing of the step S811, when it is determined that the number of the normal symbols to be held is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly held. That is, by not performing the processing of steps S812 to S814, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 183, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as the process of step S821, It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the on-hold state, based on the counter value by the ordinary on-hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S822, the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is normally stored. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random number, universal figure variation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, while counting down the normal holding number counter, when the variable display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU4100a is stopped. In the first-first-out (First-in first-out) mode, the shift operation is performed on the random numbers (ordinary random number, universal figure fluctuation random number) relating to the display mode in FIG.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2585a are sequentially arranged from the first (first) area. Remember. When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2585a when the random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area is stored. The random number stored in the first storage area is read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4) is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). ..

Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S826), the time saving time universal figure hit determination table (not shown). ) Is selected (step S826), and the current game state is the non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S825), the non-time saving general drawing hit determination table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S827), and the selected ordinary figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process are compared (step S828).

In addition, the universal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and the universal figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is a short time (low probability short time state and high probability short time state), It is provided with a non-time saving universal figure hit determination table used when the game state is non-time saving (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Then, in the time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the general-use figure determination value indicating that each ordinary figure is won, The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not match the deviation determination value indicating the deviation. In this way, in the time saving, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a, it is surely won per common figure, and the door member 2589 rotates to move the game ball to the second starting opening 2587b. The acceptance is controlled to be possible.

In addition, in the non-time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the universal figure determination value indicating that the ordinary random number has been won. However, the ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the general-university-deviation determination value indicating that the general-university figure is out of sync. As described above, in the non-time saving, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2585a, since the winning is not won in the ordinary drawing, the door member 2589 is rotated and the second starting opening 2587b. There is no possibility of controlling the acceptance of the game ball into the game.

When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected ordinary figure hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process, and determines that it is an ordinary figure hit (step S829). ), after setting the universal symbol hit flag indicating that the variation is won per universal symbol (step S830), the regular symbol hit as a mode (variable symbol stop symbol) when the variation control of the regular symbol is stopped The symbol is determined (step S831), on the other hand, as a result of the comparison between the selected universal symbol determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, if it is determined that the symbol is out, fluctuation of the ordinary symbol The non-universal figure as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the control is stopped is determined (step S832). Then, after that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process ends.

In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 251/251, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is always a win, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is extremely extreme. It is shortened to a very short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the result of the lottery for the ordinary symbol is a win, the second starting opening 2587b is controlled in an open/close pattern in which it is closed as an open state for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). .. That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability of winning the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is extremely high, the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is constant and short, and the second starting opening 21 is in the open state. It is much easier to win the game ball into the second starting opening 2587b due to the long time, and it is more efficient to aim the second starting opening 2587b rather than the first starting opening 2201. Can be awarded. In the control of the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0/251, the result of the ordinary symbol is not always hit, and the second starting opening 2587b is aimed at. Even a game ball cannot be won in the second starting opening 2587b.

As described above, during control of the non-time saving state, even if aiming at the second starting opening 2587b, it is not possible to win a game ball into the second starting opening 2587b, so that the first starting opening 2201 In order for the game ball to win, the game ball must be shot (so-called “left hit”) aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500. In the game area 1100 on the left side of the center role object 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge array at appropriate positions, and the game balls hit the obstacle nails. By touching, various movements are given to the game ball and it flows down. Therefore, even if the player hits the game ball on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2201, it does not always win the first starting port 2201 and wins the first starting port 2201. The unplayed game ball is discharged to the outside through an out port 1151 provided at the lower end of the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, it is possible to win the game ball more efficiently by aiming at the second starting port 2587b than at the first starting port 2201. In order to win the prize, a game ball must be shot (so-called "right hit") aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. Further, due to the structure of the game board 4, when the second starting port 2587b is opened, if a game ball is hit at the right side of the center accessory 2500 with the second starting port 2587b open, the gate portion 2585a is passed. The game ball that has been played is to win the second starting opening 2587b with an extremely high probability. Therefore, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out port 1151), and the control of the non-time saving state is performed. Compared with the first starting port 2201 in, the game ball comes into the second starting port 2587b with extremely high efficiency.

Also, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 4, when passing through the gate portion 2585a, there is a very high probability that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol will be a hit, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol is displayed. The time required for control is constant and short, and the opening time of the second starting opening 2587b is long, so that a game ball can easily enter the second starting opening 2587b, and further, the game can be played to the second starting opening 2587b. When the ball wins, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely short compared with the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control in the non-time saving state, so the special time is shortened. The variable display control of the symbol (suspending the variable display control of the special symbol) can be digested. That is, when controlling to the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state is over, by hitting the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2587b, the jackpot is again made in a short time. You can expect to win a lot of game balls by controlling to the big hit game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, if the number of game balls to be paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting opening 2587b is, for example, one, the game ball to the second starting opening 2587b. Even if the award frequently occurs, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while increasing the interest of the player.

184 and 185 are diagrams for explaining the sub-main processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010. The sub-main processing will be described in the next section.

FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the paying cast execution processing (step S42).

Now, in the processing of step S311, if it is determined that the payout appearance executing flag is not set, as shown in FIG. 186, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 causes the main control MPU 4100a to perform the processing of step S312. First, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the big hit game state. Specifically, in the big hit control process (step S41), the big hit game state is executed upon the occurrence of either the big hit related to the first special symbol or the big hit related to the second special symbol, and at the end thereof. Or not.

Next, as the processing of step S312, when it is determined that the jackpot gaming state has ended, as the processing of step S313, does the counter value of the variation counter exceed a predetermined number (for example, "390 times")? Determine whether or not. Then, if this counter value exceeds the predetermined number of times, the payout execution flag is set, the payout appearance executing flag is set (step S314), and the execution of the payout appearance is started (step S315). The effect time of is set in the effect timer (step S316). In this way, it is determined that it is the end of the big hit game state, and the big hit game state has been a big hit after the number of times the variable display number of special symbols reaches a predetermined number after the end of the previous big hit game state When it is determined that the jackpot gaming state based on the, the payout execution flag is set in step S314, and it is determined that the payout execution flag is set in step S307 of the prize ball processing described later. In step S308 of the prize ball processing, prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number counter are paid out to the player. Also, it is determined that it is the end of the big hit game state, and based on the big hit game state after the end of the previous big hit game state, the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times When it is determined that the jackpot is in the gaming state, following the effect according to the jackpot gaming state, a payout appearance is performed to notify that the prizeballs corresponding to the prize ball number counter are paid out to the player. However, by setting the payout appearance in-execution flag in step S314 and setting the effect time of payout appearance in the effect timer in step S316, the payout appearance execution flag is set in step S311 and step S36 of the special symbol process process. As a result, it is determined that it has been set, and the payout appearance is executed until the effect timer becomes "0" in step S318 described later. In the process of step S312, when it is determined that it is not the end of the big hit game state, the big hit game state is being executed, and it is not the timing when the prize balls according to the prize ball number counter are paid out to the player. Therefore, the processing is terminated at that point.

In addition, as the processing of step S312, when it is determined that it is the end of the jackpot gaming state, regardless of whether or not the processing of steps S314 to S316 has been executed, as the processing of step S317, the variation counter When the counter value is reset (returned to "0"), this process ends. In this way, when it is determined that it is the end of the big hit game state, the big hit game state is a big hit before the number of times the variable display of special symbols reaches a predetermined number after the end of the previous big hit game state. By the big hit game state based on that, even if the prize ball according to the prize ball number counter is not paid out to the player, the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is always reset, and the big hit game state Is configured to count up (“+1”) each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed from the state in which the variation counter is reset (“0”) after the end of.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S311 that the payout appearance in-execution flag is set, it is determined whether the effect timer is "0" as the process of step S318. Then, if the effect timer is "0", it is determined that it is the timing to end the execution of the payout appearance, and as the processing of step S319, the processing is ended when the payout appearance executing flag is reset. If it is determined in the process of step S318 that the effect timer is not "0", the process ends at that point.

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prize ball process (step S19).

Now, in the process of step S301, the detection signal of one of the first starting port sensor 3422 and the second starting port sensor 2593 is in the ON state, and the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b are detected. When it is determined that the game ball has won in any one, as shown in FIG. 187, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, as the processing of step S302, first, the first start mouth sensor 3422, The prize ball corresponding to the detection signal of the second starting opening sensor 2593 is added to the count value of the prize ball number counter. Specifically, when the detection signal of the first starting opening sensor 3422 is turned on, "3" is added to the count value of the prize ball number counter, and the detection signal of the second starting opening sensor 2593 is turned on. Then, "1" is added to the count value of the prize ball counter. That is, even if a game ball is won in either the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b, it is only added to the count value of the prize ball number counter and the prize ball is not immediately paid out. ing. In the process of step S301, neither the detection signal of the first starting port sensor 3422 nor the detection signal of the second starting port sensor 2593 is in the ON state, and the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b are detected. When it is determined that the game ball has not won in any of the cases, the process proceeds to step S303 at that time.

Next, the main control MPU 4110a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is in the ON state, that is, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening 2301 as the process of step S303. Determine whether or not. When it is determined that the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is in the ON state, a payout control command is issued to the payout control board 4110 so that a prize ball corresponding to the detection signal is paid out to the player. Output (step S304). As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 and pays out a prize ball to the player. Specifically, when the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is turned on, ten game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301. In the process of step S303, when the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3421 is not in the on state and it is determined that no game ball has won the general winning opening 2301, the step S305 is performed at that time. Process shifts to.

Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the detection signal of either the first count sensor 2111 or the second count sensor 2578 is in the ON state, that is, the above-mentioned It is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in any one of the one big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509. When it is determined that the detection signal of either the first count sensor 2111 or the second count sensor 2578 is in the ON state, the prize ball corresponding to the detection signal is paid out to the player. The payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 (step S306). As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 and pays out a prize ball to the player. Specifically, when one of the detection signals of the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 is turned on, fifteen game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301. In the process of step S303, neither of the detection signals of the first count sensor 2111 and the second count sensor 2578 is in the ON state, and either the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509. Also, when it is determined that the game ball has not won, the process proceeds to step S307 at that time.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the payout execution flag is set as the process of step S307. Then, if it is determined that the payout execution flag is set, it is determined that the jackpot gaming state has been executed when the jackpot has become a jackpot, and the jackpot gaming state ends the previous jackpot gaming state. After that, it is determined that it is a big hit game state based on a big hit after the variable display number of special symbols reaches 390 times, so that the prize balls according to the prize ball number counter are paid out to the player. Then, the payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 (step S308), and when the payout execution flag is reset (step S309), this process ends. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 and pays out a prize ball to the player. In addition, when it is determined that the payout execution flag is not set in the process of step S307, it is determined that it is not the timing after the execution of the jackpot gaming state, or at the end of the jackpot gaming state. There is, however, whether or not the big hit game state is judged to be a big hit game state based on the fact that it became a big hit after the end of the previous big hit game state and before the variable display number of special symbols reaches 390 times, The process ends at this point.

[7. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 184, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initialization process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (incrementing the 16 ms progress monitoring counter by 1) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

In this 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the main liquid crystal display device 1900, the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, the lamps/LEDs, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0") in step S502, the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the production control process of step S602, in the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) The variation pattern command transmitted by being set, and transmitted by being set in the starting port passing process (steps S45, S47 of the first starting port passing process, steps S55, S57 of the second starting port passing process) The control processing relating to the main liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3111 is executed based on the reception of the holding number designation command and the random number designation command.

Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S604, control processing relating to the lamp/LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp/LED lighting signal to the lamp drive substrate 3013 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating a random number (for example, a read-ahead random number) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, immediately after the 16 ms steady process has started 16 ms, the 16 ms steady process starts from the beginning (command of step S601). Do not execute (from parsing process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is executed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process.

[8. Processing for paying out prize balls]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an example, even when the payout of the prize ball is confirmed along with the entry of the game ball (at the time of winning the game ball), the prize ball is immediately paid out to the player. Without paying out the prize balls until a predetermined condition is satisfied, the prize balls can be collectively paid out. In the following, processing related to such payout of prize balls will be described.

As described with reference to FIG. 187, even if a game ball is won in either the first starting opening 2201 or the second starting opening 2587b, the player is immediately paid the number of prize balls according to the winning opening. The number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening is added to the count value of the prize ball number counter without paying out. In addition, after the jackpot gaming state ends (the predetermined payout condition to be described later is satisfied, and the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot that triggers the player to pay out the number of award balls according to the count value of the award ball number counter After), the variation number counter is used to start counting the variation display number of the special symbol. Then, at the end of the next big hit game state, that is, when the big hit related to the first special symbol or the big hit related to the second special symbol, the big hit game state is executed, and this big hit game state is ended. Sometimes, it is determined whether or not the count value of the variation counter exceeds a predetermined number (390 in this example), and when it is determined that the count value exceeds the predetermined number, a predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition). Is established, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is paid out to the player. That is, after the variation display number of special symbols after the end of the jackpot gaming state reaches a predetermined number (390 times in this example), the next big jackpot triggers a predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) Is established, and at the end of the big hit game state based on the big hit, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter is paid out to the player.

On the other hand, when it is determined whether or not the count value of the variation counter exceeds the predetermined number (390 times in this example), when it is determined that the count value does not exceed the predetermined number, a predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) Therefore, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is not paid out to the player. That is, before the number of times the special symbols have been changed and displayed after the jackpot gaming state has reached a predetermined number (390 in this example), when the next big jackpot is reached, a predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) ) Is not established, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is not paid out to the player. Further, when it is determined that the count value of the variation counter does not exceed the predetermined number (390 times in this example), the count value of the variation counter is reset, that is, the count of the variation display number of the special symbol is reset. However, the count value of the prize ball number counter is not reset, and the count value of the prize ball number counter is carried over even after the jackpot gaming state is over, until the predetermined payout condition is satisfied (prize ball The number of prize balls according to the count value of the number counter is continuously added to the count value of the prize ball counter until a big hit that triggers the payout to the player).

In the present embodiment, the predetermined number of times is set to 390 in determining whether or not the count value of the variation counter exceeds the predetermined number. That is, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, whether or not a predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied (whether or not the number of prize balls is paid out to the player according to the count value of the prize ball counter). As the boundary of (), the number of times the special symbols have been changed and displayed since the end of the previous jackpot gaming state is set to the 390th change. This is a value based on that the jackpot probability in the low probability state is set to 3/11197 (1/399).

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state ends, as long as the special symbol lottery result is out of alignment, depending on the winning of any of the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b The number of prize balls is continuously added to the count value of the prize ball counter. Therefore, after the jackpot gaming state is over, the number of prize balls increases according to the count value of the prize ball number counter in proportion to the number of prizes in the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. Become. Also, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b, unless the number of stored (reserved number) of the first special random number or the second special random number exceeds four, special Since the variable display of the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed, the number of times of variable display of the special symbol is approximately proportional to the number of winnings in the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. (For example, when the number of stored first special random numbers or second special random numbers does not exceed four at any winning, the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b are won. The number of times the variable display of special symbols increases in proportion to the number of times). Therefore, after the variation display number of special symbols after the jackpot gaming state reaches a predetermined number (390 in this example), the count value of the prize ball number counter is triggered by the next jackpot. The number of prize balls is paid out to the player in accordance with the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter, the more the number of times the special symbol fluctuates and is displayed until the next big hit. Will be paid out. On the other hand, before the variable display number of special symbols after the jackpot gaming state reaches a predetermined number (390 times in this example), when the next jackpot is reached, the count value of the prize ball number counter is set. The corresponding number of prize balls is small, and this small number of prize balls is not paid out.

As described above, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, only when the variable display number of special symbols after the end of the previous big hit game state exceeds a predetermined number (390 times in this example) Separately from the big hit game state, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter is paid out to the player. Therefore, even if the number of fluctuations in the display of special symbols after the end of the big hit game state falls into a malfunction such that the predetermined number of times is exceeded, as many prize balls as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter, many prize balls The player is trying to get the number of award balls according to the count value of the award ball number counter because the number is counted and it can be expected for the number of award balls paid out when a big hit is given. The motivation is increased and the game can be continued. In addition, even if the base that is falling during a malfunction is an empty base, a large number of prize balls are being counted as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter, which means that it has been a big hit. Since the expectation can be expected for the number of prize balls to be paid out as an opportunity, the player's motivation to obtain the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is increased, and a new game is performed on the table. Can be made.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed since the end of the previous big hit game state does not exceed a predetermined number (390 times in this example). In this case, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is not paid out to the player, and the number of prize balls is increased until the next big hit (the count value of the prize ball counter is According to the number of prize balls, until the big hit that gives the player the chance to pay out), they are carried over. Specifically, in the low probability state, for example, when the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol is a big hit at the 390 fluctuation immediately before the predetermined number of times (390 times in this example), a prize ball number counter As the number of prize balls according to the count value, as many as 3×390=1170 prize balls will be carried over to the next big hit.

On the other hand, in the high-probability state, the jackpot probability is set to 11/1197 (approximately 1/109), and as a theoretical value until it becomes a jackpot calculated from this jackpot probability, it is special after the jackpot gaming state is over. The variation display number of symbols is a big hit at about 110 variations. For this reason, in the high-probability state, in most cases, after the jackpot gaming state, before the variable display number of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (390 times in this example), the next big jackpot is made. Therefore, the probability that the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is not paid out to the player is high. Then, if the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is displayed does not exceed the predetermined number (390 in this example), the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is not paid out to the player, The number of prize balls is carried over until the next big hit (until the big hit that gives the player the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter).

In a time saving state such as a high probability time saving state (probability change state), the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 to drive the door member 2589. The entrance of the game ball into 2587b is promoted, and the possibility that the big hit by the second special symbol is selected as the next big hit occurs. If the number of prize balls for winning the game ball into the second starting opening 2587b is one, until the big hit related to the second special symbol occurs, the variable display number of the second special symbol is "1." Will continue to be added to the count value of the prize ball number counter. Specifically, in the high-probability state, when the jackpot at the 110th fluctuation is the theoretical value until the jackpot is calculated from the jackpot probability, the number of award balls according to the count value of the award ball number counter is determined. 1×110=110 prize balls will be carried over to the next big hit.

Further, as the big hits set to control to the high probability time saving state (probability change state) after the big hit game state is completed (so-called Ren-chan), the number of prize balls corresponding to the second starting opening 2587b during that period. By continuing to add to the count value of the prize ball number counter, the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball number counter increases. Therefore, when the big hits set to control to the high probability time saving state (probability change state) are consecutive, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball number counter that is added until each big hit is achieved. Even if the number of prize balls is small (as described above, for example, even if the number of prize balls is 110 when the 110th variation is the theoretical value), the number of prize balls corresponding to the count value of the prize ball number counter As a result, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls will be enormous, and the enormous number of prize balls will be carried over to the next big hit.

As described above, in the low probability state, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the variable display number of special symbols after the end of the previous big hit game state is a predetermined number (390 times in this example). If it is not exceeded, or if the big hits set to control in the high probability time-shortening state (probability change state) continue, or if the good times are repeated such as, the prize according to the count value of the prize ball counter A huge number of prize balls will be carried over to the next big hit. For example, when the 16R big hit game state is executed as the big hit game state, about 2000 prize balls are paid out to the player, but after the good times are repeated, special symbols after the end of the big hit game state When the number of times of fluctuation display falls into a bad condition such that it exceeds the predetermined number of times, a huge hit number of games that exceeds the big hit game state, apart from the big hit game state, is triggered by the fact that it becomes a big hit. May be paid to the person. For this reason, if the time of good performance is repeated, even if it falls into a bad condition, a huge number of prize balls may be counted as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter. , It can be expected for the huge number of prize balls to be paid out when it is a big hit, so that the player's motivation to get the huge number of prize balls increases, and the player actively plays the game. be able to.

Further, as in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, whether or not a predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied (the number of times the special symbol has been changed and displayed since the end of the big hit game state) Is after a predetermined number of times, whether the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is paid out to the player) is calculated from the jackpot probability in the low probability state. It is preferable to use about 399 times, which is a theoretical value until a big hit. This makes the player feel uncertain whether a big hit may occur if it exceeds the theoretical value calculated from the big hit probability, and hesitates to continue the game. However, since it is possible to expect for the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter) that is paid out when the jackpot is a big hit, eliminating such a hesitation, This is because the game can be continued.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, whether or not a predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied (after the number of times that the special symbol is variably displayed since the end of the big hit game state reaches a predetermined number of times) Or not, whether or not the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is paid out to the player) is the theory until it becomes a jackpot calculated from the jackpot probability in the low probability state. It may be set differently from the value. For example, if the predetermined number of times is set to exceed the theoretical value until it becomes a big hit calculated from the big hit probability, the number of times the variable display number of special symbols reaches the predetermined number is large. , The number of award balls corresponding to the count value of the award ball number counter increases almost in proportion, so that it is possible to increase the possibility that a huge number of award balls will be paid out to the player when a big hit is given. it can. On the other hand, when the predetermined number of times is set to be less than the theoretical value until it becomes a big hit calculated from the big hit probability, the number of prize balls paid out when the big hit occurs (the prize ball number counter The number of prize balls according to the count value) decreases, but the number of times the variable display of special symbols easily reaches a predetermined number, and the number of prize balls paid out increases when a big hit occurs. A player can easily obtain it.

Also, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, whether or not a predetermined payout condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied (after the number of times the special symbol has been changed and displayed since the end of the big hit game state reaches a predetermined number of times) Whether or not, whether or not the number of award balls according to the count value of the award ball number counter is paid out to the player) is a low probability state or a high probability state, We use the theoretical value until it becomes a big hit calculated from the big hit probability of the low probability state, but depending on whether it is controlled to the low probability state or the high probability state, its boundary ( The predetermined number of times) may be different. However, in the high-probability state, in most cases, before the variable display number of special symbols after the end of the big-hit game state reaches a predetermined number, the number of times that the next big hit (from the big-probability probability in the high-probability state It is preferable that the number of times is far from the theoretical value until the big hit is calculated.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, the fluctuation of the special symbol even if the fluctuation display frequency of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game state exceeds a predetermined number of times (390 times in this example), the fluctuation of the special symbol In the same manner as when the number of times of display does not exceed the predetermined number of times, as well as when the game ball wins in one of the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b, the prize ball corresponding to the winning opening is immediately obtained. The number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening is added to the count value of the prize ball counter without paying out the number to the player. For this reason, if the number of times the special symbols are displayed is changed to a large number even if the number of times that the special symbols are displayed exceeds a predetermined number (390 times in this example), the number of times the special symbols are displayed is increased, and the count of the prize ball number counter is almost proportional. Since the number of prize balls corresponding to the value also increases, it is possible to increase the possibility that a huge number of prize balls will be paid out to the player when a big hit occurs.

Note that, unlike the example of the present embodiment, when the number of times the variable display number of special symbols after the end of the big hit game state exceeds a predetermined number (390 times in this example), the first starting opening 2201, When a game ball is won in any of the second starting ports 2587b, the addition of the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning port to the count value of the prize ball counter is stopped, and the prize corresponding to the winning port is stopped. The number of balls may be paid out to the player. That is, after the variation display number of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game state reaches a predetermined number (390 times in this example), the game ball is received in the first starting port 2201 and the first starting port sensor 3422. Or the game ball is received by the second starting port 2587b and detected by the second starting port sensor 2593, a predetermined number (for example, 3) from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 and the like. The individual game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301. On the other hand, in the case where the game ball wins in one of the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b before the number of times of displaying the variation of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game state reaches a predetermined number of times, Immediately, the number of prize balls according to the winning hole is not paid out to the player, and the number of prize balls according to the winning hole is kept added to the count value of the prize ball number counter. In this way, at the time of malfunction, even if the addition to the count value of the prize ball number counter is stopped, at least 3×390 until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number (390 in this example) =1170 prize balls are counted in the count value of the prize ball counter. For this reason, even if it falls into a malfunction, as the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter, it is added when the variable display number of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (390 times in this example) during a good condition. Many prize balls are counted, and you can expect the prize balls paid out when the big hit is given. In addition, at the time of malfunction, when a game ball is won in either the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b, by paying out to the player the number of prize balls according to the winning port, a special symbol The change in the number of times the player has reached the predetermined number (390 in this example) is better than when the player was in good shape, and the decrease in the number of balls the player has played has been alleviated. While expecting the number of balls, you can easily continue the game.

In the present embodiment, when the number of stored (reserved number) of the first special random number or the second special random number exceeds four, and the game ball wins the first starting opening 2201 or the second starting opening 2587b. Also in, the number of prize balls according to the winning is added to the count value of the prize ball number counter, but the number of stored first special random numbers or second special random numbers exceeds four, and the special symbol ( For prizes in which variable display of (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) is not performed, do not add the number of prize balls according to the prize to the count value of the prize ball number counter, and pay out immediately May be. In this case, in the low probability non-time saving state (normal state), in proportion to the number of game balls winning the first starting port 2201, in the high probability time saving state (probability change state), the game to the second starting port 287b. The number of times of variable display of special symbols increases in proportion to the number of winning balls. In addition, on the top of the pachinko machine 1, the number of big hits on the day or the previous day, the number of times that the current special symbol has changed since the end of the big hit game state, the special symbol that was required between big hits in the past 10 times There is a data display (not shown) that can display the number of times the variable is displayed, etc., and the player visually recognizes this data display, and the special symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state How many times the state of being the next big hit continues before the number of times of change display reaches a predetermined number (390 times in this example), and the number of times of change display of the current special symbol is predetermined after the end of the big hit game state. The player can recognize whether or not the number of times (390 times in this example) has been reached. Then, when the player grasps these pieces of information, the number of prize balls counted in the prize ball number counter is counted, and the number of prize balls (count of the prize ball number counter is counted as a big hit. It is possible to easily recognize whether the number of prize balls according to the value) can be paid out, etc., and it is possible to judge whether or not to perform the subsequent game while taking these information into consideration. ..

Further, in the example of the present embodiment, the period for adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b to the prize ball number counter is controlled to be either a time saving state or a non-time saving state. Regardless of whether or not it covers all periods. For example, in the big hit game state, if it is a big hit game state of being open for a long time, it is easy to win a game ball to the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509 that is opened. Since a large amount of award balls corresponding to the winning in the first big winning opening 2102 or the second big winning opening 2509 are paid out in a short time, the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening are immediately obtained. Even if the number of prize balls corresponding to 2587b is not paid out to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the prize has not been paid out. Also, in the time saving state, a large amount of payout is not made in a short time like in the big hitting game state of opening for a long time, but by so-called right hitting, it is very possible to win a game ball to the second starting opening 2587b. It is easy and the number of times the special symbol fluctuates and is displayed per unit time is increased, so that the player pays attention to the lottery result of the special symbol, and soon the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b. Even if the player does not pay out the number of prize balls in accordance with the above, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the prize has not been paid out.

In addition, in an example of the present embodiment, after the number of times the special symbols have been changed and displayed has reached a predetermined number (390 in this example) since the end of the previous jackpot gaming state, the jackpot game is triggered by the jackpot. When the state is executed, at the end of the big hit game state, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is used to execute the payout appearance based on the paying appearance executing flag, and the prize according to the count value of the prize ball number counter. The player is notified that the number of balls will be paid out. In the present embodiment, in the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111, as a performance based on a big hit start command, a big hit round start command, etc., the big hit game effect during execution of the big hit game state is a payout appearance. Is separately executed before the payout appearance, but the big hit game effect and the payout appearance may be executed integrally. In this way, by carrying out an integrated production of the big hit game effect and the payout appearance, and executing the big hit game state during the execution, for example, when executing the big hit game state of a short time open as the big hit game state. , It becomes difficult to notice that the opening/closing member 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second opening/closing member 2572 of the second attacker unit 2570 is controlled to open, and unlike the jackpot game state in which it is open for a long time, almost a prize ball is obtained. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a sense of loss such as not being able to do so. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls according to the count value of the prize ball counter is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3111. According to this, the more the number of prize balls displayed according to the count value of the prize ball counter is, the more the player has the right to obtain a large amount of game balls at a time, and the player plays the game with expectation. be able to.

In the example of the present embodiment, when the winning opening of either the first starting opening 2201 or the second starting opening 2587b is won, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is added to the winning ball number counter. However, the same is true when the number of winnings in each of the first starting opening 2201 or the second starting opening 2587b is counted and stored. In this case, when the number of times the special symbols have been changed and displayed has reached a predetermined number (390 times in this example) since the last big hit game state was ended, the big hit game state is executed when the big hit is triggered. At the end of the jackpot gaming state, the number of prize balls may be calculated based on the number of prizes won in each winning hole, and the number of prize balls may be paid out to the player.

In addition, in an example of the present embodiment, among the winning openings excluding the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509, prize balls corresponding to the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b. Although the number is added to the prize ball number counter, the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2587b is not targeted, but the first starting port 2201 or the second starting port 2201b is used. Only one of the two starting ports 2587b may be targeted. For example, in a non-time saving state such as a low-probability non-time saving state (normal state), since the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2587b does not occur, only the first starting opening 2201 is targeted, In a time-saving state such as a high-probability time-saving state (probability change state), as long as the player hits the so-called right, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2587b occurs, so only the second starting port 2587b is targeted. Good. Further, among the winning openings excluding the first big winning opening 2102 and the second big winning opening 2509, not only the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b but also the general winning opening 2301 The number of prize balls may also be added to the prize ball counter. Further, instead of targeting all of the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b, for example, one winning of two winnings is accepted. Even if only the number of award balls is added to the award ball counter, or only one place where three award balls are paid out is immediately paid out and the remaining two are added to the award ball number counter. Good. In this case, even if the player does not immediately pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the first starting port 2201 and the second starting port 2587b, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of not being paid out.

[9. Performance display]
FIG. 189 is a view for explaining display of symbols and the like on the main liquid crystal display device. The design (decorative design) display and effect display on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (hereinafter, also referred to as screen 1900) are controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140, and in particular, for the decorative design that is variably displayed, the first special pattern or the second Based on the variation pattern of special symbols. However, the content displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is not limited to being controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140. For example, the main control board 4100 may give an instruction regarding a predetermined display to the peripheral control unit 4140. The peripheral control unit 4140 which has been issued and has received the instruction may display a predetermined image on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol changes in preference to the first special symbol, as described above, and therefore the variation display of the decorative symbol also corresponds to the second special symbol. Display has priority.

In FIG. 189, a central display area 1901, a hold display area 1902, and a pedestal display area 1903 are shown as areas that roughly divide the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1900. The central display area 1901 is an area in which the variable display of the decorative design is mainly performed, and the two left and right arrows shown in the central display area 1901 of FIG. 189 indicate that the decorative designs in the left column and the right column are changing. Means that. As will be described later in detail, in this example, as the individual decorative patterns, for example, patterns showing ten kinds of numbers “0” to “9” are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right columns, respectively, and at the normal time ( When it is not a special time such as reach), the two decorative patterns in the left and right rows are variably displayed, and the decorative patterns in the middle row are displayed after the decorative patterns in the left and right rows are stopped. Incidentally, in the central display area 1901, in addition to such variable display of the decorative pattern, display of a production system such as a background or a character may be performed. For example, the “ream” symbol shown in FIG. 193 later is a symbol having a shape similar to the decorative symbols “0” to “9” and is variably displayed in the central display area 1901 like the decorative symbol. It is a design.

The hold display area 1902 is an area in which information regarding special symbols whose start of variable display is held (information regarding change hold) is displayed. The state in which the start of the variable display is suspended means that the starting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined starting port and the special random number is extracted, but the starting condition is not satisfied and is extracted. It means a state where the variable display of the special symbol based on the special random number is not started, and corresponds to the state where the right based on the special lottery result is reserved. As described above, the holding state of the special symbol is designed to be displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 or the second special symbol storage display 1187, and is displayed on these in the hold display area 1902. In addition, in the form corresponding to each variable hold, information on the variable hold (specifically, for example, the number of special symbols held (memory number), the reliability of each pending change, etc.) is displayed.

In FIG. 189, as an example, up to four hold displays 1902a to 1902d can be displayed, and each hold display is displayed left-justified. For example, in FIG. 189, the variable hold is displayed in the order of the first hold display 1902a, the second hold display 1902b, the third hold display 1902c, and the fourth hold display 1902d every time the variable hold is accumulated. Although the fourth hold display 1902d is indicated by a broken line in FIG. 189, this means that the variable hold does not exist in the fourth hold display portion. Then, when the variable display of the first hold display 1902a is started, the first hold display 1902a moves to the left and is displayed in the pedestal display area 1903. At the same time, the second hold display 1902b and the third hold display 1902a are displayed. The hold display 1902c and the fourth hold display 1902d are moved to the left one by one to become the first hold display 1902a, the second hold display 1902b, and the third hold display 1902c.

The pedestal display area 1903 is an area in which information about fluctuations (special symbols) that are currently being displayed for fluctuation is displayed, and specifically, when the fluctuation hold displayed in the hold display area 1902 starts to change, The fluctuation hold moves and is displayed as a pedestal display 1903a. Note that, in the example of FIG. 189, the "inclined inro" is displayed on the hold displays 1902a to 1902d, and the "normal position (non-inclined) inro" is displayed on the pedestal display 1903a larger than the hold display. ing. By thus providing a difference in the display method between the hold display and the pedestal display, the player can glance at the difference and grasp the difference, so that the effect of enhancing the recognizability in the game progress can be expected.

FIG. 190 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the hold display. Note that the display examples shown in FIG. 190 are not limited to the hold displays 1902a to 1902d, and may be displayed on the pedestal display 1903a. The display example shown in FIG. 190 is divided into (A) to (C) according to the type of each display. FIG. 190(A) is an example of an effect change of “Inro”, which is a basic display pattern, and shows “normal Inro”, “light emitting Ino”, and “flaming up Ino” in order from the left. Has been done. The three types of display examples shown in FIG. 190(A) are finer (more flashy) toward the right, suggesting that the expectation for the advantageous state including the big hit is high. In FIG. 190(B), a character is additionally displayed with respect to the basic display pattern “Inro”, so that the player can be given a suggestion related to the character. Specifically, from the left, in order from the left, you can feel that a "ghost" can make you feel that something might happen, an "opportunity" that makes you feel that you have a chance, and a chance that you can expect more. “Heat” and “run” that suggests a continuous effect (details will be described later) are shown. The display example of FIG. 190(B) is an example, and the suggestion may be made by using other characters. Also, the effect change of the inro shown in FIG. 190(A) and the character addition shown in FIG. 190(B) may be combined and displayed. In such a case, the respective display effects are duplicated. It can be expected that the player will be given the impression. Further, such a combination may include the display example of FIG. 190(C). In addition to such display examples, for example, by changing the display color, the size of the display, and the like, it is possible to realize a display that increases the expectation of an advantageous state including a big hit. As a specific example of the change in the display color, the colors may be changed in order from the one with the lowest expectation, such as “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “gold”.

FIG. 190(C) shows an example in which a design different from the basic display design “Inro” is displayed. As different pattern examples, weapons such as "bow", "small sword", and "large sword" are displayed. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 178, super reach (“middle boss battle reach”, “rath boss battle reach”) in which effect display using a weapon is performed is prepared, By displaying the weapons used in such super-reach in advance instead of the inro, it is possible to suggest to the player the development to super-reach corresponding to each weapon before the hold fluctuation starts. I am trying. In this example, "bow" corresponds to "weak weapon", "small sword" corresponds to "medium weapon", and "large sword" corresponds to "strong weapon". In addition, in order to display the weapon corresponding to the contents of the super reach that actually develops, it is necessary to prefetch the special symbol (or special random number) acquired for the held fluctuation when the fluctuation is held. However, such prefetching is performed, for example, at a predetermined timing by the main control MPU 4100a (for example, a timing at which storage as a pending change is performed) as described above, and the main control MPU 4100a is based on the result of the prefetching. The peripheral control board 4010 may be instructed by a command or the like to change the display of the hold display (displaying a bow instead of the seal), and the peripheral control board 4010 may display the main liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the command. Note that, as the prefetch-related processing, the main control MPU 4100a does not determine the display change (for example, the display of a bow) of the hold display and gives the command to the peripheral control board 4010, but only the preread result is given to the peripheral control board 4010 by a command. The peripheral control board 4010 that has notified and received the command may determine the display change of the hold display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when such a display change of the hold display (or a display change of the pedestal display) occurs, the expectation for a big hit is higher than when the display change does not occur. You may do it. In addition, when a specific display is performed on the hold display (or pedestal display), it may be meant to confirm the big hit in the variation to be displayed (so-called premium display). Such a premium display may be a specific combination due to the above-mentioned display change, for example, when "large sword" is displayed in place of the seal with the display color of "gold" or the character of "heat". It is conceivable that, for example, a "flaming state inro" with "gold" is displayed.

FIG. 191 is a diagram (part 1) explaining a variable display example of a decorative symbol in the main liquid crystal display device. 191 is a variation pattern of the selected deviation when the variation pattern of the deviation is selected based on the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) determined by the main control board 4100 in the special lottery. Based on this, an example of variable display when the peripheral control board 4010 performs variable display of the decorative pattern that does not reach is described. First, in FIG. 191(A), the decorative designs in the left column and the right column are variably displayed, “7” as the decorative design in the left column, and “2” as the decorative design in the right column, respectively from the top of the screen 1900. After moving, it stops near the middle stage of the central display area 1901. The stop timing of the decorative patterns in the left and right rows is not particularly limited. At this time, since the decorative patterns in the left and right columns are different, the reach state is not established, and as shown in FIG. 191(B), the decorative patterns in the middle column are newly variably displayed and stopped (“3” symbol). As a result, the same symbols are not arranged and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably stopped, so that the player can recognize that the variability is missing. Note that when the screen display transitions from FIG. 191(A) to FIG. 191(B), the size of the decorative pattern in the left and right columns is reduced to secure the display area for the decorative pattern in the middle column. Good.

FIG. 192 is a diagram (part 2) explaining a variable display example of a decorative symbol in the main liquid crystal display device. 192, based on the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) determined by the main control board 4100 in the special lottery, when the variation pattern of the big hit or out of reach is selected, the selected variation An example of variable display when the peripheral control board 4010 performs variable display of the decorative pattern through the reach establishment is described based on the pattern. First, in FIG. 192(A), the decorative patterns in the left and right columns are the same as those in FIG. 191(A) up to the point where they stop changing, but in FIG. 192(A), the same decorative pattern (eg, “7” pattern). Is stopped, a reach state is formed. When the reach state is formed by the decorative patterns in the left and right columns, the decorative patterns in the left and right columns move in the direction of the upper corner of the screen 1900 as shown in FIG. In the central portion of, the lottery effect (reach effect) determined based on the selection change pattern table is displayed. Although details of the reach effect are omitted, after that, in the case of a big hit, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7” pattern) as the left and right columns is stopped and displayed in the middle row as well, as shown in FIG. 191C. When the arrangement of the symbols is established, the player can recognize that the variation is a big hit. Further, in the case of out-of-reach, as shown in FIG. 191(D), a decorative symbol (for example, “8” symbol) different from the left and right columns is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and the same symbol arrangement is not established. From this, it is possible to let the player recognize that the variation is out of alignment.

[9-1. Continuous hit production]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as one of the effect control regarding the display of the symbol fluctuation in the main liquid crystal display device, the big hit is pre-read when the fluctuation won to the big hit is suspended, and based on the result of the pre-read. To determine the execution of a specific effect (continuous hitting effect), and when performing a fluctuation display of a fluctuation (preliminary fluctuation) which starts fluctuation before the fluctuation of the big hit, a precursor effect related to the specific effect ( There is a performance control that displays a warning sign before repeated hits. The continuous shot continuous effect is executed, for example, when the main control MPU 4100a selects “prefetch occurrence” shown in FIG. 178 based on the variation pattern. In the following, a series of effect displays related to such a continuous-shot effect (continuous-shot continuous effect) will be described in detail with specific examples. Note that the following description will be given based on the tables and performance expectations shown in FIGS. 177 to 179. Further, the symbols (for example, the screen 1900, the hold display 1902a, etc.) attached to each of the drawings after FIG. 193 correspond to each display in FIGS. 189 to 192.

FIG. 193 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of an effect display regarding continuous hit effect. In particular, FIG. 193(A) shows a case where a special symbol that triggers the start of continuous-shot continuous production is acquired, and FIGS. It shows with.

First, in FIG. 193(A), three hold changes of hold displays 1902a to 1902c are stored in the hold display area 1902, and the fourth hold is displayed while the change display is being performed in the central display area 1901. This is a state in which the fluctuation is additionally stored. Here, it is assumed that the special random number in which the fourth pending change causes a big hit (or reach loss) is determined and is determined as the target of the “prefetch” described above. More specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 178 and the like, the variation pattern is determined based on the special random number (special symbol) acquired in the special lottery, and the lottery determined based on the variation pattern. The main control MPU 4100a makes a pre-reading determination by selecting "pre-reading occurrence" in the effect. In FIG. 193(A), as for the hold display 1902d related to the change subject to the prefetching, not the usual display of the seal, but the seal with the character "Kai" is displayed. It is not necessary to always change the display mode of the hold display of the prefetch target, but by making it possible to display differently from the normal display, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for an advantageous state such as a big hit against the hold change. You can Note that such a change of the display mode may be instructed to the peripheral control MPU 4140a by the main control MPU 4100a, but may be executed by a determination process on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side in order to reduce the processing load of the main control MPU 4100a. ..

Although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can change the display mode of the hold variation (hold change) as shown in the hold display 1902d of FIG. 193(A) when the prefetching process is performed. , Regarding the pending change due to such prefetching, when the pending change occurs for the pending change with a longer waiting time than for the pending fluctuation with a short waiting time until the fluctuation start, the expectation for a big hit The degree may be higher. Specifically, for example, when a hold change indicating a prefetch target is made (for example, a seal with a "phantom" character is displayed), the hold display 1902d makes the hold display more than the hold display 1902a makes the hold change. When changes are made, it means higher expectations for jackpots. By doing so, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases as the time until the start of the change increases, so that an effect of maintaining a high expectation for the big hit can be expected for a long time until the start of the change.

FIG. 193(B) is a display example of the next change of FIG. 193(A). As for each of the hold displays 1902a to 1902d displayed in the hold display area 1902 in FIG. 193(A), the hold display 1902a moves to the pedestal display 1903a and the display of the corresponding change is started, and the hold displays 1902b, 1902c, 1902d. Have moved to the left one by one. As a result, the area in which the hold display 1902d is displayed becomes blank until the next hold storage is made.

In FIG. 193(B), in response to the result of the “look-ahead” performed in FIG. 193(A), the consecutive strike precursor effect is started. Specifically, in the central display area 1901, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol that is originally displayed, the variable effect in which the "ream" symbols in the left and right columns descend from the upper part of the screen 1900 is performed (preliminary strike precursor effect). ). This "repeated" symbol is a predictive symbol that suggests that the consecutive hitting effect can be executed in the future, and when the reach state by the "repeated" symbol is established, the consecutive hitting effect is generated. Therefore, by displaying the variable display with the "repeated" symbol as the consecutive strike indication effect, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the consecutive consecutive strike effect.

In addition, in FIG. 193(B), the character display mode of the hold display 1902c is changed from the character display of “phantom” in FIG. 193(A) to the character display of “run”. , Which suggests that the consecutive hitting effect is performed in the hold, and by displaying the hold display 1903c of the character "ream", the player can have an expectation for the appearance of the consecutive hitting effect. be able to.

FIG. 193(C) shows a display example immediately before the “ream” symbol shown in FIG. 193(B) is stopped, and thereafter, the “ream” symbols in the left and right columns are both displayed in the central display area 1901. When the player reaches the stop state and forms the reach state, the continuous hit pertinent effect is started, and the display shifts to "A" and thereafter (the display after "A" will be described later with reference to FIG. 194). After FIG. 193(C), if the reach state is not formed by the “repeated” symbols in the left and right columns, that is, it means that the consecutive hitting relevant effect is not started in the variation, but at this time, in the screen 1900, the figure is displayed. As shown in 193(D), a display is made such that the “ream” symbol moves away from near the center of the screen 1900.

As shown in FIG. 193(D), when the reach state by the "ream" symbol is not formed, after the special symbol corresponding to the variation stops varying, the next variation is started. At this time, the hold display 1902a shown in FIGS. 193(B) to (D) is moved to the pedestal display 1903a, the display of the corresponding fluctuation is started, and the hold displays 1902b and 1902c in the hold display area 1902 are It will move to the left again one by one, and an indent with the character "ream" will be displayed in the pending change 1902b. Then, in the central display area 1901, the variable display of the "repeated" symbols as shown in FIGS.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, such a continuous strike precursor effect is a pending change (preliminary change) before a pending change (a big hit or a change in which reach loss is prefetched) at which the continuous hit relevant effect is executed. ) Is executed continuously. That is, when the look-ahead regarding the continuous hit effect is performed and it is determined that the continuous hit effect is to be executed, the example of FIG. 193 is shown for each of the pending fluctuations that are pending stored before the target fluctuation. Then, 0 times (when the number of pending fluctuations at the time of prefetching is 1) to a maximum of 3 times (when the number of pending fluctuations at the time of prefetching is 4) are repeated in a manner in which the reach state by the "continuous" symbol is not established. The term "0 times" as used herein means that when the pending change of the prefetch target is stored, if there is no other pending change, the continuous strike precursor effect in which the reach state by the "repeated" symbol is not established is not passed. , Means to shift from the establishment of the reach state by the “ream” symbol to the continuous hit relevant effect.

After that, the fluctuation display of the hold fluctuation advances, and when the fluctuation of the hold fluctuation to be read ahead is started, the display of FIG. 193(B), (C) is followed by the display of "A" and thereafter. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, despite the occurrence of the consecutive strike precursor effect, the reach state by the “repeated” symbol is not finally established and the consecutive strike concerned production does not develop, that is, a so-called dummy. You may make it show the precursor effect of repeated hits. In addition, when a plurality of pending changes are stored before the pending changes to be read ahead, the main control MPU 4100a or the peripheral control MPU 4140a can arbitrarily determine the pending changes that start the precursory strike effect. Good. In this way, when there is a degree of freedom in the execution timing of the dummy effect and the start timing of the precursor effect, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment allows the player to repeatedly hit the effect even if the precursor effect of the continuous attack appears. It is possible to show the progress of the game with a sense of tension and anticipation as to whether or not it will be connected, and it has the effect of increasing interest.

The continuous shot continuous production in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment realizes a "prefetching production with continuity" by the consecutive shot precursor production being able to appear before the execution of the continuous shot pertinent production which is the prefetch production. As described with reference to FIG. 193, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold fluctuation (hold change) during the repeated strike indication effect, thereby increasing the expectation for the execution of the consecutive hit effect and the big hit. be able to. Note that the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may be capable of presenting a "prefetching effect having no continuity" in addition to such continuous hitting effect. The pre-reading effect having no continuity is a pre-reading effect in which a predetermined effect is performed only by the change that is the target of the pre-reading, and an effect related to the predetermined effect is not performed in a change before the target change. An example is a pseudo continuous effect (single pseudo continuous effect) that is not accompanied by a precursor effect in the prior change.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when such a single pseudo continuous effect can be presented, a certain pending change (temporarily held 2) is planned to be a pending change associated with the lost single pseudo continuous effect. In addition, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the continuous hitting continuous effect (prefetching effect having continuity) for another additionally stored change (holding 4) stored additionally. At this time, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can replace the pending change of the pending 2 associated with the single pseudo continuous rendering by giving priority to the display control related to the continuous hit continuous rendering. .. More specifically, assuming that the change of the hold display color is scheduled when moving from the hold 2 to the hold 1, the change is canceled or the display color is changed to a color different from the schedule. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a may execute only the continuous shot continuous effect without executing the single pseudo continuous effect. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is capable of performing such display control to enhance the effect of the continuous-shot continuous production, which is the prefetching effect having continuity, and the prefetching effect having no continuity (here, It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the appearance of the loss in the single pseudo continuous production of the loss) and to maintain the expectation of the big hit.

Further, in the display example shown in FIG. 193, the decorative symbol is not variably displayed in the central display area 1901 at the time of the appearance of the consecutive strike precursor effect. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing such an effect display, the consecutive hit precursory effect is displayed more continuously than the display regarding the big hit in the variation in which the effect is performed (variable display of the decorative pattern). The main purpose can be to suggest continuation to the production (display of whether the reach state is established by the "repeated" symbol), and the production contents are inherited from the consecutive strike precursor production to the consecutive production concerned production. It is possible to realize continuous production of continuous hits. In addition, as another example, in a mode that is less noticeable than the effect display of the continuous-shot continuous production (the consecutive-shot precursor production and the continuous-shot relevant production), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. Good. Specifically, for example, by displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol in an area narrower than usual such as the lower right of the screen 1900, the symbol corresponding to the variation is displayed even while the consecutive strike precursor effect is being performed. It can be shown to the player that the variable display is being performed.

FIG. 194 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of an effect display regarding continuous hit effect. FIG. 194 shows a display example (display after “A”) after the “ream” symbols in the left and right columns are stopped in FIG. 193(C) and the reach state is established. That is, the display illustrated in FIG. 194 is performed in the variable display that is the target of prefetching, and the effect display (FIGS. 193(B) to (C)) in the variation up to FIG. 194 is “continuous”. It is the same production display as the consecutive strike precursor production in which the reach state by the symbol is not established.

In FIG. 194(A), the "rear" symbols in the left and right columns are stopped in the central display area 1901 and the reach state is established. After that, as shown in FIG. 194(B), the "rear" symbols in the left and right columns are overlapped so as to be merged into one, so that the reach state is established by the "ream" symbols (that is, the continuous hit pertinent effect). The establishment of the start condition) may be more clearly specified. Then, the effect display peculiar to the continuous hit effect as shown in FIG. 195 is started.

Note that in FIGS. 194(A) and 194(B), the pedestal display area 1903 does not have a pedestal display that resembles a normal “inro” but a pedestal display that resembles a “bow”. This is an example of the display change regarding the hold display and the pedestal display, and the display change does not necessarily have to be performed. However, for example, when a pedestal display in the shape of a “bow” is displayed as shown in FIG. 194, the super-reach (“medium boss battle reach”, “last boss battle reach” and “rath boss battle” in which the effect display using the weapon is displayed on the “bow” is displayed. Since it is a picture that suggests "weak weapon" of "reach"), it suggests that the above-mentioned super reach of the production mode using "weak weapon" appears in the fluctuation displayed on the pedestal (that is, the current fluctuation) can do. By performing such a display change, it is possible to make the player realize the aspect of the reach effect before the actual reach effect is started, and the reach effect is highly expected to be a big hit. In the case of a production, it is possible to increase the expectation of a big hit, which contributes to an increase in interest.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the variation in which the pedestal display imitating the “bow” is performed as shown in FIG. 194(A), the supermarket using the “bow (weak weapon)” as described above is used. It is possible to have not only the development in which the reach is displayed, but also the development in which the production in which the expectation for the big hit is higher than the display content is displayed. Specifically, despite the display of a pedestal in the shape of a "bow (weak weapon)", it is possible to show a production using "large sword (strong weapon)" in the subsequent super reach. By being able to perform such a production control, while making the player have a certain expectation for the jackpot by the "bow" display, it is possible to change to a production with a higher expectation for the jackpot. You can expect it.

FIG. 195 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of an effect display regarding continuous hit effect. 195(A) to (D) show an example of the effect display unique to the continuous hitting effect in the continuous hitting effect, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 196, each reach determined based on the variation pattern. Shift to production (lottery production).

In the continuous hit production, as shown in FIG. 195, within the variation period of the special symbol corresponding to the variation of the prefetch target (within one variation period of the special symbol), the decorative symbol temporarily stops in the central display area 1901. An effect that is displayed in a variable manner is performed a plurality of times sandwiching (a plurality of times such variable display effect of a decorative pattern is also generally called a pseudo continuous effect). The "temporary stop" here means a display control that allows the player to feel the stopped state of the decorative symbol, and the realization method thereof is not particularly limited. Specifically, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1900, by displaying the swinging of the decorative pattern in a minute range while including the stopped state within a minute time, it is as if the decorative pattern is stopped by the player. Can be shown to.

In FIG. 195(A), decorative symbols (for example, “7” symbols) of the same symbol are variably displayed in the left and right columns. And as shown in FIG. 195(B), the left column "7" symbol may be temporarily stopped near the middle row, and then the right column "7" symbol may be stopped near the middle row. The movement is displayed in a slow motion to the extent that it is caused. After that, as for the decorative design in the right column, the decorative design of the same design as the left design is temporarily stopped (FIG. 195(D)), or the decorative design of a design different from the left design (for example, “8” design) is temporarily stopped. (FIG. 195(C)).

In the case of FIG. 195(C), since the reach state is not established because the same symbols are not aligned in the left and right columns, the reach is not developed. At this time, the temporary stop state of the symbols in the left and right columns is released, and the variable display shown in FIG. 195(A) is performed again. Then, again in FIG. 195(B), whether or not the same symbols are aligned in the left and right columns is displayed by temporary stop, and when the same symbols are not aligned, the re-variation is repeated. As described above, a plurality of times of variable display sandwiching the temporary stop of such a decorative symbol is a pseudo display effect performed within one variable display of the special symbol, and the number of repetitions thereof is the main control MPU4100a (or Peripheral control MPU4140a) can be arbitrarily set within a range that does not exceed the variation time of the special symbol. Then, for example, if the number of repetitions is determined in accordance with the degree of expectation for a big hit, the player can increase the expectation for a big hit as the number of repetitions increases.

After the variable display of the decorative design is repeated a plurality of times in the left and right columns via FIG. 195(C), finally when the decorative design of the same design is temporarily stopped in the left and right columns, it becomes FIG. 195(D), and the left and right columns. The reach state is established by aligning the same symbols with, and the reach effect as shown in FIG. 196 is developed as the display after “C”.

Note that the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may have a pattern that does not finally shift to FIG. 195(D) even if the continuous shot continuous effects shown in FIGS. 193 to 195 are displayed. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 195(C), the decorative symbols are permanently stopped in the manner that the same symbols are not aligned (as opposed to provisional stop), and the variation of the decorative symbol in the middle row is stopped, and the change is displayed. However, it is preferable to set the frequency of occurrence of such an intermediate ending effect to be low in order to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player.

FIG. 196 is a diagram (part 4) illustrating an example of an effect display regarding continuous hit effect. FIG. 196 shows a screen transition of the reach effect as an example of effect display following the reach state by the decorative pattern established in FIG. 195(D). In FIG. 196(A), the start of the reach is shown together with the clear indication of the reach state, and then one of the reach effects appears (FIGS. 196(B) to (D)), and the result of the big hit (FIG. 196(E). )) or the result of reach loss (FIG. 196(F)).

Here, the reach effect shown in FIG. 196, as described above with reference to FIG. 178, the reach effect determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol (that is, determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol). The reach production corresponding to the produced production number is displayed. For example, when the variation pattern 2 of the jackpot is selected (see FIG. 177) and the production number 7 is determined in the lottery production distribution table (see FIG. 178), the “lasbos battle + weak weapon” production content “lasbos battle” is selected. REACH” is executed, and the effect display as shown in FIG. 196(E) through FIG. 196(B) is performed, which shows that the jackpot is a big hit. In addition, when the "prefetch" is performed and a continuous-shot continuous production is performed, it is assumed that the reach production that appears in the continuous-shot production has a high expectation of a big hit. For example, in the example of the production expectation degree shown in FIG. 179, “Medium boss battle reach of strong weapon”, “Las boss battle reach of various weapons” and the like are preferable.

In addition, in FIG. 194, the example in which the display of the pedestal is changed to “bow (weak weapon)” has been described. It is possible to grasp the mode of the production (here, the type of weapon), and display the suggestion of the corresponding weapon before the appearance of the reach production. Further, the display change to the weapon is not limited to the pedestal display, but may be performed with the hold display shown in FIGS. 193(A) and 193(B). By referring to the effect number, it is possible to realize a suggestion regarding the content of the reach effect before the change of the prefetch target is started.

As described above, in the continuous hit effect of the present embodiment, based on the look-ahead of the lottery result, when the change (target change) that is the target of the look-ahead changes, the "repeated hit effect" appears. , When the pending variation (pre-variation) changes before the target change of the prefetching, the "continuous-stroke precursor effect" is displayed as the precursor effect of the "continuous-stroke relevant effect". Repeated hitting, the effect is such that a repetitive effect (pseudo continuous effect) as to whether or not a reach state based on a decorative pattern is established is performed, and a predetermined reach effect is revealed after the reach state is formed by the effect. Run on. On the other hand, the consecutive warning sign effect is the number of times of execution of the consecutive warning sign effect whether or not the reach state is established by the "repeated" symbol (the number of times of change of the special symbol corresponding to the precursor effect, that is, the prior variation Repeated for the number of pieces. Then, the same effect as the consecutive hit precursor effect is performed in the early stage of the consecutive hit relevant effect, and the pseudo consecutive effect is generated after the formation of the reach state by the "ream" symbol is shown, so that the consecutive hit precursor effect is produced. And the continuous hit is strengthening the relationship with the relevant production.

In such a continuous-shot continuous production, when the continuous-shot relevant production is set as the specific production, in the continuous-show precursor production, the precursor production related to the effect content of the specific production is continuously executed. Specifically, this precursor effect is, for example, an effect that continuously indicates whether the reach state based on the “ream” symbol is established (FIG. 193, etc.), and the result after the precursor effect is repeated is the precursor of continuous hits. Continuous production instead of production In this production, it is shown that the reach state by the "repeated" symbol is established (Fig. 194 etc.). That is, according to the continuous hit continuous production of the present embodiment, the result of the precursor effect continuously performed is displayed as the variation (corresponding to the target variation) of the specific production after the advance variation for performing the precursor production. As a result, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the big hit can be maintained until after the pre-variation in which the consecutive strike precursor effect is performed.

In other words, according to the continuous shot continuous production of the present embodiment, since the final result of the production in the preliminary change (precursor production of the continuous shot) is indicated by the variation after the preliminary variation (target variation), the pre-variation loses mode. Even if is displayed, the user can feel the possibility that the effect will continue to the next change, and as long as the pending change is stored, the expectation can be maintained until the previous change.

Further, according to the continuous-shot continuous production of the present embodiment, the reach state is formed because the production in the pre-variation (the continuous-shot precursor production) appears in a manner similar to the main production (the continuous-shot relevant production). It can be expected that the more continuous the continuous strike precursor effect continues for a plurality of fluctuations without giving a similar impression as the pseudo continuous effect in the continuous strike relevant effect continues. That is, when the reach state is not formed in the consecutive-hit warning production, the number of repetitions of the consecutive-hit warning production is increased. Therefore, the appearance of such a lost state rather increases the expectation for a big hit in the consecutive-hit production. Produce an effect.

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, while it is possible to make the player expect a big hit for the fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead effect, it is difficult to hold the expectation for a big hit in the fluctuation before the fluctuation. However, according to the continuous-shot continuous production of the present embodiment, by forming a series of continuous-shot continuous productions with a strong association between the continuous-shoot precursor effect and the continuous-shot relevant production, This makes it possible to realize a look-ahead production that sustains the player's expectation of a big hit during a series of consecutive continuous productions starting from the appearance stage of pre-hit warning production.

Further, according to the continuous-shot continuous production of the present embodiment, the production by the "continuous" symbol in the continuous-shot precursor production differs depending on the number of pending changes at the time of prefetch execution and the start timing of the continuous-shot precursor production, but a plurality of Since it can be continuously performed at the time of the change of the prior change, it can be made to appear repeatedly a plurality of times in the change period for a plurality of times by the special symbol corresponding to the previous change. That is, in the continuous hit production of the present embodiment, it is possible to show a repeat effect indicating whether or not the reach can be established by the “repeated” symbol in the multiple hit precursor production, and in the subsequent continuous hit production, decoration is performed. Since the repetitive effect indicating whether or not the reach is established by the symbol (for example, the “7” symbol in FIG. 195) is displayed, the “repetitive strike precursor effect is executed in a rendition mode imitating the consecutive impact concerned effect”. , Consecutive hit precursor effect and continuous A series of consecutive continuous hit effects having a strong relationship are formed by the effect.

According to such a continuous-shot continuous production, since the continuous-shot precursor effect and the continuous relevant production have a common feature as the continuous-shot consecutive production, is the continuous-shot precursor production a part of the continuous strike relevant production? As described above, the player can be made to recognize, and the continuous hit relevant effect can be made to appear over a continuous variable period starting from the appearance period of the consecutive hit precursory effect.

Further, in the pre-reading effect in the conventional gaming machine, when the execution of the pre-reading effect is suggested by the hold display or the like, it is possible to increase the expectation to the big hit for the pre-reading effect, while There was a problem that it was difficult to hold the expectation for a big hit about the change digestion that takes place before the change. However, as described above, the continuous-shot continuous production of this embodiment is similar to the pseudo continuous production shown in the continuous-shot relevant production (corresponding to the prefetch production) in the continuous-shot precursor production performed before the prefetch production. By performing the production contents (continuous production using the "repeated" symbol), it is possible to realize a series of continuous continuous production by giving a strong relationship between the consecutive damage precursor production and the continuous production. Therefore, it is possible to overcome the problems caused by the conventional look-ahead effects as described above, and to maintain the expectation of a big hit over a plurality of fluctuations in which a series of continuous hit effects are performed.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the execution of the prefetching effect is suggested by the hold display or the like, the player cannot be sure whether or not the anticipation effect will occur until the prefetching effect actually appears, and the player is worried. However, according to the continuous-shot continuous production of the present embodiment, since the consecutive-shot precursor production appears before the prefetch production, the player's prefetch production is performed at a predetermined timing. It is possible to be confident that the (continuous hitting effect) will be executed, and to entertain the game with a sense of security and anticipation.

Further, if the target of the look-ahead effect is always clearly indicated, there is a problem that the player's interest is lessened in addition to the variation, but according to the continuous hit continuous effect of the present embodiment, it is shown in FIG. 193(A). It is also possible to perform control in which such a change in the hold display is not performed, and if the consecutive-hit sign effect is generated in the case where such control is performed, to the player, how long the consecutive-hit sign effect continues, In addition, since it is not known at which timing the look-ahead effect (the consecutive hitting effect) will occur, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for a big hit in all the variable displays in which the precursor effect of the consecutive hits appears. , It has the effect of achieving a sense of expectation.

Further, according to the continuous-shot continuous production of the present embodiment, even if the reach state is not formed in the continuous-shot precursor production and the player is in a lost state, the continuous-shot precursor production may continue even in a subsequent change. The effect of maintaining the player's expectation over a plurality of fluctuations can be expected.

Further, according to the continuous-shot continuous production of the present embodiment, in a series of continuous-shot continuous productions, the continuous-shot precursor production is a big hit by the continuous-shot continuous production, with respect to the continuous shot relevant production performed based on prefetching. It corresponds to the expected production. Then, the consecutive-hit precursor effect is displayed in a mode that suggests continuation to the successive hit concerned effect rather than showing the big hit in the fluctuation in which the concerned effect is performed, and the consecutive-huge precursor effect displayed in such a mode. By executing the continuous hit relevant effect after, a series of continuous continuous effects can be displayed as a succession effect that inherits the consecutive precursor effect. Specifically, as described in the description of FIG. 193, in the consecutive strike precursor effect, not the variable display of the decorative symbol, but whether or not the reach state is established by the “ream” symbol is displayed (or from the variable display of the decorative symbol). By highlighting whether or not the reach state is established by the "continuous" symbol), it suggests continuation to the continuous hit pertinent effect, and the effect content is inherited from the consecutive hit precursor effect to the continuous hit pertinent effect. Corresponding to realizing a series of continuous hit production.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the effect with high expectation of a big hit is continuously executed over a plurality of fluctuation periods of the special symbol, the big hit is won each time the symbol is stopped in each variation. Since the winning was denied, there was a possibility that the interest of the player would be reduced, but according to the continuous hit continuous production in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, a big hit in the consecutive strike precursor effect. The winning display of is not emphasized (or is not displayed), and the effect display is performed in a mode in which the suggestion of continuation to the consecutive hit relevant effect is emphasized, thereby diminishing the meaning of the winning in the consecutive strike precursor effect. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player due to the display of the deviation in the variation in the indication of repeated hits.

Further, in the continuous hit production in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the consecutive shot precursor effect is performed over a plurality of variations, each variation is not isolated and the sense of waste in each variation of the consecutive strike precursor effect is eliminated. However, it is possible to realize an effective production in which continuous production with high expectations (high reliability) is performed toward the production.

Further, according to such continuous hit production, as long as the consecutive damage indication production continues continuously, expectations for the highly reliable continuous hit production can be maintained, so that the value for the consecutive damage indication production is increased. It is possible to provide a continuous production in which the reliability is increased as the precursor effect of continuous hits continues.

In addition, in the continuous shot continuous production in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, continuous shots are made in each variation of the pre-variation stored before the variation of the prefetch target before the consecutive shot based on the prefetch production. A series of continuous-shot continuous effects can be realized by executing the continuous-shot precursory effect having relevance and continuity with the effect. At this time, since the effect time of the series of continuous-shot continuous effects includes the variable time due to the precursory continuous-shot effect, even if the fluctuation pattern of the continuous-shot relevant effect is relatively short, the overall effect time is long. Can be secured. Generally, the longer the production time, the higher the player's expectation for a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to secure a long production time in a series of continuous continuous hit production in this way, so that the variation time of the prefetch target is short. Even so, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the big hit, and to expect an increase in interest. Specifically, for example, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation (right) of the prefetch target is 60 seconds, when the normal reach effect is performed, the effect time is only 60 seconds. However, in the continuous-shot continuous production according to the present embodiment, since the continuous-shot continuous production is formed in a manner in which the continuous-shot relevant production and the continuous-shot precursory production have a strong relationship, for example, the variation time of the continuous-shot precursor production is 15 If it is repeated three times in a second, the effect time in a series of consecutive continuous effects is 105 seconds (15×3+60=105), and an effect time that is 1.7 times the original effect time can be realized. It should be noted that the ability to secure a comparatively long production time by such a series of consecutive continuous productions is expected to be particularly effective in production in a time saving state in which the variation time is likely to be set shorter than in the normal state (non-time saving state). it can.

[9-2. Showdown series production]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as one of the effect displays different from the continuous hit effect described above in 9-1, a special display that expects that a specific effect mode (reach state) by the decorative pattern is established ( A continuous production consisting of an expected production where a so-called tempo twist is displayed and a main production in which the establishment of a specific production mode (reach state) can be displayed after a special display similar to the expected production is repeatedly displayed. is there. In this example, such a continuous production is tentatively referred to as a “decision battle continuous production” and will be described in detail below. Note that the decisive battle continuous effect is realized, for example, by the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a) controlling the effect contents to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. However, the execution timing and effect result of the effect are determined. For, the peripheral control board 4010 may be executed based on an instruction from the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a).

First, as described above with reference to FIG. 176(B), in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the types 1 to 3 are prepared as the types of jackpots, and the jackpot lottery mode when each of the jackpots is won (Low-probability state/high-probability state) determines the time period (time-saving count) controlled to the short-time state differently (100 low-probability states, 165 high-temporal states) Whether or not the subsequent gaming state is controlled to the high-probability state is determined by whether or not a V prize is won during the jackpot game corresponding to each specific jackpot. More specifically, for example, in the case of winning any of the large jackpots of the specific 1 to specific 3 in a low probability state, it is controlled to a time saving state of 100 times after the big jackpot, and when a V prize is won in the big jackpot (actually, Specifically, in the case of the specific 1 or the specific 3 of the V long pattern), the high probability state is controlled. Then, the high-probability state shifts to the low-probability state when the time saving state ends. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the high-probability time-shortened state controlled after the big hit ends has a control period limited by the number of games, and corresponds to a so-called “number-of-times definite probable state”.

Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 169 and the like, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the reach determination table (not shown) used in the high probability time saving state (including the number-of-times-breaking probability variation state) is lost, By setting a relatively small number (or 0) of reach random numbers to be used as a reach, it is possible to increase the expectation for a big hit when the reach state is established in the high probability time saving state. The "decision battle continuous effect" of this example is an effect that mainly appears in such a number-of-times definite probability state. In this number-of-times definite probability state, the reach state is only established in the production process accompanying the variable display of the decorative pattern. The expectation for a big hit is high. It should be noted that the decisive battle continuous effect may be able to appear even in other game states (for example, a low probability time saving state or a normal game state), although the degree of the effect expected depending on the appearance of the effect is different.

In the decisive battle continuous production, a special display (tempered agitation) that appears to expect the reach state to be established due to the decorative design appears, and a reach state based on the decorative design is established after the special display (tempe agitation) appears repeatedly. And a main effect that can be displayed. In other words, the special display (tempered agitation) will appear in both the expected production and the main production, and when the special display appears, the player determines whether the expected production or a part of the main production. It's hard to do. The expected production can be executed when the production time (corresponding to the variation time of the decorative pattern determined based on the variation time of the variation pattern) that is relatively easy to be selected in the highly accurate short time state is selected. It is assumed that the effect is an effect that is easily selected when the expectation for a big hit is high in a highly accurate time-shortened state and can be executed when a relatively long effect time is selected. The "relatively easy to select effect time" in which the expected effect can be executed is often an effect time that is easily selected when the lottery result is missed in the highly accurate time saving state.

As a specific example, when a holding variation that is a big hit is stored, and when a variation pattern that can present the main effect for the holding variation is selected, there is a relatively high probability (for example, 1/2 or more). The decisive battle continuous effect may be executed (in a ratio). At this time, it is preferable that the expected effect is continuously executed in one or more hold changes stored before the hold change.

By performing such a decisive battle continuous production, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the advantageous game state in which the controlled period is limited by the number of games (for example, the number division probability change state), it is relatively easy to select After the expected effect is executed when the time is selected and the special display (tempered fueling) appears, and when the main effect is executed and the special display is displayed multiple times when the expectation for the big hit is high The reach production is revealed after the reach state is established by the decorative pattern. As a result, when the number of divisions is probable, the chances of a special display appearing when the jackpot is won (or the expectation for the jackpot is high) increase. It is possible to increase the expectation for.

Further, according to such a decisive battle continuous production, in the advantageous game state in which the control period is set to a finite number of times (for example, the number division probability variation state), the expected production is relatively easy to be selected, so that a special display appears. Opportunities are high, but on the other hand, the special display is displayed even in the main production, which is easy to be selected when the expectation for the big hit is high. Therefore, the special display can show the expectation for the big hit. .. And even in a situation where the control period of the advantageous game state is shortened and the expectation for the big hit tends to be lowered, the expectation for the big hit is maintained when the special display appears by the expected effect or the main effect. Can be made.

In the following, some specific example display effects of such a decisive battle continuous effect will be described.

[9-2-1. Display example of decisive battle continuous production (first example)]
A first example of the decisive battle continuous production will be described with reference to FIGS. 197 to 198. Although details will be described later, in the first example, in the number-of-times definite change state, it is determined that the storage of the variation corresponding to the hold display 1902c of FIG. The MPU 4100a performs pre-reading determination, and displays the fluctuations of the fluctuations stored before the storage of the fluctuations (that is, the fluctuations corresponding to the pending displays 1902a and 1902b and the pedestal display 1903a in FIG. 197A). The expected performance is executed when the game is viewed. It should be noted that each variation in which the expected performance is executed is assumed not to win the jackpot (falls away), and the production time determined based on the variation pattern of each variation is the production time in which the expected production can be selected. Suppose there is. And, as described above, the effect time for which such an expected effect can be selected is the “relatively easy-to-select effect time” that is easily selected when the lottery result in the highly accurate time-shortened state is missed.

FIG. 197 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of an effect display regarding the decisive battle continuous effect of the first example. 197(A) to (E) show an example of continuous effect display in the expected effect of the decisive battle continuous effect.

First, in FIG. 197(A), in the screen 1900 in which the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the pedestal display 1903a is started, the look-ahead determination is performed for the storage of the variation corresponding to the hold display 1902c as described above. On the basis of the result, the hold display 1902c is displayed in the flame-up inro (see the example of FIG. 190(A)). The internal processing up to the display of the flamed-up imprint on the hold display 1902c will be described in detail. Regarding the storage of the variation corresponding to the hold display 1902c, the main control is performed based on the random number value of the special random number acquired by the special lottery. The MPU 4100a decides to execute the pre-reading determination, and the result of executing the pre-reading determination as to whether or not it is a big hit based on the determination is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via a command, and the pre-reading attached to the command received by the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Based on the result of the determination, the hold display 1902c is displayed in the flame-up inro.

Next, in FIG. 197(B), the decorative pattern in the left column (for example, the “7” symbol) among the decorative symbols that were changing in FIG. 197(A) is stopped and displayed, and in the fanned character display area 1904. A predetermined character 1904a (the character 1904a is, for example, a character named “P-chan”) is displayed. Here, in FIG. 197(B), the dialogue is displayed with the character “Chance!” together with the drawing of the character 1904a, and the character 1904a “P-chan”, the dialogue display “Chance!”, and the left column stop. By the appearance of the "special display" indicated by the combination of the decorative patterns "7", the changing pattern of the changing decorative pattern in the right column and the decorative pattern in the left column are in a specific mode (specifically, reach state). We have realized the tempura-inspired production that makes us feel the expectation of forming. Then, for the decorative design in the right column, a state in which the same decorative design (“7” design) as the stopped decorative design in the left column may be stopped is shown.

That is, in FIG. 197(B), in the state where the “7” symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol in the left column, the character 1904a is displayed while saying “Chance!”, so that the changing decorative symbol in the right column is displayed. It is a suggestion that there is a possibility of stopping at the "7" symbol (initiating the establishment of the tempai state (reach state) by the "7" symbol), the stop decoration symbol in the left column, the character 1904a, and the dialogue. The “special display” formed by the display corresponds to a tempura-inspiring effect that expects the establishment of a specific mode (reach state).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the above-mentioned “special display”, the display in the fanned character display area 1904 (specifically, for example, the character 1904a and its dialogue) is performed without including the stop decoration pattern in the left column. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the formation of a specific aspect (reach state) even with only the display), but when the stop decorative pattern in the left row is combined, the expected specific aspect is more It can be specifically shown (what can be expected for the formation of the reach state by the “7” pattern). Further, such a "special display" is not necessarily limited to being formed by the stop decoration pattern in the left column, the character 1904a, and the line display, and may be any one or a combination thereof. It may be formed by another character (a character 1904b described later), a character display (“chance?” described later), or the like, or may be formed by including other drawing. Further, the display mode of the "special display" may be changed depending on the remaining number of times (the number of games) controlled to the advantageous game state.

Note that in FIG. 197(B), it is said that the decorative pattern in the left column is stopped, but in reality, the decorative pattern is not completely stopped and displayed, and a fine vibration state or a swinging state is involved. It may be temporarily stopped. In the following description as well, unless otherwise specified, such a temporary stop state is referred to as a stop of a decorative pattern.

FIG. 197(C) is an example of an effect screen after the tempo-inspiring effect is shown in FIG. 197(B), and the variation may not be a big hit (fall), so the right column shows the reach. Decorative symbols that do not form a state (for example, "8" symbols) are stopped. At this time, the dialogue display of the character 1904a changes to "Chance?", which is an expression with a relatively lower degree of expectation than "Chance!" in FIG. 197(B). Although such a dialogue display "Chance?" certainly did not reach the one that forms the special mode (reach state), the expectation for the big hit has not been completely lost yet. It suggests that the "chance" may continue. Therefore, the display of FIG. 197(C) has an effect of giving a feeling of continuation of the chance state based on the “special display” displayed up to FIG. 197(B).

After that, since the reach state was not formed by the decorative patterns in the left and right rows, the decorative pattern in the middle row was also variably stopped (“3” in the figure) as shown in FIG. It is shown that the variation is not a big hit but the decoration is completely stopped. Then, one game is ended by the screen transition from FIG. 197(A) to (D). Since the expected effect shown in FIG. 197 is completed and displayed each time one game is completed, the expected effect is also completed once at the stage of FIG. 197(D). Then, in FIG. 197(E), as the next change display, the hold display 1902a moves to the pedestal display 1903a, and the change corresponding to the display is started.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 197(A), in the first example, the third hold display 1902c is a change corresponding to the main effect, and three changes that have been displayed before the change (FIG. 197( In the pedestal display 1903a and the hold displays 1902a and 1902b) in A), the expected effects as shown in FIGS. 197A to 197D are repeatedly executed.

Although it is assumed that the expected effect is executed in each variation corresponding to the hold displays 1902a and 1902b and the pedestal display 1903a in FIG. 197(A), whether or not to execute the expected effect in each variation is determined by the main effect. The determination may be made based on the pre-reading process accompanying the execution determination, or may be distributed based on the production time of each variation regardless of the execution determination of the main production.

FIG. 198 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of an effect display regarding the decisive battle continuous effect of the first example. 198(A) to (E) show an example of continuous effect display until the reach effect is started in the main effect of the decisive battle continuous effect, and FIGS. 198(F) to (H) show the subsequent effects. The example of the production display after the reach production is shown.

FIG. 198(A) shows an example of an effect display immediately after the variation targeted for the main effect is started. The pedestal display 1903a in FIG. 198(A) corresponds to the variable storage which is the target of the main effect shown in the hold display 1902c in FIG. 197(A), and is displayed in the left and right columns in the central display area 1901 of the screen 1900. The decorative pattern is changing.

Next, in FIG. 198(B), the decorative pattern in the left column (for example, the “7” symbol) among the decorative symbols that were changing in FIG. 198(A) is stopped and displayed, and in the fanned character display area 1904. , Character 1904a and the dialogue display "Chance!" are drawn. At this time, the decorative design in the right column is not stopped yet, and the same decorative design (“7” design) as the stopped decorative design is stopped in the left column. The effect display in FIG. 198(B) is similar to that in FIG. 197(B), and the decorative pattern in the right column that is changing is in a specific mode with the decorative pattern in the left column (specifically, reach state). ). That is, in FIG. 198(B), as in the case of FIG. 197(B), the "special display" that expects the establishment of the specific mode (reach state) by the stop decoration pattern in the left column, the character 1904a, and the dialogue display. ] Has appeared.

In this production, after the "special display" shown in FIG. 198(B) appears, the number of times the reach state is repeatedly not established, and whether or not the reach state is established after that, The peripheral control MPU 4140a can determine based on the variation pattern (more specifically, the variation time (effect time) of the decorative pattern determined based on the variation pattern). In the example of FIG. 198, the description will be continued assuming that the reach state is not once established (not established).

As an example of the case where the reach state is not once established after FIG. 198(B), FIG. 198(C) shows a state in which the “8” symbol is stopped in the decorative pattern in the right column, and at this time, in the left and right columns. The reach state by the decorative pattern is not established. However, since the dialogue display of the character 1904a is “Chance?”, it indicates that the expected state regarding the establishment of the specific mode (reach establishment) is still continuing. Based on this suggestion, the player can expect, based on the production process up to that point, whether or not the decorative pattern is re-varied and the reach state is established, or the tempura-inspired production is re-generated.

After FIG. 198(C), the decorative design (“7” design) in the left column is stopped, and the decorative design in the right column is changed again (FIG. 198(B)), and the tempai-inspiring effect is displayed again. .. Here, the effect process for executing the re-changing of the decorative pattern from FIG. 198(C) is realized by using the pseudo continuous effect under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a, for example. In the pseudo continuous production, after forming a fluctuating stop state by placing the decorative pattern in a stopped state by "temporary stop", the stop state is released and the decorative pattern (here, only the decorative pattern in the right column) By changing again, it is possible to realize a mode in which the decorative design fluctuates in a pseudo manner continuously (or fluctuation stop) over a plurality of times within one fluctuation time of the special design. When executing such a pseudo continuous effect in the main effect, the number of pseudo variations due to the decorative pattern is determined by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the total effect time required for a series of pseudo continuous effects and the reach effect thereafter is: The change time of the special symbol in the change is not exceeded.

It should be noted that, when the temptation insulting effect is reproduced from FIG. 198(C), the character drawn in the insulting character display area 1904 may be changed as shown in FIG. 198(D). In FIG. 198(D), the appearing characters are changed from the character 1904a ("P-chan") to the character 1904b (for example, a character having a higher expectation than "P-chan" and named "Q-chan"). has been edited. Further, in FIG. 198(D), the character “Gekiatsu!!” is displayed as the dialogue display of the character 1904b, and in the case of FIG. 198(B) to (C) (“chance!” and “chance?”). It is suggested that the expectation is higher than that.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 198(E), the same decorative design (“7” design) as in the left column is stopped in the right column, so that the establishment of the specific mode (reach state) is revealed. In FIG. 198(E), the establishment of the specific mode is also taught by the dialogue display "Reach!". Note that, as described above, since the peripheral control MPU 4140a can arbitrarily determine the number of repetitions of tempai warping and the success or failure of the reach state based on the variation pattern of the variation, for example, FIG. It is also possible to shift from FIG. 198(B) to FIG. 198(E) without going through (C) and FIG. 198(D).

By performing the effect display as shown in FIGS. 198(A) to (E) in this way, a special display (tempered agitation) for expecting the establishment of the specific mode (reach state) appears at least once. After that, the establishment of the particular mode is revealed. Regarding the specific number of appearances of the special display in this production, for example, when the reach state is established without reaching the reach non-establishment once, the number of appearances of the special display is one, When the reach state is established after the reach is not established 3 times by the pseudo continuous production, the number of times the special display appears is 4 in total.

After FIG. 198(E), various reach effects appear (FIG. 198(F)), and it is indicated whether or not it is a big hit depending on the stop mode of the decorative design shown as a result of the reach effect. (Fig. 198(G), (H)). It is assumed that the reach effect shown in FIG. 198(F) is selected based on the change pattern of the change using the lottery effect distribution table as shown in FIG. 178. Is omitted.

Although not shown in the figure, in the case of executing the main effect in which the reach state is not finally established in the variation, the state shown in FIG. 198(E) does not shift to FIG. 198(E) after FIG. 198(B). After the variation of the decorative pattern in the middle row is stopped from the out-of-reach state as shown in C), the variation ends.

As described above, according to the first example of the decisive battle continuous effect illustrated in FIGS. 197 and 198, when a certain change is determined as the target of the main effect, one or more changes stored before the change are stored. In, expected performance can be executed. Then, in each expected production, a special display (tempered agitation) that suggests the establishment of a specific mode (reach state) appears, and also in this production, a similar special display appears, and then the specific mode is established. Is displayed, the reach effect is displayed. As a result, the special display appears in both the expected production and the main production, and since the expectation for the big hit by the main production is high, the player's expectation for the big hit when the special display appears. Can be sustained.

Further, if the game period in which such expected effects and main effects are executed is regarded as the “specific period”, the special display is concentrated during the specific period in the advantageous game state (the number-of-times division certain change state) in which the game period is limited. Since it will appear in the, it has the effect of increasing the expectation for a big hit.

[9-2-2. Display example of decisive battle continuous production (second example)]
Next, a second example of the decisive battle continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 200. The second example is different from the first example in the effect display when the expected effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations. In the second example, the look-ahead determination is performed on the memory of the fluctuations that are the target of the main effect, and the pseudo continuous effect is used in the main effect, and the like, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 199 is a diagram (No. 1) illustrating an example of an effect display regarding the final battle continuous effect of the second example. 199(A) to (F) show examples of continuous effect display in the expected effect, and FIGS. 199(A) to (C) correspond to FIGS. 197(A) to (C).

FIG. 199(C) shows a state in which the reach state has not been established because the decorative pattern different from that in the left column is stopped in the right column, although the special display showing the tempura twist appears. In the first example, when the reach state is not established in the expected production, the variation of the decorative pattern in the middle row is stopped as a normal variation and the transition to the next variation display is performed, but in the second example. In such a case, the effect display including a suggestion that the expected effect is continuously performed even in the next variation is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 199(D), the dialogue display of the character 1904a is "Q-chan Regards!", first, dialogue display suggesting a change of the character is performed, and in response to the dialogue, In FIG. 199(E), a character 1904b indicating "Q-chan" appears. The dialogue display of the character 1904b is also changed to "Ikuzo". In this way, denying that the expected performance ends by the occurrence of a change of characters or a change in the dialogue display despite the failure mode of not reaching reach appears, and continues after that. Is suggested. The change of the character shown in FIGS. 199(D) to (E) does not necessarily have to be performed.

Although omitted in FIG. 199, the variation stop of the decorative symbol in the middle row may be displayed while performing the effect display shown in FIGS. 199(D) and 199(E). In addition, the variation stop of the decorative pattern in the middle row in the expected effect is not important in the second example, and thus may be displayed small in the corner of the screen 1900 or the like.

Then, after the continuation of the expected effect is suggested in FIG. 199(E), as shown in FIG. 199(F), the expected effect is executed again on the screen 1900 in accordance with the next variable display of the special symbol. .. Referring to the hold display area 1902 and the pedestal display area 1903 in FIG. 199(F), it is clear that the effect display is obtained after one hold memory is consumed.

However, in the second example, when the next expected effect is continuously performed, at least one of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the previous expected effect (for example, the “7” symbol in the left column) maintains the stopped state. As it is, the variation of the decorative pattern in the other row is performed. Strictly speaking, the decorative pattern in which the stopped state is maintained may transit from the complete stopped state to the temporary stopped state. In this way, the next expected production is performed while maintaining a part of the drawing forming the special display in the previous expected production, so that the relationship between the previous expected production and the next expected production is further improved. It will be strongly indicated, and you can expect that the continuity of the expected performance will be strongly felt.

Further, in the second example, as shown in FIG. 199(F), at the initial stage when the next variable display is started, the decorative symbol (“7” symbol) in the left column is already in the stopped state, and the character 1904b( Alternatively, since the character 1904a) and the dialogue display are also displayed, a "special display" that expects the reach state to be established appears when the variable display is started. Therefore, at the start of the change, the player can be made aware that the expected production is continuously executed or the main production is executed, and the future development can be noted. ..

Then, in FIG. 199 (F) and thereafter, it is shown whether or not the reach state is established as a result of the special display that has been performed by executing the expected production, and when the expected production is continued next time as well. , The expected effect is repeatedly performed while maintaining a part of the drawing forming the special display (while the decorative pattern on the left column is stopped). After that, when all the fluctuations in which the expected effect is performed are completed, the fluctuations targeted for the main effect are started (see FIG. 200). In this way, when the expected effect is repeated over a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol, on the screen 1900, the fluctuation start and the fluctuation stop are repeated plural times while at least one of the decorative symbols is maintained in the stopped state. Will be displayed. Since such a display mode is similar to the pseudo continuous production that can be executed in the main production, when the expected production is continuously executed, the player is wondering whether the displayed production is the expected production or not. Since it is difficult to recognize, the expectation for a big hit by this production will be further increased.

FIG. 200 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of an effect display regarding the final battle continuous effect of the second example. FIGS. 200(A) to (F) show examples of continuous effect display in the main effect, which is continuous from the expected effect of the second example shown in FIG. 199(F).

In FIG. 200(A), after the expected effect as shown in FIG. 199 appears, the main effect is started in the change (the change corresponding to the pedestal display 1903a in which the inro in the flame state is displayed). The situation is shown. In FIG. 200(A), as an example, a character 1904b having a higher degree of expectation than the character 1904a is drawn, and the dialogue display of the character is “chance!”, so that the decorative pattern stopped in the left column. The possibility of establishment of the reach state in (“7” pattern) is suggested.

Note that, as described with reference to FIG. 199, when the expected effect is repeated over a plurality of fluctuations, the fluctuation display is performed a plurality of times while maintaining the decorative pattern in the left column in the stopped state (including the temporary stopped state). However, even at the time of the transition from the variation in which the expected production is performed to the variation in which the main production is performed (corresponding to the transition from FIG. 199 to FIG. 200 ), the decorative pattern in the left column on the screen 1900 maintains the stopped state. As it is, it is assumed that the variable display is performed in such a manner that only the decorative pattern in the right column changes again. By performing the effect display in such a manner, in a series of effects leading from the expected effect to the main effect, similarly to the effect mode similar to the pseudo continuous effect is realized by repeating the expected effect over a plurality of fluctuations. Also realizes a production mode similar to the pseudo continuous production. Also, as will be described later, since the pseudo continuous effect can be executed in the main effect itself, in a plurality of changes from the expected effect to the main effect, the effect display similar to the pseudo continuous effect is repeated, and accordingly, the special effect is generated. The display will appear many times.

In FIG. 200(B), a situation in which the same decorative design (“7” design) as in the left column is likely to stop is shown in the right column. At this time, the dialogue display of the character 1904b may be changed to a display that further enhances the degree of expectation, such as “Gekiatsu!!”. Further, as described in the first example of the decisive battle continuous production, in the main production, a pseudo continuous production is performed in which the variable design is displayed a plurality of times during the variation time of the special design (the variation). Therefore, after FIG. 200(B), a mode of reach failure is shown once (for example, refer to FIG. 198(C)), and the decorative pattern in the left column is kept in the stopped state (temporary stopped state) while in the right column. Re-changing the decorative pattern (see, for example, FIGS. 198(B) and 198(D)) may be repeated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 200(C), when the same decorative symbol (for example, “7” symbol) is stopped in the left and right rows, the establishment of the special mode (reach state) appears. This situation corresponds to FIG. 198(E) in the first example of the decisive battle continuous production. Then, as shown in FIGS. 200(D) to (F), various reach effects are revealed, and whether or not a big hit is shown according to the stop mode of the decorative design shown as a result of the reach effect. However, these processes correspond to FIGS. 198(F) to (H) in the first example of the decisive battle continuous production.

As described above, according to the second example of the decisive battle continuous production illustrated in FIGS. 199 and 200, when a certain variation is determined as the target of the main production, one or more variations stored before the variation are stored. In, expected performance can be executed. Then, in each expected performance, a special display (tempered agitation) that suggests the establishment of a specific mode (reach state) appears, and in the expected performance performed with continuous pending changes, the decoration that was stopped and displayed in the previous expected performance While at least one of the symbols (for example, the “7” symbol in the left column) is maintained in a stopped state, the decorative symbol in the other column is changed, so that the special display is repeatedly displayed in a manner similar to the pseudo continuous production. be able to. Furthermore, even when the change of the target of the main effect is started following the change in which the expected effect is displayed, the special display is displayed while at least one of the decorative symbols previously stopped and displayed remains stopped. Will be issued. Then, in the main effect, the pseudo continuous effect in which the special display can be repeatedly displayed is performed, and when the reach state is established, the reach effect is displayed. By performing such a series of decisive battle continuous production, in any of the expected production and the main production, a special display (tempered agitation) that suggests the establishment of a specific mode (reach state) will appear, When the special display appears, the player's expectation for a big hit can be maintained. Particularly in the second example, such a series of decisive battle continuous production is performed in a state in which at least one of the decorative patterns maintains the stop mode, so that the continuity is highly conscious and it is difficult to distinguish the expected production from the main production. Therefore, in the series of game period from the time when the special display appears in the expected effect until the game result is finally shown by the actual effect, the effect of sustaining the expectation for the jackpot is further enhanced. To be

Further, if the game period in which such expected effects and main effects are executed is regarded as a “specific period”, there will be one or more fluctuations in the specific period in the advantageous game state (the number division probability variation state) in which the game period is limited. Expected performance in which special display can be repeatedly displayed over, and main performance in which special display can be repeatedly displayed by pseudo continuous production in which a decorative pattern can be displayed multiple times within one change Therefore, the special display can be concentrated (also called "continuously"). In this way, the special display that indicates the establishment of the reach state is concentratedly (or continuously) displayed for a specific period, so that the player can recognize the special situation and expectation for the big hit. Can be increased.

In addition, in the first example and the second example of the above-mentioned decisive battle continuous production, the target variation of the main production is first determined (look-ahead, etc.), and the expected production is performed with respect to the pending variation before that. It is not necessary to execute the expected effect for all of the changes, and for example, the expected effect may be executed for at least one of the pending changes based on lottery or predetermined processing. Further, for example, among such holding fluctuations, a fluctuation for starting the expected performance is determined based on lottery or a predetermined process, and all the pending fluctuations from the determined fluctuation to the target fluctuation of the main performance are continuously performed. You may make it perform an expected production.

Then, when the expected effect is executed by the hold change (pre-change) before the change based on the fact that the execution of the main effect is determined by the change, the peripheral control board 4104 executes the main effect. By performing the process of replacing the effect of each pre-variation (effect other than the expected effect) that has been determined based on each variation pattern before the determination with the expected effect, the expected effect can be executed in each of the pre-variation. ..

Further, as another example of the control process of the decisive battle continuous effect, the execution of the expected effect can be determined when a variable time (effect time) that is relatively easy to select is selected in the number-of-times definite change state. The expected effect is executed at a frequency of a predetermined frequency or more (for example, the expected effect is executed three times or more in the last five games), and immediately after that, a predetermined long variation time that is longer than the variation time that is relatively easy to be selected. If is selected, the main effect may be executed. In such a case, the target variation of the main effect is not determined first as in the first example and the second example, but the main effect can be executed based on the selection situation of the expected effect. Considering that the expectation for a big hit is high when a long variation time is selected in the probability change state of the number of times division, the expectation for the big hit is maintained by the appearance of the special display, and Expectations for a big hit can be expected to improve due to the concentrated display.

Further, in the first example and the second example of the above-mentioned decisive battle continuous production, the special display (tempered agitation) that expects the reach state to be established by the decorative design is a decorative design that stops in the left column, and in the agitation character display area 1904. Although an example constituted by display images (characters 1904a and 1904b and their dialogues) has been described (see FIGS. 197 to 200), display images relating to such special display are arbitrarily combined, and depending on the combination, The degree of expectation for the development of the decisive battle continuous production may be changed. Specifically, for example, when the character 1904b is drawn in the special display together with the dialogue display "reach confirmed", the establishment of the reach state may be confirmed. Further, for example, the degree of expectation regarding the development after the reach state is established may be suggested by a combination of the display images regarding the special display. Specifically, the character 1904a is drawn with the dialogue display "Congratulations" in the special display. When the game is played, the reach state may be established and the big hit may be confirmed. By doing this, in a situation where the special display can appear multiple times in the battle series production, the degree of expectation for subsequent development changes depending on the display content of the special display, so that the specific display image appears in the special display. It is possible to always enjoy the change of the effect display by, for example, expecting the player to put it out, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not make the player tired.

In addition, it can be said that one of the features of the decisive battle continuous production according to the present embodiment is that a special display (tempered agitation) that expects the establishment of the reach state by the decorative pattern appears in both the expected production and the main production. It is possible to increase the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit as a result of the series of final battles (more strictly, the degree of expectation of a big hit in the main production) as the special display appears continuously in the production or main production. preferable.

Further, in the decisive battle continuous production according to the present embodiment, the suggestion of the continuous appearance of the special display may be performed depending on the display mode of the character or the like in the special display. For example, in the expected production or the main production, after the special display appears and the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are in the stopped state (including the temporary stopped state), the character is displayed in the fanned character display area 1904 until a predetermined time elapses. Whether or not the special display is displayed again after the expected effect or the main effect is indicated by indicating whether or not the special display is left.

Further, although the decisive battle continuous production as described above is based on the combination of the expected production and the main production, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not necessarily have to execute the expected production and the main production in combination. .. Specifically, for example, when the execution of the main effect is determined, if there is no memory of the pending fluctuation other than the fluctuation, the main effect is executed without executing the expected effect. Good. As described above, by making it possible to change the execution combination of the expected production and the main production, it is possible to realize diversity regarding the development of the production, and it can be expected to increase the interest of the player.

[9-3. Hold promotion production]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (screen 1900) can be changed as one of the effect displays different from the effects described in 9-1 and 9-2. Has a performance. In this example, such an effect is tentatively referred to as a "hold promotion effect" and will be described in detail below. In addition, in the hold promotion effect in this example, when the "attention effect" appears based on one of the targeted hold displays and the success of the "attention effect" is indicated, the display of the hold display is performed. The mode is changed to a display mode in which the expectation for a big hit is high. This hold promotion effect is realized, for example, by the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a) controlling the effect contents to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. Regarding the execution timing of the effect and the determination of the effect result. The peripheral control board 4010 may be executed based on an instruction from the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a).

FIG. 201 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of an effect display regarding the hold promotion effect. FIG. 201A shows a situation where variable display corresponding to the pedestal display 1903a is started on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (screen 1900). Since each part of FIG. 200A is the same as that of FIG. 189, the description thereof will be omitted, but the start of three variable displays is suspended.

When no special effect is executed, after the effect display as shown in FIG. 201(A), the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed in the central display area 1901 is stopped. However, in this example, it is assumed that the hold promotion effect is executed for the hold display 1902c, and transitions of the effect display in this case are shown in FIGS. 201(B) to (D) and FIGS. 202(A) to (J). A detailed explanation will be given with reference.

First, at a predetermined timing (for example, when a special random number of a variation corresponding to the hold display 1902c is acquired), it is determined whether or not the hold promotion effect is executed. In this example, the main control MPU 4100a makes the determination by pre-reading the random number value of the acquired special random number, but for example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is included in the command or the like notified from the main control board 4100. The determination may be made by referring to the information. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a determines to execute the hold promotion effect, the result of the determination is attached to a command and notified to the peripheral control board 4010, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a is promoted to hold promotion based on the result of the determination. The execution of the effect is started, and the display of the suspended promotion effect is controlled on the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

FIG. 201(B) is an effect display example when execution of the hold promotion effect for the hold display 1902c is started. In FIG. 201(B), as the start of the “attention effect” in the hold promotion effect, the duplication of the inro (display color is normally used “white”) displayed in the hold display 1902c of the hold display area 1902 is enlarged. Then, the large inro cage is displayed in the central display area 1901 (display of the large inro cage). It is emphasized that such a display of the large in cage starts the effect on the hold display 1902c, and then, in FIG. 201C, the lid of the large in cage displayed in the central display area 1901 is opened. An effect image that causes smoke to appear is displayed.

In the suspended promotion effect of this example, the display mode that is more noticeable than the variable display of the decorative symbol originally displayed in the central display area 1901 for the “attention effect” that appears in the central display area 1901 after the display of the large inro cage. One of the features is that it is displayed (a mode in which the player can be given priority to pay attention). Specifically, FIG. 201B shows an example in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is temporarily hidden, and FIG. 201C shows a small display area 1901a at the corner of the screen 1900. An example in which the variation of the decorative design is displayed is shown. The appearance of the "attention effect" in the suspended promotion effect in a more conspicuous manner than the variable display of the decorative symbol is not limited to the above illustrated example, and in addition, for example, the attention effect is more likely than the variable display of the decorative symbol. You may make it display on the front side, and you may make it display the variable display of a decorative design semi-transparently, while the noticeable production is showing. In particular, when the attention effect is displayed in front of the variable display of the decorative design, a layer for displaying the attention effect and a layer for displaying the decorative pattern are prepared in advance, and each layer is displayed. The arrangement relationship (upper and lower relationship) may be adjusted by switching.

In this way, by displaying the noticeable effect in the central display area 1901 in a more conspicuous manner than the variable display of the decorative symbol, even if the variable display of the decorative symbol advances, the noticeable effect is more important to the player. Can make you feel.

The continuation of the attention production in the hold promotion production will be described. In FIG. 201(D), it is shown that the smoke displayed in FIG. 201(C) spreads greatly, and spheres are displayed one by one in the clockwise direction. Different characters are attached to each sphere, and whether or not the attention production is successful is indicated by whether or not a total of nine spheres with such characters are displayed.

FIG. 202 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the effect display regarding the hold promotion effect. 202(A) to (E) are examples of effect display when the attention effect is successful, and FIGS. 202(F) to (J) are example of effect display when the attention effect is unsuccessful.

First, the case where the attention production is successful will be described. In FIG. 202(A), nine spheres with the characters “Rin”, “Soldier”, “Battle”, “Person”, “Everyone”, “Team”, “Risk”, “Presence”, and “Front” are displayed. As described above, it shows that attention production has succeeded. At this time, in the next FIG. 202(B), a special image (specifically, an image simulating a treasure ring) is drawn to indicate the success of the attention production in response to the fact that 9 balls are aligned. This special image (treasure ring) moves toward the hold display 1902c that is the starting point of the noticeable effect.

Then, in FIG. 202(C), the display mode of the hold display 1902c is changed to a display mode having a high expectation for a big hit. In FIG. 202(C), the pending display 1902c is shown in a diagonally-circular display mode, but this indicates that, for example, the display color of the inro is red. FIG. 203 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the hold display color and the degree of expectation. According to FIG. 203, the display color of red indicates the degree of expectation of “30.0%”, which shows that the display mode has a high degree of expectation. Then, considering that the display color of the imprint of the hold display 1902c in FIG. 201(B) is white (the expectation level is 2.0% with reference to FIG. 203), the success of the attention production causes It can be seen that the expectation level for the jackpot of the hold was significantly increased from 2.0% to 30.0%, and the hold was promoted to a higher position (promotion of the hold display).

It should be noted that the promotion of the hold display is not limited to the above-described change of the hold display color, and any change may be made as long as the display mode having a high expectation for a big hit is changed. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 190, by changing the effect of the hold display or additionally displaying characters, it is possible to promote the display mode to have a high expectation for a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 202(C), the attention effect is completed, and the change of the display mode for the predetermined hold display (hold display 1902c) is ended, and thus the hold promotion effect of this example ends. Then, at this time, while the hold display is promoted, the variable display of the decorative pattern is originally changed from the small display area 1901a at the corner of the screen 1900 with the completion of the attention effect shown in the central display area 1901. Is displayed in the central display area 1901.

After that, on the screen 1900, the variable display of the decorative design progresses as shown in FIG. 202(D), and finally, the decorative design of each column is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. The effect display corresponding to is finished.

Next, a case where the attention production fails will be described. In FIG. 202(F), six balls to which the characters of "Din", "Army", "Battle", "Person", "Everyone" and "Team" are attached are displayed. Since it is not displayed, the appearance of attention has failed. At this time, in the next FIG. 202 (G), in response to the failure of the noticeable effect, the sphere disappears and the remaining smoke is drawn in the central display area 1901, and the smoke becomes the starting point of the noticeable effect. It moves toward the display 1902c.

Then, in FIG. 202(H), the display mode of the hold display 1902c is not changed from that at the start of the noticeable effect (FIG. 201(B)), and the noticeable effect and the hold promotion effect are finished. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not returned from the small display area 1901a at the corner of the screen 1900 to the original central display area 1901 with the completion of the noticeable effect appearing in the central display area 1901. The same as in FIG. 202(C) when the attention production is successful.

After that, on the screen 1900, the variable display of the decorative symbol progresses as shown in FIG. 202(I), and finally, the decorative symbol of each column is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. The effect display corresponding to is finished.

In the hold promotion effect according to the present embodiment, the change of the hold display when the attention effect fails is not particularly limited, and the display change of the hold display 1902c does not occur as shown in FIG. 202(H). Display processing may be performed. However, in order to secure the effect that the hold display is promoted when the attention production is successful, it is preferable that the expectation for the big hit is not increased in principle when the attention production is failed. Specifically, for example, when the attention production fails, the display mode may be changed to have a lower expectation for a big hit than before the occurrence of the attention production. However, in order to give unexpectedness to the production and to prevent the player's interest in the hold change that was the target of the hold promotion production being lost, in some cases when the attention production fails However, it is not denied that the processing for promoting the suspended display (changing to a display mode with high expectation) is intentionally performed.

As described above, in the hold promotion effect according to the present embodiment, the notice effect is displayed with respect to the predetermined hold display, and when the notice effect is successful, the hold display is changed to a display mode having a high expectation for a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the change in the hold display. Furthermore, by displaying the pending promotion effect (attention effect), which is an effect display related to future fluctuations, in a more prominent manner than the variable display of the decorative pattern, which is effect display related to the current fluctuations, it is possible to obtain a future Since it is possible to make the player interested in the fluctuation, even if the expectation for the big hit is low in the effect result of the current fluctuation, the effect of high expectation concerning the future fluctuation is revealed. , It has the effect of increasing expectations for big hits.

Note that, in the above description using FIGS. 201 to 203, an example in which the hold promotion effect is executed for the hold display 1902c that has just been held displayed has been described, but the execution timing of the hold promotion effect is particularly limited. Not a thing. That is, it is possible to execute the hold promotion effect at an arbitrary timing after the hold display (for example, at the time of the start of the next successive change). Such execution timing may be controlled by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), or may be determined by the peripheral control board 4010 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) while referring to other holding statuses. ..

In addition, it is preferable that the pending change that is the execution target of the pending promotion effect according to the present embodiment is a pending fluctuation that has a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Specifically, for example, the result of the pre-reading determination performed by the main control MPU 4100a. It may be set so that it is easy to determine that it is an execution target of the hold promotion effect when it is a big hit or when a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time is selected.

Further, as described in [4], the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment employs the priority variation of the second special symbol, specifically, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display cannot be executed at the same time, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol. However, with the pachinko machine 1 in the normal gaming state, right-handed hitting is not recommended (left-handed hitting or top hitting is recommended), so it is almost unlikely that a game ball will enter the second starting opening 2587b. However, it cannot be said that there is a possibility that a game ball will enter the second starting opening 2587b even in the normal game state. In such a case, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously displayed. In addition, the fluctuation of the second special symbol will interrupt preferentially.

In this way, when the interruption variation occurs due to the second special symbol, the process regarding the hold promotion effect is controlled so that the look-ahead effect regarding the variation display of the first special symbol does not become unnatural or irrational effect due to the interruption variation. Just do it. Specifically, for example, pre-reading by the main control MPU4100a for determining whether or not to execute the hold promotion effect (more specifically, pre-reading of the random number value of the first special gain random number), of the second special symbol Suspend until the interrupt change ends. Further, as another example, the variable display by the second special symbol of the interruption may also be a target of the pending promotion effect, and the random number value of the second special random number corresponding to the second special symbol may be prefetched. It should be noted that such a response to the interruption variation can be applied to each effect display described in [9] and below.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the number of holdings displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 or the second special symbol storage display 1187 exceeds a predetermined number (or when a predetermined condition is satisfied). In addition, by using a dedicated time-shortening variation pattern, the variation time of the special design and decorative design in the current variation (or the next variation) is made shorter than the variation time based on the variation pattern that has been selected so far. Good. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 becomes three or more, the number of reservations displayed on the first special symbol storage display 1184 becomes two or less. Up to, it is possible to shorten the variation time relating to the variation display of the special symbols in the outlying mode.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the variation time is shortened based on the hold status in this way, the hold promotion effect can be executed. For example, the overall execution time of the hold promotion effect is shortened by shortening the appearance time of the attention effect by the amount of change time shortened, and the hold promotion effect and the variable display of the decorative design are reduced within the reduced change time. To enable. As an example of processing for shortening the appearance time of the noticeable effect, after displaying the large in cage as shown in FIG. 201(B) at the start of the noticeable effect, the display in FIGS. 201(C) and (D) is skipped. By displaying the screen showing the result of the noticeable effect, that is, (A) of FIG. 202 or FIG. 202(F), the appearance time of the noticeable effect can be shortened. When it is desired to further shorten the appearance time, the drawing of the subsequent screen (FIG. 202(B) or FIG. 202(G)) may be omitted. Further, as another processing example, a series of attention effects as shown in FIGS. 201(B) to (D), 202(A) to (C), and 202(F) to (H) are displayed at high speed. May be processed as follows. As described above, by making it possible to show the result of the noticeable effect while allowing the appearance time of the noticeable effect to be adjusted, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time is shortened based on the hold status. Even in the case of, the hold promotion effect can be executed while maintaining the natural effect progression. Note that such adjustment of the effect time can be applied to each effect display described in [9] and below.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the above, the above hold promotion effect may be easily executed for a hold change in which a hold display is performed in a display mode different from the normal display mode. In this case, after attracting the player's attention by a hold display that is different from the normal display, the hold promotion effect is performed and the notice effect is displayed, so that a further expectation can be given. As for the hold display of the display mode different from the normal one, each display example shown in FIG. 190 can be cited. In addition to this, for example, as a display example suggesting that the hold promotion effect may be executed, It is also possible to blink the imprint or the like drawn in the hold display area 1902.

On the other hand, the hold promotion effect according to the present embodiment may be easily performed for the hold display in the normal display mode (specifically, the inro display without any color or character). In such a case, at the start of the change of the symbol, the noticeable effect of the hold promotion effect suddenly appears from the inconspicuous hold display as a starting point, so a more shocking impression can be given and an effect of enhancing the interest can be expected. ..

In addition, the hold promotion effect according to the present embodiment does not deny the appearance of the expected effect regarding the variable display of the decorative symbol that is performed in parallel. In other words, even when the pending promotion effect for the pending fluctuation is displayed, the expected effect for the fluctuation may be displayed. However, when the hold promotion effect and the expected effect related to the change appear, the hold promotion effect is performed before the start of the expected effect, so that the player gives priority to the hold promotion effect. Try to get attention to.

In addition, in the hold promotion effect described above, the attention effect appears based on one of the targeted hold displays, and when the attention effect is successful, the display mode of the hold display is changed. In the hold promotion effect according to the present embodiment, the display mode of a plurality of hold displays may be changed by one-time hold promotion effect. More specifically, even if there is only one hold display that is the starting point of the noticeable effect, the hold promotion due to the success of the noticeable effect is performed not only for the one hold display but also for a plurality of hold displays. Can be Further, the hold display which is the starting point of the noticeable effect may be a plurality of hold displays, and the hold promotion associated with the success of the noticeable effect may be performed by the plurality of hold displays. Then, when performing the hold promotion for a plurality of hold displays, the display forms may be changed to the same display form, or the display forms may be changed to have different jackpot expectations. In this way, since the hold promotion effect for a plurality of hold displays is also possible, the hold promotion effect can be diversified, so that the effect of further enhancing the playability can be expected.

[9-4. Freezing period]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as one of the effect displays different from the effects described above in 9-1 to 9-3, it is taught in the advantageous game state that is controlled until a predetermined game period elapses. The effect of advancing the game a plurality of times without changing (reducing) the remaining period of the advantageous game state is provided. In this example, such an effect is tentatively referred to as “period freezing effect”. The period freezing effect is, for example, an effect that is executed in an advantageous game state (number-of-times-breaking probability change state) that is controlled only for a predetermined number of games, and is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (screen 1900) over a plurality of games. It can be divided into "lock effect" in which the remaining period display of the advantageous game state displayed is not subtracted, and adjustment of the remaining period display performed after the "lock effect" ends. The lock effect is performed during the period freezing effect, but the adjustment of the remaining period display does not necessarily have to be performed during the period freezing effect as described later in 9-4-2. Hereinafter, such a period freezing effect will be described in detail. Note that the period freezing effect is realized, for example, by the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a) controlling the effect contents to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900. The setting and adjustment may be performed by the peripheral control board 4010 based on an instruction from the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a).

FIG. 204 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect display related to the period freeze effect. As described above with reference to FIG. 176(B), 9-2, etc., in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special 1 or specific 3 big hit is won, the game of the big hit is V long opening. After that, the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state, and this high probability state (probability variation state) is controlled together with a specified number of time-saving states (165 times in the high probability state and a big hit in the low probability state). (100 times), or until the next big hit is won in the time saving state (number-of-times definite change state). FIGS. 204(A) to 204(G) show examples of game effect display in such a number-of-times definite certainty state.

First, FIG. 204(A) shows a state in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a detached manner on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (screen 1900) when being controlled to the number-of-times definite certainty state. Further, the remaining period display area 1905 at the lower right of the screen 1900 is a display area for teaching the remaining period of the advantageous game state to the player, and in FIG. 204(A), the number of remaining "45" games is It is displayed. In the number-of-times definite probability variation state, the remaining period (remaining number) of the advantageous game state taught by the remaining period display area 1905 means “remaining number of time saving times” and “remaining period of probability variation state (high probability state)”. Is synonymous with. Therefore, according to the remaining period display area 1905 of FIG. 204A, it is taught that the period which is controlled to the time saving state (and the high probability state) remains until the game is repeated 45 times.

Next, FIG. 204B shows a state where the hold displays 1902a to 1902c are moved to the left one by one and the fluctuation corresponding to the pedestal display 1903a is started. At this time, the display count of the remaining period teaching area 1905 is "44" times, which is one time subtraction from "45" times in FIG. 204(A).

[9-4-1. Lock production]
It is assumed that the period freezing effect is started during the fluctuation started in FIG. 204(B). FIG. 204C is an example of an effect display immediately after the period freezing effect is executed. First, a “lock effect” in which the remaining period display in the remaining period display area 1905 is hidden occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 204(C), in the screen 1900 in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed, the chains that suddenly extend from the respective corners hide the remaining period display in the remaining period display area 1905. After that, until the lock effect is finished, the variable display of the decorative pattern is advanced while the remaining display is hidden. In FIG. 204(C), it is preferable that the chain image is drawn in front of the other images on the screen 1900 to emphasize the importance of the period freezing effect.

FIG. 204(D) shows a situation in which the decorative design is fluctuating and stopped in a disengaged state in the state of FIG. 204(C) in which the remaining period display is hidden by the lock effect. Here, in the normal effect display when the period freezing effect is not executed, the display of the remaining period display area 1905 is then performed as described in the screen transition from FIG. 204(A) to FIG. 204(B). The number of times is subtracted by one, and the next variable display is about to start, but in FIG. 204(D), the next variable display by the decorative pattern starts while the hidden state of the remaining period display due to the lock effect continues. (For example, FIG. 204(C)). In addition, in FIG. 204(D), the character "sealed" is displayed in front of the chain image in the remaining period display area 1905, but this changes (subtracts) the remaining period teaching in the advantageous game state is stopped. It is an example of a display that indicates that.

In this way, after the next fluctuation starts while the remaining period display is hidden (the subtraction display is stopped), the fluctuation display is performed again in the same manner as shown in FIGS. 204(C) to (D). Will be done. In the period freezing effect according to the present embodiment, the lock effect appears over a plurality of game periods in which the variable display of the symbol (decorative symbol or special symbol) is performed multiple times. The game period in which the lock effect appears is determined by the main control board 4100 or the peripheral control board 4010. Then, when a plurality of game periods in which the lock effect is revealed have elapsed, the lock effect ends, and the process proceeds to FIG. 204(E) or FIG. 204(F).

Note that in the example of FIG. 204, the number of pending displays displayed in the pending display area 1902 is not changed when FIGS. 204(C) to (D) repeatedly appear. This is because the pseudo continuous production is performed as an example for realizing the appearance of the lock production over a plurality of game periods. This pseudo continuous production, by forming a fluctuating stop state by placing the decorative pattern in a stopped state by "temporary stop", then releasing the stopped state and changing the decorative pattern again, a special symbol In one variation time, a mode in which the decorative pattern varies pseudo-continuously (or stops varying) over a plurality of times is revealed. Then, by displaying the pseudo continuous production while hiding the remaining period display in the period freezing production, the period freezing production is realized in which the remaining period of the time saving state (and the high probability state) does not decrease over a plurality of fluctuation displays. can do. However, since the pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed multiple times during one variable display by the special symbol, when the pseudo continuous effect is used during the lock effect of the period freezing effect, it is in the advantageous game state. Only one value of the internal counter (time saving counter) relating to the number of games controlled is consumed (subtracted).

Further, the method for realizing the appearance of the lock effect over a plurality of game periods in the period freezing effect is not limited to the pseudo continuous effect as described above. In addition, for example, while the variable display of the special symbol is performed a plurality of times, in other words, while the variable display based on the special random number is performed a plurality of times, the lock effect may be continuously displayed. However, in such a case, since a plurality of internal time saving counters regarding the advantageous game state are consumed (subtracted) during the lock effect, the remaining period in the process after the end of the lock effect described later. You may need to adjust the display.

In any case, in the period freezing effect, the above-described lock effect occurs over a plurality of game periods, so that the remaining period (remaining number of times) of the advantageous game state is reduced in the plurality of game periods. It can be shown to the player as if the game is progressing. In the first place, the number division probability change is an advantageous game state with a finite control period, so the more you can not win the big hit and the more the game progresses, the shorter the remaining advantageous game state period becomes, and the expectation for the next big hit diminishes. Although there is not a little problem that the interest is reduced, the period freezing effect according to the present embodiment not only makes the user feel a sense of security and can suppress such a decline in interest, but is also advantageous for the player. Since it is possible to give the impression that the game is in progress, it is possible to increase the expectation for a big hit and improve the interest.

Further, in the period freezing effect according to the present embodiment, the display content may be fixed and shown during the lock effect, instead of hiding the remaining period display in the remaining period display area 1905. Specifically, the game of a plurality of times during the lock effect is advanced without changing the display of the remaining number of "44" times displayed in FIG. 204(B). Even in such a case, it is possible to show that the game is being played a plurality of times without decreasing the remaining period of the advantageous game state, and thus it is possible to achieve the same effect as when the remaining period display is hidden.

[9-4-2. Remaining period display adjustment]
FIG. 204(E) is an effect display example in the case where the same decorative pattern is aligned and a big hit is shown after the passage of the lock effect over a plurality of game periods. Actually, a reach state is established and a reach effect and the like associated with the establishment are displayed between FIG. 204(D) and FIG. 204(E), but it is the same as described in other effect display examples. Therefore, the description is omitted. In FIG. 204(E), a big hit is shown while the display of the remaining period of the advantageous game state is stopped by the lock effect of the expected freezing effect, so that in the plurality of game periods of FIG. 204(C) to (D). , It is displayed that the big hit has been reached without being exhausted during the game period in the advantageous game state. In general, after winning the big hit, whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous game state again after the big hit game, the control period of the advantageous game state, and the like are determined again based on the big hit, and therefore in FIG. 204(E). The remaining period display area 1905 does not display the remaining number of advantageous game states after the stop state due to the lock effect is released.

On the other hand, FIG. 204(F) is an effect display example in the case where the decorative symbol is completely stopped in the disengaged mode after the lock effect over a plurality of game periods as shown in FIGS. 204(C) to (D) has passed. Is. In FIG. 204(F), as a display indicating the end of the lock effect, a state in which the chain image that has hidden the remaining period display area 1905 gradually disappears is shown. After that, when the chain image disappears completely as shown in FIG. 204(G), the remaining period display in the remaining period display area 1905 is exposed, and the display content of the remaining period display is adjusted as necessary. .. In FIG. 204(G), if the game period spanning a plurality of times in which the lock effect is revealed is based on a series of pseudo continuous effects, the number of games in a practical advantageous game state (the number of variations due to special symbols) Since it is consumed only once, the remaining period display in the remaining period display area 1905 remains “44” times as at the start of the lock effect shown in FIG. 204(B).

Below, the adjustment of the remaining period display after the end of the lock effect will be described in detail. The adjustment of the remaining period display is performed by different processing based on what kind of game the plurality of games during the lock effect are, how the remaining period of the advantageous gaming state is set, and the like. ..

(1) First Example First, as a first example, as illustrated and described with reference to FIG. 204, there is a mode in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed during the lock effect. In this case, as described above, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed multiple times during the lock effect, but the variable symbol of the special symbol is displayed only once, so the adjustment of the remaining period display after the end of the lock effect is performed. Is unnecessary.

In addition, in FIGS. 204(C) to (D), since the hold display is performed on the rear side of the chain image during the lock effect, the player determines that the pseudo-relationship effect is based on the display transition of the hold display. Although it was possible to guess, in order to make such a guess difficult, the hold display, the pedestal display, or the like may be hidden during the lock effect, or the display mode may be difficult to identify. By doing so, it seems that the game is being played multiple times during the lock production, so the player can feel the expectation for the jackpot, the sense of security by stopping the subtraction of the remaining period, and the profit. You can expect to feel the minutes.

(2) Second Example Next, as a second example, there is a mode in which variable display with special symbols is performed a plurality of times during the lock effect. In such a case, as described above, the value of the internal advantageous game state counter (time saving counter) is subtracted every time the variable display by the special symbol is performed, but in the remaining period display area 1905. By hiding (or fixing) the remaining period displayed, it is shown that the limited period of the advantageous game state is not consumed during the lock effect. However, after the end of the lock effect, the remaining period display is adjusted to match the value of the counter in the advantageous game state internally. It should be noted that such adjustment of the remaining period display does not have to be performed immediately after the end of the lock effect, and may be performed after a lapse of a certain period or at a predetermined timing when the remaining period of the advantageous gaming state is reduced.

It should be noted that if a large amount of remaining time is reduced and displayed at one time after the end of the lock effect, the player's interest may be reduced, so as an alternative method, the remaining time after the end of the lock effect is not adjusted, and then At a predetermined timing when the end of the advantageous game state is approaching (for example, when the remaining period becomes 20 times), the display mode of the remaining period display area 1905 is changed from the number of times displayed until then to the “?” mark. You may do the same. Then, by changing the display mode to the "?" mark, it is possible to absorb and adjust the number of times consumed during the lock effect by making the remaining number of strict advantageous game states taught to the player unclear. The advantageous gaming state may be ended when the hour/hour counter reaches “0”. In such a case, when the period freeze effect (mainly the lock effect) appears, the player can enjoy the advantageous game in which the subtraction of the remaining period of the advantageous game state is stopped, and the advantageous game. When the remaining period of the state becomes short, it is possible to entertain the player with the excitement of not knowing when the advantageous game state ends.

(3) Third Example Next, as a third example, in the number-of-times definite probability changing state, the internal remaining period of the advantageous game state and the remaining period taught in the remaining period display area 1905 are displayed differently. is there. Specifically, for example, at the start of the number-of-times definite probability variation state, when the number of games in the internal advantageous gaming state (corresponding to the setting value of the time saving counter) is set to "100" times, the remaining period display area 1905 is displayed. Remaining period display is set to "80" times. At this time, the difference of 20 times is the number of hidden advantageous game states (the number of times the back is set). Therefore, when the period freeze production is performed in the subsequent advantageous game state, the lock production of the period freeze production is performed. The number of games consumed during the game can be offset by the number of times the game is set back.

The method of the third example can be applied to both the pseudo continuous effect shown in the first example and the effect over a plurality of fluctuations shown in the second example, and is left in the middle of the advantageous game state. Since it is not necessary to adjust the period, it also contributes to the reduction of processing load.

Further, in the third example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a (may be the main control MPU 4100a) compares the number of games in the advantageous game state internally (the setting value of the time saving counter) with the remaining period display of the remaining period display area 1905. Then, when it is possible to confirm a difference of a predetermined number of times or more, control may be performed to facilitate execution of the period freezing effect. In such a case, it is possible to promote the digestion of the difference between the actual remaining number of times and the remaining number of times on the surface, and it is possible to perform the game progress in the overall advantageous gaming state with a natural impression. Not only that, there is a high possibility that the period freezing effect will be executed toward the end of the advantageous game state, so that the interest of the player can be improved as the remaining period becomes shorter.

And in the form of the third example, for example, when 80 games have passed without winning the next big hit, the remaining period displayed in the remaining period display area 1905 becomes 0, but by then Depending on the history of execution of the period freeze effect, the value of the hour/hour counter may not be 0 (one or more remain). In such a case, by displaying the game period until the hour/hour counter reaches 0 as an extension period, it is possible to additionally give the player a privilege (extension period of the advantageous game state) It is possible to provide various playability.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the period freezing effect in a specific advantageous game state in which the control period is defined finitely (in the example, the number division probability change state), and in the period freezing effect, A lock effect in which the remaining period of the advantageous game state taught to the player is not subtracted appears over a plurality of game periods, and moreover, the remaining period on the display of the advantageous game state that can occur with the lock effect is displayed. By matching the difference between the internal remaining period and the internal remaining period, a sense of security is given to alleviate the anxiety that the remaining period of the advantageous gaming state is decreasing, and the effect of enhancing the enjoyment of the game is realized.

Note that the execution timing of the period freezing effect may be executed by the peripheral control board 4010 based on an instruction from the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a), but in order to enhance the above-mentioned effect. When the random number value of the special random number acquired with the passage of the game ball through the starting opening is determined to have a high expectation for a big hit, control is performed so that the period freeze production is performed by fluctuation based on the random number value. Preferably. The main control board 4100 can determine whether or not the expectation for a big hit is high. In particular, if the look-ahead determination is performed, the period freeze production is performed in the state where the fluctuation is held before the variation is started. Can be decided to be executed, and an instruction for effect control can be sent to the peripheral control board 4010.

Also, when performing the pseudo continuous production during the lock production of the period freeze production, a relatively long variation time is required, so if a relatively long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, The execution of the freezing effect may be selected.

[10. Effect of this embodiment]
As described in [9-3], with the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a hold promotion effect that can change the display mode of the hold display on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 (screen 1900) can be executed. In the hold promotion effect, when the "attention effect" appears based on one of the targeted hold displays and the success of the "attention effect" is indicated, the display mode of the hold display changes to a big hit. By changing to a display mode with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the change in the hold display.

In addition, in the hold promotion effect of the present embodiment, the “attention effect” that appears in the central display area 1901 after the display of the large in basket is more prominent than the variable display of the decorative pattern that is originally displayed in the central display area 1901. One of the features is that it is shown in a mode (a mode in which the player can be given priority to pay attention). In this way, by displaying the noticeable effect in the central display area 1901 in a more conspicuous manner than the variable display of the decorative symbol, even if the variable display of the decorative symbol advances, the noticeable effect is more important to the player. Can make you feel. Then, the pending promotion effect (attention effect), which is an effect display related to future fluctuations, appears more prominently than the variable display of the decorative design, which is effect display related to the current fluctuations. Since it is possible to make the player interested in the fluctuation of, even if the expectation for the big hit is low, even if the result of the present fluctuation is low in expectation, the effect of high expectation concerning the future fluctuation will appear. And, it has the effect of increasing expectations for a big hit.

Note that the effect of the hold promotion effect in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the above, but other characteristic effects are mainly as described in [9-3].

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment described above as the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control board 4100 (mainly the main control MPU 4100a) has a starting area (first starting area) provided in the gaming area (gaming area 1100). It is an example of special game determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the passage of the game ball to the opening 2201 and the second starting opening 2587b), and based on the determination result of the special game determination means. It is an example of a special game execution means for performing a special game (big hit game), and a special symbol for controlling the variable display of the special symbol determined on the basis of the information stored in the starting memory holding means (for example, the random number value of the special random number). It is an example of a control means. Further, the main control board 4100 (mainly RAM4100e), the information extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the starting area, a predetermined number until the variable display of special symbols determined based on the information is executed It is an example of a starting memory holding means for storing as an upper limit, and more specifically, corresponds to the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area in the RAM in which each random number is stored. Further, the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is an example of a hold display means for displaying the storage status of the information by the start storage hold means. Here, although the number of the reserved storage relating to the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol storage display device 1184 or the second special symbol storage display device 1186, in the present embodiment, with respect to the suspension display displayed by the suspension display means. Since the effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device (main liquid crystal display device 1900), the storage status displayed by the hold display means corresponds to the hold display displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 by the peripheral control board 4010. In addition, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a) causes the effect display device (main liquid crystal display device 1900) to display the variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display. It corresponds to the decorative symbol control means for teaching the determination result by the special game determination means by the stop mode of the decorative symbol. Further, the peripheral control board 4010 (mainly the peripheral control MPU 4140a) causes the effect display device to present a predetermined attention effect targeting one of the hold displays displayed on the hold display means, and the particular mode is specified by the attention effect. When is displayed, it is an example of a hold promotion means for changing the display mode of the hold display to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation, and while the decorative pattern is being variably displayed by the decorative pattern control means. By displaying the noticeable effect by the hold promotion means in a more conspicuous manner than the variable display, even if the effect with low expectation for the big hit appears with the variable display, the expectation for the big hit can be increased. It is an example of an expectation improving means. In addition, the case where the peripheral control board 4010 executes based on an instruction from the main control board 4100 is also included. Specifically, the predetermined attention effect targeting one of the hold displays corresponds to the attention effect described in the hold promotion effect (for example, the effect that appears from FIG. 201(B)). The displayed specific aspect corresponds to a state in which nine spheres with letters are arranged as illustrated in FIG. 202(B). In addition, the process of increasing the expectation for the big hit by the expectation improving means corresponds to the process of a series of effect display examples (see FIGS. 201 to 202) of the hold promotion effect as described in [9-3].

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made as shown below without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Gaming board 5 Door frame 1100 Gaming area 1110A Front component member 1150 Gaming panel 1158 Opening 1900 Main liquid crystal display device, screen 1901 Central display area 1902 Suspended display area 1903 Pedestal display area 1904 Shaking character Display area 1905 Remaining period display area 2000 Table unit 2100 Attacker unit 2101 General winning opening 2102 First big winning opening 2200 Starting opening unit 2201 First starting opening 2201b First starting opening 2300 Front side unit 2301 General winning opening 2500 Center character 2502 Peripheral wall 2509 Second prize hole (reception)
2509a Attacker passage (distribution passage)
2509b Specific area 2510 Center base 2510k Branch passage 2510l Branch space 2510m Communication passage 2510n Second attacker space 2510p Guide part 2570 Second attacker unit 2571 Unit base 2571e Receiving part 2571f Guide part 2571i Lower right protrusion 2571j Stopper part 2572 Second opening/closing member (Opening/closing member)
2572a Blade part 2572b Shaft part 2578 Second count sensor 2578a Specific count sensor 2578b Movable piece 2580 Second starting port unit 2585a Gate part 2587b Second starting port

Claims (1)

A lottery means that obtains start information by passing a game ball to a predetermined area provided in the game area, and performs a lottery on a big hit when a start condition of the obtained start information is satisfied,
Special figure production means for performing a variation production on the display device in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol showing the winning of the big hit based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
Suspended storage means for suspending the starting information acquired in response to passing through the predetermined area,
A start memory display means capable of displaying the start information held in the hold storage means on a display device as a start memory display;
Pre-judgment means for pre-judging the acquired start information before the start condition is satisfied;
In the fluctuating effect that the starting condition of the acquired starting information is satisfied and executed, a specific effect means for executing a specific effect that makes a big hit come to be expected,
In the variable effect that is performed based on the start information that is acquired before the start information that causes the specific effect to be executed in the variable effect that is performed when the start condition is satisfied, the specific effect is performed later. A predictive presentation means for performing a predictive presentation that suggests that the variation production is executed,
Equipped with
The sign effect executed by the sign effect production means is an effect that suggests that the specific effect is executed in the variation effect that is performed later, and the sign that suggests that the specific effect is executed. When the aspect of the effect becomes a specific aspect, it is configured to be informed that the specific effect is executed in the variation effect performed later,
The start memory display means allows the player to recognize which of the start information with which the specific effect may be executed among the start information withheld in the hold storage means. The display mode of the start memory display is displayed in a modified mode different from the normal display mode,
When a plurality of pieces of the starting information acquired prior to the acquisition of the starting information displayed in the changing mode are stored in the holding storage unit, the starting information displayed in the changing mode is acquired. It is possible to perform the aforesaid effect in the variation effect of each of the plurality of starting information acquired before being performed,
By making the pre-determination performed by the pre-determination means before the start condition is satisfied and the lottery performed by the lottery means when the start condition of the start information is satisfied, the specific effect It is possible to determine that the start information is to be executed before the start condition of the start information is satisfied by the advance determination by the advance determination means.